A User's Guide to the New Familysearch Website (February 2011)

A User’s Guide to the New FamilySearch Website (February 2011) Publicado por

FamilySearch Internacional Salt Lake City, Utah

Este documento se puede copiar y descargar para uso incidental en la Iglesia o para uso personal sin fines comerciales. A User’s Guide to the New FamilySearch Website (February 2011)

Contents

Preface: Obtaining Updated Information...... xiii

Chapter 1: Introduction to the New FamilySearch Website...... 15 What the New FamilySearch Website Does...... 15 Registering to Use the New FamilySearch Website...... 16 Information Required for Registration...... 17 Registering for an LDS FamilySearch Account...... 18 Signing In and Signing Out...... 20 Solving Problems When You Cannot Sign In...... 20 Retrieving a Forgotten User Name for an LDS FamilySearch Account...... 21 Retrieving a Forgotten User Name for a FamilySearch Account...... 22 Changing a Forgotten Password for an LDS FamilySearch Account...... 22 Changing a Forgotten Password for a FamilySearch Account ...... 23 Getting Help...... 24 Seeing Help for Each Screen...... 24 Learning from Tutorials...... 25 Printing Instructions...... 25 Using the Help Center...... 25 Changing Your User Profile for an LDS FamilySearch Account...... 34 User Profile Options for an LDS FamilySearch Account...... 35 Changing Your User Profile for a FamilySearch Account...... 37 User Profile Options for a FamilySearch Account...... 37 Setting Preferences...... 38 Preference Settings...... 39 Preference Settings for the Watch Feature...... 40 Using the New FamilySearch Website for Someone Else...... 40 Contributors and Submitters...... 42 TempleReady Submission Files...... 42

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI iii Chapter 2: Navigating, Finding, and Printing Information...... 43 The Home Page...... 43 What Each Option on the Home Page Does...... 44 Displaying Your Family Information...... 46 Changing to a Different View Screen...... 47 Why Your Family Tree Does Not Contain All of the Information That You Expect to See...... 47 The Family Pedigree with Details View...... 48 The Family Tree View...... 49 The Individual List View...... 50 The Difference Between a Family Pedigree and a Traditional Pedigree...... 51 Seeing Family Information on the Family Pedigree with Details View...... 53 Moving Individuals Around on the Family Pedigree with Details View...... 53 Returning to a Previously Viewed Individual on the Family Pedigree with Details View...... 54 Switching to Other Spouses and Other Parents on the Family Pedigree with Details View...... 55 Seeing Family Information on the Family Tree View...... 55 Displaying an Individual’s Ancestors on the Family Tree View...... 56 Displaying an Individual’s Descendants on the Family Tree View...... 57 Moving an Individual to the Main Position on the Family Tree View...... 58 Returning to Yourself or a Previously Viewed Individual on the Family Tree View...... 59 Resizing the Family Tree View...... 59 Moving the Family Tree View...... 60 Displaying More Generations on the Family Tree View...... 60 Displaying Fewer Generations on the Family Tree View...... 61 Highlighting the Path to Yourself on the Family Tree View...... 61 Displaying Different Spouses and Parents on the Family Tree View...... 61 Straightening the Path between One Generation and Another on the Family Tree View...... 63 Displaying Family Information on the Individual List View...... 63 Sorting Information in the Individual List View...... 64 Resizing the Columns in a List...... 64 Reordering the Columns in a List...... 65 Displaying a Family Group Record...... 65 Seeing Details about Individuals and Families...... 66 Information Found in the Complete Details...... 67 Seeing Contributors, Notes, and Sources...... 76

iv © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Contributor Names...... 78 Seeing Information about Living Relatives...... 79 Reporting Living Individuals Mistakenly Displayed in the System...... 79 Adding Information about Living LDS Church Members...... 80 Information That You Can See from LDS Church Membership Records about Living Individuals...... 80 How the System Displays Living People...... 81 Rules Used to Determine If an Individual May Still Be Living...... 82 Searching for Deceased Individuals...... 82 Search Results...... 84 Refining a Search...... 85 How the Exact Check Boxes Affect Search Results...... 86 How the Exact Check Box Affects a Search for Names...... 88 How the Exact Check Box Affects Searches for Dates...... 88 How the Exact Check Box Affects Searches for Places...... 88 Printing Information...... 88 Using Certified Third-Party Computer Programs to Print Information...... 89

Chapter 3: Adding New Individuals and Families...... 91 When to Add Information...... 91 How the System Helps You Enter Accurate Information...... 91 Linking Individuals Who Are Already in the System into Your Family Line...... 92 Entering a New Individual into Your Family Line...... 93 Indicating Where the Individual Fits into Your Family Line...... 93 Entering the Name and Gender...... 94 Entering Birth, Death, and Relationship Information...... 97 Adding More Names, Events, and Facts (Optional)...... 99 Adding Descriptions, Research Notes, and Other Narrative Information (Optional)...... 99 Indicating Where You Obtained the Information (Recommended)...... 100 Determining Whether Other Records about the Individual Exist (Optional)...... 100 Reviewing and Saving the Information...... 101 Adding Individuals and Families Who Are Not Connected to Your Family Line...... 101 Adding Individuals Who Are Not Connected to Your Family Line...... 102 Adding Families Who Are Not Connected to Your Family Line...... 102 Entering Characters from the World’s Languages...... 103

Chapter 4: Correcting Information That Is Already in the System. . . . 105 Types of Changes That Can Be Made...... 105

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI v When You Can Correct and Delete Information...... 106 Viewing and Removing Disputes...... 108 What Disputed Information Looks Like...... 110 What You Can Do When a Record Contains a Dispute...... 110 Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Information about Individuals...... 111 Selecting the Correct Version of an Individual’s Name and Other Information. . . . 112 Adding a New Name, Event, or Fact to an Individual...... 113 Correcting an Individual’s Name, Gender, Events, and Facts...... 115 Requesting a Correction to an Individual’s Gender Information...... 117 Deleting an Individual’s Name, Gender, Events, and Facts...... 118 Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Notes and Sources about Individuals...... 119 Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Marriage Events (Including Divorces)...... 119 Adding a New Marriage Event, Including Divorce Information...... 120 Correcting a Marriage Event...... 122 Deleting a Marriage Event...... 124 Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Notes about Marriage Events and Families. . . . . 125 Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Sources about Marriage Events...... 126 Correcting Family Relationships and Deleting Individuals...... 126 Correcting Relationships That You Did Not Contribute...... 127 Deleting Individuals from Families...... 128 Changing the Relationship Type between a Child and Parent...... 129 Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Notes and Sources about Relationships...... 130 Correcting Looping Pedigrees...... 132 How Looping Pedigrees Get into the System...... 133 Correcting Information Contributed by LDS Church Membership Records...... 133 Correcting Church Membership Records of Living Individuals...... 133 Requesting a Correction to Church Membership Records of Deceased Individuals...... 134 Correcting Information That Was Contributed by “FamilySearch” or “Data Administrator”...... 136 Correcting Invalid Ordinance Records...... 137 Adding Missing Ordinance Information...... 138 Claiming Information That You Contributed to Previous Systems...... 139 Submissions That Cannot Be Claimed...... 141 Requesting a Review of Information Claimed by Someone Else...... 142

Chapter 5: Working with Other Users...... 145 Appropriate Use of Contact Information and Discussions...... 145

vi © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Directly Contacting Other Users of the System, Including Users Who Reserved Ordinances ...... 145 Participating in Discussions...... 147 Advantages of the Discussions Feature...... 148 What Happens to Discussions When Records Are Combined and Separated...... 149 Editing Your Discussions and Comments...... 149 Deleting Your Discussions and Comments...... 149 What Causes Discussions to Disappear...... 150 Reporting Inappropriate Discussions and Comments...... 150 Receiving E-mail Notifications about Changes...... 151 Stop Watching Individuals...... 151 Stopping and Starting Notification E-mails...... 152

Chapter 6: Transferring Information between Your Personal Computer and the New FamilySearch Website...... 153 Accepted File Types...... 153 Ways to Transfer Information between Your Personal Computer and the New FamilySearch Website...... 154 Preparing Your Information for Transfer...... 155 Using GEDCOM Files to Transfer Information...... 156 What Is GEDCOM?...... 156 Creating a GEDCOM File...... 156 Contributing a GEDCOM File...... 157 Using Personal Ancestral File (PAF) to Transfer Information...... 161 Certified Add-In Programs for Personal Ancestral File...... 161 Creating a GEDCOM File in Personal Ancestral File...... 162 Creating a Focus List of Records That Changed ...... 162 Types of Information to Include in a GEDCOM File...... 163 Using Third-Party Computer and Web Programs to Transfer Information...... 164 Certified Third-Party Programs...... 165 Exporting Information from the New FamilySearch Website...... 165 Transferring Information from Personal Ancestral File to a Third-Party Computer Program...... 166

Chapter 7: Combining Duplicate Records...... 167 Benefits of Combining Records...... 167 Why the System Contains Duplicate Records...... 168 Combining the Possible Duplicates That the System Finds for You...... 169 Combining Duplicate Family Members...... 170

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI vii Combining Duplicate Parents and Spouses on the Family Tree View...... 173 Combining Duplicate Parents and Spouses on the Family Pedigree with Details View. . . . 174 Searching for Duplicate Records...... 175 Separating Incorrectly Combined Records...... 177 Reasons to Separate and Reasons to Leave Records Combined...... 179 Cleaning a Pedigree with Many Duplicate Records...... 180 Verifying That Information Was Not Deleted When Records Were Combined...... 181 Verifying That Individual Details Were Not Deleted After You Combined Records...... 181 Verifying That a Family Line Was Not Deleted After You Combined Records. . . . . 182 Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Information...... 183 Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Family Members...... 184 Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Names...... 184 Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Dates...... 185 Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Places...... 185 Dealing with Records That Cannot Be Combined...... 186 Requesting That Duplicate Records Be Combined or Separated...... 187 Requesting That Duplicate LDS Church Membership Records Be Combined...... 187 Handling Records That Are Too Large to Combine...... 188

Chapter 8: Performing Temple Ordinances for Your Ancestors...... 189 The Prevention of Duplicate Ordinances...... 189 Preparing to Perform Ordinances for Ancestors...... 190 Reserving Ordinances for Ancestors...... 190 Determining Whether the Ordinances Are Already Done...... 198 Printing a Family Ordinance Request...... 199 Reprinting Family Ordinance Requests and Family Ordinance Cards ...... 201 Seeing an Individual’s Ordinance Information...... 201 Monitoring the Completion of Ordinances...... 202 Displaying and Printing the Temple Ordinances List...... 202 Sorting Information in the Temple Ordinances List...... 203 Resizing the Columns in a List...... 203 Reordering the Columns in a List...... 204 Ordinance Abbreviations Used on the Temple Ordinances List...... 204 How Ordinance Statuses Change When Ordinances Are Assigned to the Temple. . 204 How Ordinance Statuses Change When the Ordinances Are Assigned to You. . . . . 206 Problems and Solutions Related to Family Ordinance Cards...... 207 Canceling the Reservation of Ordinances (“Unreserving” Ordinances)...... 208 Using Personal Ancestral File and Similar Programs to Reserve Temple Ordinances...... 209

viii © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Getting Others to Help with Temple Ordinances...... 209 Having Family and Friends Do Temple Ordinances for You...... 210 Assigning Ordinances to the Temple or Yourself...... 211 Switching from TempleReady to the New FamilySearch Website...... 213 Using Family Ordinance Cards Printed with a TempleReady Disk...... 214 Adding a TempleReady Submission File...... 214 Finding Temple Information (Schedules, Driving Directions, etc.)...... 218

Appendix A: Guidelines for Entering Names...... 221 Guidelines for Entering Names in English, Spanish, and Other European Languages. . . . . 221 Examples of Names in English, Spanish, and Other European Languages...... 222 Guidelines for Entering Names in Asian Languages...... 223 Examples of Names in Asian Languages...... 223

Appendix B: Guidelines for Entering Dates...... 225 Entering Dates Using the Gregorian Calendar...... 225 What Are the Gregorian and Julian Calendars?...... 226 Entering Dates Using the Lunar Calendars of China, Japan, and Korea...... 226 Entering Dates That Do Not Correspond to a Calendar That the System Supports...... 228 Other Guidelines...... 228 Alternative Dates...... 228 Children Who Died before Age 8...... 228 Stillborn Infants...... 228 Marriage Dates for Couples Who Lived Together or Had Children But Never Married...... 229

Appendix C: Guidelines for Entering Places...... 231 Guidelines for Entering Places in English, Spanish, and Other European Languages...... 231 Examples of Places in English, Spanish, and Other European Languages...... 232 Guidelines for Entering Places in Asian Languages...... 233 Examples of Places in Asian Languages...... 233 Other Guidelines...... 234 Assumed Places...... 234 Cemetery and Hospital Names...... 235 Rural Areas and Landmarks...... 235 Nomadic or Tribal Peoples...... 235 Parishes and Religious Jurisdictions...... 235

Appendix D: Icons Used in the System...... 237 Icons Used on the Family Pedigree with Details View...... 237

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI ix Icons Used on the Family Tree View...... 238 Icons Used on the Individual List View...... 240 Icons Used in an Individual’s Details...... 241 Icons Used on the Temple Ordinances List...... 243 Ordinance Abbreviations Used on the Temple Ordinances List...... 245 Icons Used on the Home Page...... 245

Appendix E: Ordinance Statuses...... 247

Appendix F: Policies for Preparing Names of Deceased Ancestors for Temple Work...... 251 How Do I Prepare Ordinances for the Living?...... 251 How Do I Seal Living People to Deceased Spouses, Parents, or Children?...... 251 For Whom Should I Do Temple Ordinances?...... 252 What Ordinances Should I Not Perform?...... 252 Can I Perform Ordinances for People Who Are Not in My Immediate Family or Direct Family Line?...... 253 How Do I Perform Ordinances for My Deceased, Immediate Family Members?. . . . 253 What Ordinances Are Needed for Stillborn Babies and Children Who Die Young?...... 254 When Should I Obtain Permission before Performing Ordinances for the Deceased?. . . . . 255 Do I Need a Relative’s Permission to Perform Ordinances? (95-Year Rule)...... 255 Is First Presidency Approval Required before Ordinances Are Performed for Some People?...... 255 When Should I Talk to My Bishop before Performing Ordinances for the Deceased?...... 256 When Can I Perform Temple Ordinances for Someone Who Has Died?...... 256 When Can I Perform Ordinances for a Deceased, Worthy Church Member?...... 256 When Can I Perform Ordinances for Someone Whose Death Date Is Unknown?. . 256 When Can I Perform Ordinances for Someone Who Disappeared and Is Presumed Dead?...... 256 When Can I Perform Ordinances for Someone Who Disappeared but Is Not Presumed Dead?...... 257 What Information Is Required for Ordinances to Be Performed?...... 257 Can Ordinances Be Performed for Someone Whose Gender Is Not Known?...... 257 Do I Need Exact Dates to Perform a Person’s Ordinances?...... 258 What If I Can’t Find an Individual’s Name or If a Child Was Never Named?...... 258 In What Order Should Ordinances Be Performed?...... 259 When Sealing Children to Parents, What Are the Policies?...... 259 To Whom Are Adopted Children Sealed?...... 259 To Whom Are Foster Children Sealed?...... 259 x © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Is a Child Born in the Covenant If the Father Isn’t the Man to Whom the Mother Was Sealed?...... 259 When Sealing Spouses, What Are the Policies?...... 260 Can a Man Be Sealed to More Than One Wife?...... 260 Can a Woman Be Sealed to More Than One Husband?...... 260 Can a Divorced Couple Be Sealed?...... 260 Can I Seal a Couple Who Never Married or Whose Marriage Date I Cannot Find?. . 260 Do I Have to Perform a Couple’s Individual Ordinances before Sealing Them?. . . . 260 When Do Ordinances Need to Be Performed Again?...... 260 Do Minor Errors in Names or Event Information Make an Ordinance Invalid?. . . . 261 When an Ordinance Was Performed More Than Once, Which Is Valid?...... 261 Are Ordinances Performed Out of Order Valid?...... 261 What If I Find Proxy Ordinances That Were Performed While an Individual Was Alive?...... 262 Where Is the Most Complete Set of Ordinance Information?...... 262 How Do I Solve Problems Related to Ordinance Records?...... 262 What Should I Do When a Person’s Ordinances Were Performed More Than Once?...... 263 What Should I Do If I Find That a Person’s Ordinances Were Performed for the Wrong Gender?...... 263 What If I Find That a Person Was Sealed to the Wrong Spouse or Parents?...... 264 What If I Can’t Find an Ordinance in the New FamilySearch Website That I Know Has Been Performed?...... 265

Appendix G: Where the Information in the System Came From...... 267 How Information from Ancestral File Was Added...... 267 How Information from the Pedigree Resource File Was Added...... 267 How Information from the International Genealogical Index (IGI) Was Added...... 268

Appendix H: System Requirements...... 269

Appendix I: What’s New?...... 271 New Features as of February 2011 ...... 271 New Features as of December 2010...... 273 New Features as of August 2010...... 275 New Features as of June 2010...... 276 New Features as of March 2010...... 277 New Features as of December 2009...... 279 New Features as of August 2009...... 282 New Features as of May 2009...... 284 New Features as of February 2009...... 285

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI xi New Features as of November 2008...... 286 New Features as of August 2008...... 286 New Features as of June 2008...... 286 New Features as of February 2008...... 287 New Features as of November 2007...... 288 Glossary...... 291

This user’s guide describes how to use the new FamilySearch website. It is revised when new features are added to the website. If you do not want to print a new user’s guide each time it is revised, use one of these strategies to find out what changed: • Print the What’s New in the FamilySearch Website, which summarizses the changes. On the Home page, click What’s New in FamilySearch. • Appendix I of the user’s guide summarizes the changes. • In the user’s guide, new information is marked with this image:

Chapter 1 Introduction to the New FamilySearch Website

The new FamilySearch website is an online family tree application that allows patrons to collaborate with others to build, share, manage, and preserve their family histories online. It also helps members of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints perform temple ordinances on behalf of their deceased ancestors. You can find it at https://new.familysearch.org.

What the New FamilySearch Website Does

The new FamilySearch website makes it easy to see what information about your ancestors is already available, work with others on shared family lines, and add new information and make corrections. It also helps Latter-day Saints perform temple ordinances for their ancestors.

See What Information about Your Ancestors Is Already Available

In the new FamilySearch website, you can easily see what information the system has about you and your ancestors. In addition to names, dates, places, and relationships, you will also see notes and sources, if the original contributors provided them. The system contains hundreds of millions of records about individuals. This information came from many different sources: • Information that users enter directly into the system or contribute with a GEDCOM file. • Ancestral File and Pedigree Resource File. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints published these computerized databases to help Church members and other family history enthusiasts coordinate family history research. • Church membership records of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. Much of this information is about living people and has restrictions that limit who can see it. • The International Genealogical Index. This index also contains records of proxy temple ordinances that have been performed for the deceased.

Work with Others on Shared Family Lines

The new FamilySearch website provides two means by which you can work with others to make sure your family history is as accurate and complete as possible: • The system keeps track of who contributes which information. Depending on how much contact information a contributor chooses to display, you may be able to contact him or her by e-mail, standard mail, or telephone.

• The system provides a discussion board for each deceased individual. There, you can work with others to identify correct information and coordinate research efforts. Because everyone sees and works on the same information, all interested users can work together to do the following: • Evaluate the accuracy of the information. • Make corrections if needed. • Add notes and sources. • Participate in discussions to evaluate and find more information. • See that temple work is done if needed. Please keep all interactions with other users polite and appropriate to the purpose of the new FamilySearch website. If you have questions about what is appropriate, please see the Conditions of Use.

Add New Information and Make Corrections

In the new FamilySearch website, you will find yourself in an environment where you can work with others to identify the correct information and preserve the most accurate information that can be found about your family. • The system protects your information. When you contribute information, only you can change or delete it. If other users contribute different information about the same ancestor, the system keeps this new information in addition to your information. • You can easily add new information. You can also correct the information that you added previously. • Information about deceased individuals is available instantly to other users. If you contribute information about individuals who may still be living, only you will be able to see it.

Do Temple Ordinances for Your Ancestors

The new FamilySearch website simplifies the process of preparing the names of your ancestors for temple ordinances. • The system automatically determines whether there is enough information for an individual’s or family’s temple ordinances to be done. If there is, the system tells you that the ordinances are “Ready.” • The system then helps you determine if the ordinances have already been completed. • If the ordinances are not already completed, the system helps you prepare a “Family Ordinance Request,” which is a report that you can take to the temple to do the ordinances.

Registering to Use the New FamilySearch Website

To use the new FamilySearch website, you must register and be authorized to use this system. • All members of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints who are 12 and older may register and use the system.

Note: In Japan, the new FamilySearch website has limited access. Please work with your local family history consultant to process your temple requests and receive a Family Ordinance Request that you can take to the temple. • Children who are between 8 and 12 years old require parental permission to register. • Starting in February 2011, the new FamilySearch website welcomes a few public users. More public users will be invited in the future. The new FamilySearch website uses the same user name and password as the following websites. If you have already registered with one of them, you do not need to register again. • The updated FamilySearch website (www.familysearch.org), which was released in December 2010 • FamilySearch indexing (indexing.familysearch.org) • FamilySearch Research Wiki (wiki.familysearch.org) • The Church’s stake and ward websites (https://secure.lds.org/units)

Information Required for Registration

To have a successful registration experience, use this list to ensure that you have the required information before you register.

Information Item Notes Required or Optional First and last name If you are registering for an LDS Family- Required for both Search Account, the name from your types of accounts Church membership record is already displayed. Membership record This number appears on a membership Required for LDS number record of The Church of Jesus Christ of FamilySearch Latter-day Saints. You can get it from your accounts ward or branch membership clerk. User name A user name must meet these require- Required for both ments: types of accounts • It must have between 4 and 64 characters. • It cannot have spaces or periods. • It is not case sensitive. It does not matter whether you type it as uppercase or lowercase letters. • Though user names are allowed to have Japanese, Chinese, or Korean characters, it is strongly recommended that you use roman characters.

Information Item Notes Required or Optional Password Your password must contain at least eight Required for both characters. At least one character must be types of accounts a letter, and at least one must be a number. Though passwords are allowed to have Japanese, Chinese, or Korean characters, it is strongly recommended that you use roman characters.

Birth date The birth date you enter must match the Required for LDS birth date on your Church membership FamilySearch record. Accounts. Display name The system uses your display name when Required for both it puts your name on a screen or printout, types of accounts. such as on the Home screen. Your display name can have characters from any language.

E-mail address Enter the e-mail address where you want Optional for LDS other system users to contact you. FamilySearch accounts. Required for public Family- Search accounts.

Note: After you register, you can change your password, display name, or e-mail address by going to your user profile.

Registering for an LDS FamilySearch Account

To use the new FamilySearch website, members of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints must register for an LDS FamilySearch Account. If you already have an LDS Account or LDS FamilySearch Account, you do not need to register for one again. Please have your membership record number ready before you register. You can find your membership record number on a temple recommend. If you do not know your membership record number, ask your ward clerk to print the “Individual Ordinance Summary” from Church records.

1. Go to https://new.familysearch.org. 2. Click Register for the new FamilySearch. 3. When the system asks which type of account you want to create, click LDS FamilySearch Account. 4. Click Continue. 5. Fill out your LDS membership information. a. Enter your membership record number. b. Enter your birth date. c. Type the letters displayed in the picture. Type them as lowercase letters with no spaces.

6. Click Next Step. 7. When the system asks if the displayed individual is you, click Yes. 8. Enter the information for your user profile: a. Enter your first and last name. b. Enter a display name. A display name is the name that appears when you are using a program. c. Enter your e-mail address twice. If you do not have an e-mail address, click the check box next to this option. You can also enter an alternate or second e-mail address, if desired. If you use one, you also need to enter it twice. Typing information twice helps make sure that you do not enter a wrong character by mistake. d. Enter the country where you reside. e. Enter your preferred language. f. Enter a user name. Follow these guidelines for user names: • It must have between 4 and 64 characters. • It cannot have spaces or periods. • It is not case sensitive. It does not matter whether you type it as uppercase or lowercase letters. • Though user names are allowed to have Japanese, Chinese, or Korean characters, it is strongly recommended that you use roman characters. g. Enter your password twice. The password must have at least eight characters with at least one letter and one number. The password is case sensitive. Note: Though passwords are allowed to have Japanese, Chinese, or Korean characters, it is strongly recommended that you use roman characters. h. Click the check box to indicate you have read and accept the conditions of use. To read the conditions of use, click the underlined link.

9. Click Create My LDS Account. An e-mail is sent to the address you listed. Click the link in this e-mail within 48 hours to activate your account. If you wait longer than 48 hours, you will need to redo the registration process. 10. Open your e-mail program, and locate the e-mail message that lets you complete your registration. Click the Complete Registration link indicated in the e-mail message.

A message indicates that your registration is complete. You can sign in using the user name and password that you entered. Important: Please add a telephone number to your user profile. If you send a question or issue to FamilySearch Support, the agent who handles your case needs a way to contact you. If you did not add an e-mail address when you registered, adding a telephone number is critical so that a support agent can contact you.

To add a telephone number, go to the Home page of the new FamilySearch website. Then click Update My Profile and Preferences. After entering your password, scroll to the bottom of the profile page, and click Use the address and phone number above to deselect it. Fields for your address and telephone number appear.

Unless you want to use a different address for standard mail, leave the address fields blank. Simply enter the telephone number that you would like a support agent to use.

Signing In and Signing Out

Sign in each time you use the new FamilySearch website. If you use the system at a public place, such as an Internet café or a public library, to protect your information, sign out when you are done. Important: Please do not let other people use your user name and password. To help someone else use the system, please sign in first with your own user name and password. Then use the Sign In to Help Someone Else feature to allow the other person to see his or her own family information.

1. Go to https://new.familysearch.org/. If you have not yet registered, click Register for the new FamilySearch. When you have finished, you can then sign in, as described here. 2. In the User name field, enter your user name. 3. In the Password field, enter your password. 4. Click Sign In.

If you turn off your computer or leave the new FamilySearch website for a while, the system automatically signs you out. If you use a computer in a public place, such as an Internet café or a public library, sign out to prevent another user from having access to your family information. To sign out, click Sign Out, found in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Solving Problems When You Cannot Sign In

There can be many reasons why you cannot sign in after you have registered. The most common reasons are as follows: • You did not enter your user name or password correctly, or you used a user name and password for a different website. • You are on the wrong website. Make sure that you are at https://new.familysearch.org. • If you are a member of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, you may have registered for a public FamilySearch Account, not an LDS FamilySearch Account. If this is the problem, you need to register again. Tip: If you use you stake and ward website, you can sign in to the new FamilySearch website using that same user name and password. • You might not be registered. If not, click the Register for the new FamilySearch. • Use of the system in Japan is very limited. If you are in Japan, you might not be authorized to use the system there. • Use of the system by the public is very limited. The account that you use for other FamilySearch webistes might not yet be authorized to use the system. To determine whether you are registered or whether your registration was saved, follow this process:

1. Make sure that you are at https://new.familysearch.org. 2. Click the Forgot? link that is next to the field for the user name. 3. Click the user name link. 4. Enter the required information, and follow the instructions on the screen.

If your user name is found, then you are registered. If you have also forgotten your password, click the Forgot? link that is next to the Password field, and follow the instructions to reset your password. If your user name is not found, then you are not registered. Please register again.

Retrieving a Forgotten User Name for an LDS FamilySearch Account

If you forget the user name from your LDS FamilySearch Account, you can use the new FamilySearch website to find it. Tip: If you have forgotten both your user name and password, retrieve your user name first.

1. Go to https://new.familysearch.org/. 2. Click the Forgot? link that is next to the User name field. A pop-up screen appears. Note: If you click Forgot? and nothing happens, your pop-up blocking software might be blocking this page. Try turning off your pop-up blocking software.

3. Click the user name link that is located in the first paragraph. 4. When the system asks which type of account you have, click LDS FamilySearch Account. 5. Click Continue. 6. Enter the e-mail address that is associated with your account. If you no longer have that e-mail address or do not remember it, follow these steps: a. Click I don’t have/remember my e-mail. b. Click Yes to indicate that you are a Church member. Fields appear where you can enter your membership record number and birth date. c. Enter your membership record number. If you do not know this number, you can get it from your ward or branch clerk. d. Enter your birth date. e. Type the letters displayed in the picture. Type them as lowercase letters with no spaces. f. When the system displays your name and birth date, click Yes to indicate that it is you. The system shows the e-mail address that is associated with your LDS FamilySearch account. g. If you still have this e-mail account, click Keep E-mail Address. The system returns you to the screen where you enter your e-mail address. Enter your e-mail address, and continue to recover your user name. h. If you do not still have this e-mail account, click Change E-mail Addresses, and enter your new one. An e-mail is sent to the address you listed. Click the link in this e-mail within 48 hours to activate your account. If you wait longer than 48 hours, you will need to redo the registration process. Open your e-mail program, and locate the e-mail message that lets you complete your registration. Click the

Complete Registration link indicated in the e-mail message. After you have validated the e-mail address, begin again the process of retrieving your user name. 7. Type the letters displayed in the picture. Type them as lowercase letters with no spaces. 8. Click Recover My User Name. A message indicates that your user name has been e-mailed to you. 9. Open your e-mail program, and locate the e-mail that helps you recover your user name. Your user name is listed in the e-mail. 10. Click the button to return to the program that you were trying to sign in to.

Retrieving a Forgotten User Name for a FamilySearch Account

If you forget the user name from your FamilySearch account, you can use the new FamilySearch website to find it. Tip: If you have forgotten both your user name and password, retrieve your user name first.

3. When the system asks which type of account you have, click FamilySearch Account. 4. Enter your e-mail address. 5. Type the letters displayed in the picture. Type them as lowercase letters with no spaces. 6. Click Retrieve. A message indicates that your user name has been e-mailed to you. 7. Open your e-mail program, and locate the e-mail that helps you recover your user name. Your user name is listed in the e-mail. 8. Click the button to return to the program that you were trying to sign in to.

Changing a Forgotten Password for an LDS FamilySearch Account

If you forget the password from your LDS FamilySearch Account, you can use the new FamilySearch website to choose a new one. Tip: If you have forgotten both your user name and password, retrieve your user name first.

1. Go to https://new.familysearch.org/. 2. Click the Forgot? link that is next to the Password field. A pop-up screen appears.

Note: If you click Forgot? and nothing happens, your pop-up blocking software might be blocking this page. Try turning off your pop-up blocking software.

3. Click the password link that is located in the first paragraph. 4. When the system asks which type of account you have, click LDS FamilySearch Account. 5. Click Continue. 6. Enter your user name. 7. Type the letters displayed in the picture. Type them as lowercase letters with no spaces. 8. Click Reset my Password. A message indicates that an e-mail containing instructions for resetting your password has been sent. 9. Open your e-mail program, and locate the e-mail about your account. The e-mail contains a link that you can click to reset your password. 10. Click the link in the e-mail. You see a screen in which you can enter a new password. 11. Enter a new password. The password must have at least eight characters with at least one letter and one number. 12. Enter your password again. 13. Click Update. A message indicates that your password has been changed. 14. Click the button to return to the program that you were trying to sign in to.

Changing a Forgotten Password for a FamilySearch Account

If you forget the password from your FamilySearch account, you can use the new FamilySearch website to find it. Tip: If you have forgotten both your user name and password, retrieve your user name first.

1. Go to https://new.familysearch.org/. 2. Click the Forgot? link that is next to the Password field. A pop-up screen appears. Note: If you click Forgot? and nothing happens, your pop-up blocking software might be blocking this page. Try turning off your pop-up blocking software.

3. When the system asks which type of account you have, click FamilySearch Account. 4. Enter your user name. 5. Type the letters displayed in the picture. Type them as lowercase letters with no spaces. 6. Click Retrieve Password. A message indicates that an e-mail containing instructions for resetting your password has been sent. 7. Open your e-mail, and locate the e-mail that lets you recover your password. The e-mail contains a link that you can click to reset your password.

8. Click the link in the e-mail. You see a screen in which you can enter a new password. 9. Enter a new password. The password must have at least eight characters with at least one letter and one number. 10. Enter your password again. 11. Click Save Password. A message indicates that your password has been changed. 12. Click the button to return to the program that you were trying to sign in to.

Getting Help

You can get help learning and using the new FamilySearch website in several ways. You can do the following: • See the help content for each screen in the system. • See tutorials on how to use the system. • Print instructions on how to use the system. • Search a large database of help content for answers to your questions about the system. • Find personal help from one of the following: - From your local family history consultant. - At a local family history center. - In online forums. • Contact FamilySearch Support by e-mail or telephone. If needed, you can also have someone else use the new FamilySearch website for you.

Seeing Help for Each Screen

On each page in the new FamilySearch website, you can find help content that is most useful for each screen in the system.

1. Click the Help with This Page button or the Help button. Both are located in the upper right corner of the page. A Help panel appears. 2. Click a question to see its answer. A pop-up screen appears with the answer to the question. 3. If there are more questions than can fit on the panel, click the More Questions link, located at the bottom of the list of questions. A list of more questions appears. 4. When you have read the answer, click the Close button in the upper right corner of the answer. The pop-up screen with the answer closes. 5. When you are finished with the Help panel, click the Close button in the upper right corner of the Help panel. The Help panel closes.

Learning from Tutorials

Several tutorials are available to help you learn the new FamilySearch website. To see the tutorials, you need Adobe Flash Player version 6.0 or newer. This program is available on most computers. To read the handouts, you need Adobe Reader version 6.01 or newer. Most computers already have these programs. If you do not have them, you can download them for free from http://www.adobe.com.

1. Click the Home tab. 2. Click Learn How to Use FamilySearch. A list of overviews and printable guides appears. 3. Click the tutorial that you want to see. The tutorial loads. Note: You can also access the tutorials from the help panel. Click the Help with This Page or Help button, located in the upper-right portion of the page. The help panel opens. At the bottom of the help panel, click Tutorials and guides.

Printing Instructions

You can print a user’s guide and “Quick Start Guides” to help you learn and use the new FamilySearch website. To print them, you will need Adobe Reader version 6.01 or newer. This program is available on most computers. If you do not have Adobe Reader, you can download it for free from http://www.adobe.com. • The user’s guide contains step-by-step instructions on how to use the new FamilySearch website. • “Quick Start Guides” contain step-by-step instructions on doing one task.

1. Click the Home tab. 2. Click Learn How to Use FamilySearch. A list of overviews and printable guides appears. 3. Click the link for the guide that you want to print. The guide opens in Adobe Reader. 4. Click File and then Print. Note: You can also access the guides from the help panel. Click the Help with This Page or Help button, located in the upper-right portion of the page. The help panel opens. At the bottom of the help panel, click Tutorials and guides.

Using the Help Center

The Help Center can help you use FamilySearch websites. Important: The Help Center does not contain information about how to do family history research, find records that are not on the FamilySearch website, or use and evaluate the records that you find. You can get help with these types of research tasks in two ways: • Research Wiki. To search this resource, close the Help Center, and click Learn.

• Research Forums. In the Help Center, click Community Assistance, click Research Forums, and post your question in one of the Research Advice forums.

• Open the Help Center (help.familysearch.org): Option Description You are using the In the upper right corner of the screen, click the FamilySearch website Help link. (www.familysearch.org). You are using the new Do one of the following FamilySearch website • Click the Home tab, and then click Help (new.familysearch.org). Center. • If you are on a main page, click the Help with This Page link, and then click the Help Center link that is located at the bottom of the help panel. • If you are on a pop-up screen, click the Help button, which is located in the upper right corner of the screen.

• Click the appropriate link: Link What You Can Do

Self-help • Search for answers on how to use FamilySearch websites, products, and services.

Local Assistance • Find and contact your local family history consultant. Note: If you are a family history consultant and your name does not appear on this screen, you need to register as a family history consultant at https://consultant.family search.org/. If your name appears in the list of consultants and you are not a family history consultant, please go to https://consultant.familysearch.org/ and indicate that you are no longer a consultant. • Find your nearest family history center.

Community • Post a question on a forum, where people who are Assistance experienced using the new FamilySearch website can answer it.

Contact • Request help from FamilySearch Support staff. You can FamilySearch request help by e-mail or by telephone. • View the support cases that resulted from times you previously contacted support. You can add more information to them or close them yourself.

Feedback • Make a suggestion for improvement.

Link What You Can Do Training and See training materials and other resources. Resources Note: If you are at https://consultant.familysearch.org/, this option provides access to training that can help you fulfill your calling.

Searching for Answers to Questions

The fastest way to get your question answered is to search our database of answers. Important: The Help Center does not contain information about how to do family history research, find records, or use records. You can get help with research in two ways: • Research Wiki. To search this resource, close the Help Center, and click Learn. • Research Forums. In the Help Center, click Community Assistance, click Research Forums, and post your question in one of the Research Advice forums.

1. Open the Help Center (help.familysearch.org): Option Description You are using the In the upper right corner of the screen, click the FamilySearch website Help link. (www.familysearch.org). You are using the new Do one of the following FamilySearch website • Click the Home tab, and then click Help (new.familysearch.org). Center. • If you are on a main page, click the Help with This Page link, and then click the Help Center link that is located at the bottom of the help panel. • If you are on a pop-up screen, click the Help button, which is located in the upper right corner of the screen.

2. If you do not see a field where you can enter your question, click Self help. A screen where you can enter a question appears. Below the search field is a list of questions, tutorials, and other resources. Tip: If the list of questions and other resources contains something that might answer your question, click its title to see the resource.

3. Enter your question in the field at the top of the screen. Make sure that you spell the words correctly. A misspelled word can prevent the Help Center from finding the information that you want. 4. (Optional) If you want to use the advanced search features, follow these steps: a. Click Advanced Search. b. To limit the search results to specific topics, in the Filter by topic list, click the topic names. To search all products, do not select any topics.

c. To limit the search results to specific types of documents, in the Filter by document type list, click the document types. d. To limit the search results to articles that were written or modified between certain dates, select the beginning and end date. e. To limit search results to articles in a specific language, select the language. 5. Click Search. A list of possible answers appears. 6. Look at the list of search results to see if you have found what you want: • To see more search results, click the numbered links that appear beneath the list of articles. • To start a new search, go to the top of the search results, and begin a new search. If you did not find what you were looking for, try entering different words or more generic words for the same concept. • To see other options for getting an answer to your question, click Not finding what you’re looking for?

7. When you find an article that you would like to see, click its title. The article appears. The terms that you used when searching for this article appear in a light blue box above the article. 8. Read the article, and decide what to do next. • To return to your search results so that you can read a different article or do a new search, click Return to results. This link is located in the light blue bar that appears above the article. Note: After you look at three articles, a pop-up with tips appears to help you redo your search or get your question answered a different way. To use a different method to find your answer, click one of the links on the pop-up. To close the pop-up, click X. If this pop-up does not help you, click Don’t show again. • To print the article, click the Print tab.

If you do not find an answer to your question, try these alternatives: • Try your search again with different search terms. Make sure that the search terms are spelled correctly. • Ask your ward or branch family history consultant for help. • Go to a local FamilySearch center, where knowledgeable volunteers can help you. You can find a family history centers near you. Centers are a type of FamilySearch center. • Use the FamilySearch forums to get help from a community of knowledgeable people who use FamilySearch products and services. • Send your question to FamilySearch Support.

Obtaining Personal Help

You can get personal help at a local FamilySearch center. Church members can also get help from family history consultants in their wards or branches.

1. Open the Help Center (help.familysearch.org):

Option Description You are using the In the upper right corner of the screen, click the FamilySearch website Help link. (www.familysearch.org). You are using the new Do one of the following FamilySearch website • Click the Home tab, and then click Help (new.familysearch.org). Center. • If you are on a main page, click the Help with This Page link, and then click the Help Center link that is located at the bottom of the help panel. • If you are on a pop-up screen, click the Help button, which is located in the upper right corner of the screen.

2. Click Local Assistance. If you are a Church member and if you are signed in, the name of your family history consultant appears in the section “Local Family History Consultants.” If a consultant is not listed, your bishop or other members of your ward or branch should know who your consultant is. 3. To find a nearby FamilySearch center (such as the Family History Library or a family history center), follow these steps: a. Click Locate a FamilySearch center. b. Enter as much of the location information as you can. c. Click Search.

FamilySearch Centers A FamilySearch center is a facility sponsored by The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints to help people learn more about their ancestors. Both the Family History Library (in Salt Lake City, Utah) and its branch facilities (called “family history centers”) are FamilySearch centers. FamilySearch centers often offer these services: • Access to genealogical records • Free classes • One-on-one assistance Family History Consultants A family history consultant is an individual who is called to help Church members do family history. Consultants can help you with the following types of tasks: • Start your family history. • Use family history computer products. • Find classes where you can learn to do family history. In the Help Center, you can find out who your consultant is. If it does not list a consultant, your bishop or other members of your ward or branch should know who your ward or branch consultant is.

Getting Help from the FamilySearch Community

Many people who are experts in family history answer questions from other people. They can help you use FamilySearch websites or identify your next step in family history research.

2. Click Community Assistance. 3. Click Forums. The experts here can also help with questions about family history research and the records that you use to do it.

Contacting FamilySearch Support

If you cannot find an answer to your question through personal help or the knowledge base, you can either call FamilySearch Support, request that support call you, or send an e-mail to FamilySearch Support.

2. Click Contact FamilySearch. 3. Select how you would like to contact us: Option Description Call Click Call us.The telephone numbers for the United States FamilySearch and Canada appear. directly If you are calling from somewhere else, click the region. A list of the available numbers for that region appears.

Send your question as an 1. Click Submit your problem, and we’ll get back to e-mail you. 2. Fill out the form, and click Next. 3. Indicate whether you authorize the support agent to see and access your information, and click Next. 4. Indicate how you prefer to be contacted, and click Next. The Help Center creates a “case” for your question. A screen displays its case number. You may want to print this screen so that you can refer to the number as needed. You should receive a response within 24 hours. 5. Click X.

A list of your cases appears. You can return to this screen if you want to add more information to help clarify your question. You can also close the case if you solve the problem another way.

Viewing the Questions and Problems That You Have Sent to FamilySearch Support

You can see a list of the questions that you sent to FamilySearch Support. The questions that you send are called “cases.” You can reopen a closed case, add more details to a case that is still open, and close a case that you resolved yourself. To see your support cases, you must be signed in.

2. Click Contact FamilySearch. 3. Click View your existing cases. 4. Click a case to see its details. 5. (Optional) To take action on a case, follow these steps: a. In the box provided, enter additional details. You may need to scroll to the bottom of the screen to see the box. b. Click the appropriate button: • To close the case, which means you no longer want to receive a reply, click Add Note and Close Case. • To add more information that you think will help your issue be resolved more quickly, click Add Note. • To reopen a case, which means you still need help with the issue, click Add Note and Reopen Case. A pop-up appears to confirm that your changes were saved. c. To close the pop-up and return to the case that you were working on, click the X. 6. When you are finished with the case, click Return to case list.

Getting Help with Family History Callings

If you have a family history calling or are a priesthood leader who oversees family history, you can get access to specialized training and materials to help with your calling. To see help for people with family history callings, you must have registered at https://consultant.familysearch.org. Tip: If you do not have a family history calling, you can see tutorials on how to use the FamilySearch website. They are listed on the Self Help screen in the Help Center.

2. Click Training and Resources. 3. Click the course or tutorial that you want to see, and follow the instructions on the screen to complete it.

Sharing Ideas for Improving FamilySearch Products and Services

We encourage you to send feedback. We want to know of your successes and frustrations and suggestions for improvement. To share ideas, you must be signed in.

2. Click Feedback. 3. In the Help Center, click Make a suggestion for improvement. To report something that does not work, click Report a Problem. The Contact FamilySearch screen opens, and you can either call or send an e-mail to us. 4. Enter your idea, praise, or success story: a. If you want to give praise or share a success story, click Give praise. b. Enter your feedback. c. Click Continue. d. If your feedback is in the list of ideas already posted, click it to see the details. If you agree, click I have this question, too! You are done. If this is not what you wanted to say, click Nope. Finish posting my question. Continue with the rest of the steps. e. Enter what you would like to say. f. (Optional) Add an image to your feedback: • To upload an image from your hard drive, click Browse, and find the image. • To add the image of a web page, enter the URL, and click Insert. g. If needed, change the title of your feedback. h. Click the check box of each product that your feedback applies to. i. (Optional) Enter tags that will classify your feedback topic. j. (Optional) Click one of the faces, and enter a word that indicates how this issue makes you feel. k. If you do not want to share your e-mail address, click Share my e-mail address with FamilySearch so they can contact me directly to deselect it. l. Review your feedback.

Beneath the field where you can enter tags, a bar indicates how likely it is that your issue will be noticed. If you want the likelihood to be higher, enter more details . m. Click Post your topic.

Changing Your User Profile for an LDS FamilySearch Account

When you registered, the system created a user profile for you. In your user profile, you can change your name, user name, contact name, password, display name, e-mail address, mailing address, telephone number, and helper access number. Note: If you change your user profile, the change is not transferred to your official Church membership record. Ward directories and the stake and ward websites use the name, address, and telephone number from your Church membership record. Please ask your membership clerk to make the following corrections: • Your name, address, telephone number, or family structure is incorrect on ward directories or on the stake and ward website. • You want to add a cell phone number for use on ward directories and the stake and ward website.

1. Click the Home tab. 2. Click the Update My Profile and Preferences link. A pop-up screen where you can enter your password appears. 3. Enter your password, and click Done. Be sure to use the correct password for this website. Instead of the characters you type, asterisks (*) appear in the Password field. This prevents others from seeing your password. 4. To change your first name, last name, user name, display name, or e-mail address, follow these steps: a. Click Edit. The system explains that you need to edit the information on a separate website. b. Click OK. The profile information on your LDS Account appears. c. To change a piece of information, delete what is currently in the field. Then enter the new information. d. Click Update. If you change your primary or alternate e-mail address, the system sends an e-mail to the new address. This extra step helps make sure that you entered the e-mail address correctly and that you own it. You have 48 hours to open the e-mail and click the link that validates the e-mail address. You can change one e-mail address at a time. After you validate the first e-mail address, you can change the second one.

5. To change your contact name, delete what is currently in the field. Then enter a new one. The system displays your contact name to other users when it displays your name as a contributor of information. If you enter a contact name that another user has already chosen, the system tells you to choose a different one.

6. To change your helper access number, delete what is currently in the field. Then enter a new 5-digit number. You give your helper access number, along with your full name and birth date, to someone who is going to use the system on your behalf. Change your helper access number if someone has helped you previously and you no longer want that person to have access to your account. 7. To add a telephone number or specify a different address for your contact information, Family Ordinance Requests, and family ordinance cards, follow these steps: a. To change a piece of information, delete what is currently in the field. Then enter the new information. b. Uncheck the Use the address and phone number above check box. Fields in which you can enter a different address appear. Required fields are marked with an asterisk (*). c. Make the needed changes. The address and telephone number that you entered are not transferred to your official Church membership record. If your Church membership record is incorrect, please ask your membership clerk to update it.

8. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Your changes are saved. If you changed your display name, that name appears on the Home page.

User Profile Options for an LDS FamilySearch Account

In your user profile, you can perform tasks such as these: change your password, update the e-mail and mailing addresses that are displayed in your contact information, and change your helper identification number. Your profile has two sections: • The LDS Account Profile contains the information required for your LDS Account. If you change information in this section, such as your user name or password, the change affects all of the other systems that use this account. • The New FamilySearch Profile contains information used only by the new FamilySearch website.

LDS Account Profile

Field Explanation First name Unless you have changed it, this field lists your first name as it appears on your Church membership record. Last name Unless you have changed it, this field lists your last name as it appears on your Church membership record. Display name This field lists your name as the system displays in these places: • The Home page. • The upper right corner of the screen, where the system indicates whose account is being used. • On your Family Ordinance Requests.

Field Explanation • On your family ordinance cards.

User name This field lists your user name. Password This field lists your password, which is shown as asterisks to prevent others from seeing it. E-mail address This field lists the e-mail address that you want the system to use for these purposes: • The system displays this e-mail address in your contact information if you choose to include it. • FamilySearch Support uses this e-mail address to follow up on questions you send in. If you want to use a different e-mail address, enter it here. Proofread it carefully.

Alternate e-mail address This field lists another e-mail address that the system can use if your primary e-mail account does not work.

New FamilySearch Profile

Field Explanation Contact name This field lists the name that the system displays to other users when it displays your name as a contributor of information. The system automatically creates a contact name based on your name. You can change it. Your contact name cannot be the same as the contact name of another user.

Helper access number This field lists your helper access number. You give this number, along with your full name and birth date, to someone who is going to use the system on your behalf. By default, this number is the last five characters of your membership record number. Change your helper access number if someone has helped you previously and you no longer want that person to have access to your account.

Address and phone This field lists the mailing address and telephone number that number you want the system to use for these purposes: • The system displays this address in your contact information if you choose to show a mailing address. • This address is printed on your Family Ordinance Requests and family ordinance cards. • FamilySearch Support uses this address to contact you when it cannot reach you by e-mail or phone.

Membership record This field lists the record number from your Church number membership record.

Field Explanation Person identifier This field lists the Person Identifier for your own record in the system.

Birth date This field lists your birth date.

Confirmation date This field lists the date when you were confirmed a member of the Church.

Changing Your User Profile for a FamilySearch Account

User Profile Options for a FamilySearch Account

In your user profile, you can perform tasks such as these: change your password and update the e-mail and mailing addresses that are displayed in your contact information. Your profile has two sections: • The FamilySearch Account Profile contains the information required for your account. If you change information in this section, such as your user name or password, the change affects all of the other systems that use your FamilySearch account. • The New FamilySearch Profile contains information used only by the new FamilySearch website.

FamilySearch Account Profile

Field Explanation First name This field lists your first name. Last name This field lists your last name.

Field Explanation Display name This field lists your name as the system displays it in these places: • The Home page. • The upper right corner of the screen, where the system indicates whose account is being used.

Alternate e-mail address This field lists another e-mail address that the system can use if your primary e-mail account does not work.

New FamilySearch Profile

Address and phone This field lists the mailing address and telephone number that number you want the system to use for these purposes: • The system displays this address in your contact information if you choose to show a mailing address. • FamilySearch Support uses this address to contact you when it cannot reach you by e-mail or phone.

Setting Preferences

Set your preferences to determine how certain features in the new FamilySearch website work.

1. Click the Home tab. 2. Click the Update My Profile and Preferences link. A pop-up screen where you can enter your password appears.

3. Enter your password, and click Done. Be sure to use the correct password for this website. Instead of the characters you type, asterisks (*) appear in the Password field. This prevents others from seeing your password. 4. To change general system preferences, follow these steps: a. Click the Preferences tab. b. Make the needed changes. 5. To change the feature that lets you follow individuals, follow these steps:

a. Click Watch. b. Indicate whether you want to receive the notification e-mails. If you choose to stop receiving the e-mail notifications, the system does not automatically stop following your chosen individuals. This allows you to stop receiving the e-mails temporarily and start them again when you are ready.

6. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Preference Settings

Preferences are choices you can make that determine how certain features in the new FamilySearch website work.

What information do you want other people to see about you when you contribute information?

You can select whether the system displays your full name, telephone number, e-mail address, and mailing address in addition to your contact name. This information appears when you contribute information.

When you search for an individual, how do you want to enter the name?

You can indicate whether you want your default Search page to have separate fields for first and last names or a single field in which you enter both names. Later, when you use the Search page, you can switch between the Single name field and Multiple name field options as needed. This preference setting determines which option appears first. The Multiple names fields option is particularly useful in the following situations: • Finding individuals with more than one last name (such as individuals with Spanish or Portuguese names). • Finding individuals with names recorded in Chinese, Japanese, or Korean characters. • Finding individuals with patronymic names (based on the father’s first name) or toponymic names (based on a place-name.)

In what language do you want to use the new FamilySearch website?

Select the language in which you use the new FamilySearch website. Tip: If you want to use the system in a specific language, select that language in your Preferences. Then no matter what computer you use, you will always use the system in that language. Your family ordinance cards will also be in that language.

The new FamilySearch website is available in these languages:

English French German Italian Japanese Korean Portuguese Russian Spanish Traditional Chinese

Preference Settings for the Watch Feature

In your user profile, you can choose whether to receive e-mail notifications about the individuals you are watching.

Do you want to receive e-mail notifications?

Indicate whether you want the system to send you a weekly e-mail to tell you what changes have occurred to the individuals that you are watching. The e-mail identifies the following changes: • Changes to the individual’s summary • New activity in an individual’s discussions • Whether the individual’s record was combined with other records • Whether the individual was separated from a record Unchecking this preference option does not cause you to stop watching individuals. It simply stops the notifications. This is useful, for example, if you want to stop receiving notifications temporarily while you are on vacation. When you come home, you change this preference setting to start receiving notifications. You do not have to reselect the individuals to watch.

Using the New FamilySearch Website for Someone Else

Members of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints can sign in to help other people use the system. When you do this, you see the system as if you were the individual being helped. You can then perform any task except make changes to the user profile of the individual that you are helping. You can sign in to use the system for any registered user. You can also help individuals who are not Church members if they have been authorized to use the new FamilySearch website, have registered, and have selected a helper access number.

1. On the Home page, click Sign In to Help Someone Else.

2. Enter the required information. Option Description The individual to be Enter the following information: helped has already • Contact name. registered to use the • Helper access number. system. Important: Make sure that you use the helper access number of the individual that you are helping, not your own. - For Church members, the helper access number is the last five characters of their Church membership record number unless they changed the number in their user profile. - Members of the general public have no default helper access number. They must modify their user profile to select one.

The individual to be helped is a member of 1. Click Use a full name and birth date instead The Church of Jesus of the contact name. Christ of Latter-day 2. Enter the following information: Saints who has not • Full name. registered. • Date of birth. • Last five digits of the membership access number.

To switch back to the first screen, click Use a compact name instead of the full name and birth date.

3. Click Done.

The Home page opens. At the top of the Home page, you will see the name of the individual that you are helping. The color of the top bar also changes from blue to green to remind you that you are helping someone else, not working on your own information. When you finish helping someone, be sure to click Quit Helping before you start helping someone else or working on your own family history.

Contributors and Submitters

When you help someone else, the system identifies the individual that you are helping as the “contributor” of the information and you as the “submitter” of the information (the user who actually entered the information). This allows others to contact the individual that you helped, not you, to coordinate research. Note: If the person that you help is not a registered user of the new FamilySearch website, the system does not display any contact information (e-mail address, mailing address, or telephone number) for the changes made. It displays only the full name of the person being helped and the contact name of the submitter.

TempleReady Submission Files

If you are registered with FamilySearch Support as a family history consultant or family history center director and if you sign in to help someone else, you can convert a TempleReady submission file to a Family Ordinance Request. After you sign in to help someone else, the Home page contains an option called Add a TempleReady Submission File. Use this option when a Church member prepared a TempleReady submission file before the new FamilySearch website was available but then could not get the family ordinance cards printed before the temple was changed to the new system.

The system contains information about hundreds of millions of individuals. It is usually impossible to display all of your family line on one page. Therefore, you need to be able to navigate around a family line and find a specific individual or family. Printing the information is useful if you want to show the information to others in your family or take the information with you as you conduct research.

The Home Page

The Home page is the starting place for everything that you can do in the system. To start using the system, you can click the links on the Home page. You can also click one of the tabs along the top of the page.

The following tabs and links go to the same place: • The See Me and My Ancestors link and the Me and My Ancestors tab.

• The Search for Ancestors link and the Search tab. • The Add Information link and tab. • The Temple Ordinances link and tab.

What Each Option on the Home Page Does

The Home page has several options.

Option What It Does The Home tab Click this option to return to the Home page. Click this option to see a document that The What’s New in FamilySearch describes the most recent changes made to link the system. The Learn How to Use FamilySearch Click this option to see a list of the tutorials link and guides that can help you learn how to use the system. The See Temple Information (Sched- Obtain information about temples, such as ules, Driving Directions, etc.) link schedules, driving directions, and so forth. The See Me and My Ancestors link and Click either option to see what information Me and My Ancestors tab the system already has about you and your ancestors. This is your main working area. Here, you can do the following: • See your family line. • See detailed information about the individuals and families in your family line. • Add and correct information. • See the temple ordinance status for ancestors who are in your family line. • Find ordinances that are not yet done.

The Search for Ancestors link and Click either option to find deceased individ- Search tab uals in the system. The Add Information link and tab Click either option to do the following: • Contribute a GEDCOM file. • Add an individual who is not linked to your family line. • Add a family who is not linked to your family line.

• The Temple Ordinances link and tab Click either option to do the following: • The Families and individuals that • Do ordinances for ancestors who are on are reserved for temple ordinances your Temple Ordinances list. (see list) link • Reprint Family Ordinance Request forms if you misplace them. • Assign ordinances on your Temple Ordinances list to the temple.

Option What It Does • Reassign ordinances from the temple back to yourself. • Remove individuals from the Temple Ordinances list.

The Sign in to Help Someone Else link Click this option to use the system on another individual’s behalf. For example, if you know someone who does not have a computer or Internet access, you can sign in and use the system as if you were him or her.

The Update My User Profile link Click this option to change information such as your password, e-mail address, preferences, and so forth. The GEDCOM Files That I Added link Click this option to see GEDCOM files that you contributed and go to a list of the individuals who were in the file. This option appears only after you have contributed a GEDCOM file. The Help Center link Click this option to do the following: • Search for answers on how to use the system and other family history products produced by FamilySearch, Interna- tional. • Request help from the system support staff. • Send feedback about the system. • If you have a family history calling and have registered either as a priesthood leader or a family history consultant, you see training materials for your calling. See training materials and other resources. • Find the name of the family history consultant in your ward or branch. • Find your nearest family history center, where you can get help using the system.

The Help with This Page button Click this option to do the following: • See answers to common questions for the page you are on. • See overviews about using the system. • Print instructions about using the system. • Access the Help Center.

Option What It Does The Sign Out button Click this option to quit using the system.

Displaying Your Family Information

The Me and My Ancestors screen displays the information that the system already has about you and your ancestors. To display your family information, follow this one step:

Click the Me and My Ancestors tab.

The first time you use the system, you see your information on the Family Pedigree with Details view. If you change to a different view screen, the system uses that view screen until you switch to a different one.

Changing to a Different View Screen

On the Me and My Ancestors screen, you can see your family in several ways, or “views.” You can switch between the views to get the benefits of each.

1. Click the Me and My Ancestors tab. 2. Click the Change View button, located in the top-left part of the page. A menu showing each option appears. As you highlight each option, you see a small image that shows you what the view screen looks like. Important: The Individual List view is available only when you are on the Family Tree view.

3. Click the view that you want to use. • Click Family Pedigree with Details to see a small version of the family pedigree at the top of the page and the complete details about one individual beneath the pedigree. • Click Family Tree to see a family pedigree at the top of the page and some of the details for one individual on the right side of the screen. On this view screen, you can display more generations of ancestors, show descendants, resize the pedigree, and so forth. • Click Individual List to see the family information that was displayed on the Family Tree view in a sortable list.

From now on, the system displays your family information with this view screen until you switch to another view screen. When you switch from the Family Pedigree with Details view to the Family Tree view or back again, the couple that is in the main position stays the same. The information that is displayed changes, depending on what that view screen can display. Note: If you display a different spouse or parents for an individual and then switch to a different view, you see the default spouse and parents, not the ones you switched to.

Why Your Family Tree Does Not Contain All of the Information That You Expect to See

When you first display your family tree, it may not contain all of the information that you expected to see. If you signed in with a public FamilySearch account, your user profile contains your name. It lacks the other information required to correctly display your information on a family tree. Therefore, your family tree indicates that your gender is unknown. You appear in the male position on the family tree. To make the needed corrections, click Details. Then click the Edit link for the gender, and select your gender. You can also click the Add links to enter your birth date and other information.

You can then begin building your family tree. The blank spots on your family tree contain Add or find... links. Click them to add new people and to find people who are already in the system and link them into your family tree.

Church Members

If you are a Church member and signed in with your LDS FamilySearch account, you might not see all of the information that you expected for these reasons: • Your family tree uses information from Church membership records. If your family members are also Church members, you see only limited information about them. For example: - If your spouse’s parents are Church members and are still living, you do not see them because they are not your direct-line ancestors. Your spouse sees them, but you do not. - You see only limited information about your adult children. - If you were married to someone else previously and if that person is still alive, you see only your current spouse. • Your Church membership record might not be correctly linked to the records of your ancestors. Click the Add or find... links to find the missing records and add them to your family tree.

The Family Pedigree with Details View

In the Family Pedigree with Details view, you see a small version of the family pedigree at the top of the page. Beneath the pedigree, you see the complete details of the individual whose name you click on the pedigree.

What the Screen Looks Like

Advantages

• You see both a pedigree and an individual’s complete details. It may be easier to keep the context of the place in your family line where you are working. • You have instant access to the complete details of any individual shown on the screen. This reduces the number of clicks required to get to the information and features there.

The Family Tree View

In the Family Tree view, you see a family pedigree at the top of the page and some of the details for one individual on the right side of the screen. You can display an individual’s complete details in a pop-up.

What the Screen Looks Like

Advantages

On the Family Tree view, you have more control over how the pedigree is displayed than you do on the Family Pedigree with Details view. For example, you can do the following: • Display ancestors or descendants. • Display more generations than you can on the Family Pedigree with Details view. • Resize and move the pedigree. • Highlight the path back to yourself. • Straighten the line between an ancestor and yourself.

The Individual List View

The Individual List view lets you see the family information that was displayed on the Family Tree view in a sortable list. You can display an individual’s complete details in a pop-up.

What the Screen Looks Like

Advantages

The Individual List view is helpful for analyzing a part of your family line. For example, you can easily see individuals who lack birth and death information. You can also use it to help your research. For example, you can sort the list by birthplace to see everyone in that line whose information should be listed in the birth records of that place. On the Individual List view, you can do the following: • Click a column heading. This sorts the individuals on the list by that information. You can sort by name, birth date, and other information. • Click and drag a column’s edge. This lets you make the column wider or narrower. • Click and drag a column heading. This lets you change the order in which the columns are displayed.

The Difference Between a Family Pedigree and a Traditional Pedigree

The system uses a family pedigree. On a traditional pedigree chart, each spot shows one individual. In a family pedigree, however, each spot shows an individual and his or her spouse.

Figure 1: A Traditional Pedigree

Figure 2: A Family Pedigree

Seeing Family Information on the Family Pedigree with Details View

On the Family Pedigree with Details view, you can see your family information on a family pedigree. From there, you can move families to different places on the screen and change to different spouses or parents if an individual had more than one.

1. Click the Me and My Ancestors tab. 2. If needed, change to the Family Pedigree with Details view: a. Click the Change View drop-down list, located in the upper left corner of the pedigree. b. From the drop-down list, click Family Pedigree with Details.

Moving Individuals Around on the Family Pedigree with Details View

You can move different individuals to the main position on the Family Pedigree with Details view.

• To move a specific individual to the main position on the Family Pedigree with Details view, click the (Move to main position) button. • To move a family line one generation forward or backward, click the (Show ancestors) or (Show descendants) buttons.

Returning to a Previously Viewed Individual on the Family Pedigree with Details View

On the Family Pedigree with Details view, you can quickly return to an individual who was in the main position. Note: The History button on the Family Pedigree with Details view and the Go To button on the Family Tree view work differently: • The History button is on the Family Pedigree with Details view. It shows individuals who have been in the main position. This list is available until you sign out of the system. • The Go To button is on the Family Tree view. It lists individuals whose names you have clicked. This list is available until you leave the Me and My Ancestors screen.

1. Click the History button, located in the top-left part of the page.

A menu appears, showing individuals who have been in the main position during your session using the system. 2. Click the individual that you want to see.

The individual that you select appears in the main position.

Switching to Other Spouses and Other Parents on the Family Pedigree with Details View

In the Family Pedigree with Details view, you can quickly see if an individual has other spouses or parents. If you want to see another spouse or set of parents, you can display them.

1. On the Family Pedigree with Details view, click the icon that lets you see the other spouses or parents:

• Click (See other spouses) to see a list of the individual’s spouses. Tip: This icon appears only when individuals are in the main position. To display a different spouse for someone else on the pedigree, first move that individual to the main position. Then display a different spouse. • Click (See other parents) to see a list of the individual’s parents. A list of the individual’s other spouses or parents appears. Tip: If the additional spouses and parents are duplicates, you can combine them.

2. Click the spouse or parents that you want to see. 3. (Optional) If you want the selected spouse or parents to appear on the pedigree by default, click Always show the selected spouse or Always show the selected parents. 4. Click Done.

The spouse or parents that you selected appear. Unless you selected the option to always show the selected spouse or parents, the spouse or parents are displayed until you select another spouse or set of parents, until you switch to the Family Tree view, or until you exit the system and come back into it.

Seeing Family Information on the Family Tree View

On the Family Tree view, you can see your family information on a family pedigree. From there, you can see more generations, resize the pedigree, move families to different places on the screen, and change to different spouses or parents if an individual had more than one.

1. Click the Me and My Ancestors tab. 2. If needed, change to the Family Tree view: a. Click the Change View drop-down list, located in the upper left corner of the pedigree. b. From the drop-down list, click Family Tree.

Displaying an Individual’s Ancestors on the Family Tree View

By default, the Family Tree view shows 4 generations of an individual’s ancestors (parents, grandparents, and great-grandparents). Ancestors are shown on a “pedigree,” which shows how the generations are connected through time.

3. If you see descendants instead of ancestors, follow these steps: a. Click the individual whose ancestors you want to see. b. Click (Show Ancestors). The individual moves to the main position with ancestors shown. 4. To view the next generation of ancestors, click (Extend Pedigree), which appears to the right of the last generation on the pedigree. This arrow appears when the system contains more information about a family line.

Displaying an Individual’s Descendants on the Family Tree View

Descendants are an individual’s children, grandchildren, and so forth. On the Family Tree view, you can change the display from showing a pedigree or list to showing an individual’s children.

3. Click the individual whose children you want to see.

4. Click (Show Descendants). The individual moves to the main position with children shown. 5. To view one of the children’s children, click (Extend Descendancy), which appears to the left of the couple whose descendants are shown. 6. (Optional) To display an individual’s ancestors again, click the individual’s name, and then click (Show Ancestors).

Moving an Individual to the Main Position on the Family Tree View

You can move an individual and his or her spouse to the main position on the Family Tree view. During this process, you can choose whether you see the couple and their ancestors or the couple with their children.

1. Click the individual’s name. 2. Indicate whether you want to see the individual with his or her ancestors or children:

• To see the individual and his or her ancestors, click (Show Ancestors).

• To see the individual and his or her children, click (Show Descendants). Tip: To see the individual with both ancestors and children, switch to the Family Pedigree with Details view.

Returning to Yourself or a Previously Viewed Individual on the Family Tree View

On the Family Tree view, you can quickly return to yourself or another individual whose name you clicked previously. Note: The History button on the Family Pedigree with Details view and the Go To button on the Family Tree view work differently: • The History button is on the Family Pedigree with Details view. It shows individuals who have been in the main position. This list is available until you sign out of the system. • The Go To button is on the Family Tree view. It lists individuals whose names you have clicked. This list is available until you leave the Me and My Ancestors screen.

1. On the Family Tree view, click Go To. A drop-down list appears, showing all individuals whose names you have clicked. The individuals on this list are available until you sign out of the system. 2. Click the individual that you want to see.

Resizing the Family Tree View

If you have many generations of a pedigree or descendants open on the Family Tree view, it can be difficult to see all of the information. Resizing the view allows you to alternate between seeing the entire view and seeing names in a particular place on the view. Your browser’s option to increase or decrease the font size does not work on the Family Tree view. Tip: If your mouse has a wheel on it, place the cursor anywhere in the pedigree, and roll the wheel with your finger. Rolling it up increases the display size. Rolling it down decreases the display size.

1. On the Family Tree view, place the cursor on the zoom bar, which is located in the upper left corner of the pedigree.

2. Click the zoom bar, and move it up or down: • To decrease the size of the display, click the zoom bar, and drag the mouse upward toward the minus (-) mark.

• To increase the size of the display, click the zoom bar, and drag the mouse downward toward the plus (+) sign.

Moving the Family Tree View

You can move the pedigree and descendants views around on the Family Tree view. This helps you focus on a specific place in your family line. You may also need to move the view screen if you close generations and find that the remaining information is not visible.

On the Family Tree view, click the appropriate button on the diamond that allows you to move the pedigree, which is located in the upper left part of the screen, next to the zoom bar.

• To center the information on the screen, click the square in the middle. • To move the information up, down, right, or left, click one of the triangles. For example, click the triangle that points down to see more information at the bottom of the screen. Click the triangle that points right to see more of the right side. Tip: You can also click any blank part of the screen. While holding the mouse button down, drag the information to the place where you want it. This also lets you move the information diagonally, which you cannot do with the triangle buttons.

Displaying More Generations on the Family Tree View

When you first display an individual’s pedigree or descendants on the Family Tree view, you may not see all of the information that the system contains about that family line. You can display more generations if the system contains them.

1. On the Family Tree view, find the line that you want to extend. 2. Click the appropriate icon: • If you are viewing ancestors and want to display an individual’s parents, click (Extend Pedigree), which appears to the right of the individual’s name. • If you are viewing descendants and want to display an individual’s children, click (Extend Descendancy), which appears to the left of the individual’s name. You may need to wait for a few seconds while the information appears. If you do not see the arrow icon, the system either does not contain any more information, or it cannot display the information because the individuals may still be living. If nothing happens when you click the arrow, it means that the same individual is already shown on the pedigree. This could be the result of these situations: • The same individual is in more than one line on your pedigree. For example, if your great-grandparents were first cousins, then two of your lines connect to the

same individuals. If the pedigree already displays this line, the system cannot display it again. The pedigree can display the shared line once. • The individual is part of a looping pedigree. A looping pedigree is a pedigree in which individuals are incorrectly linked back to themselves in future or previous generations. For example, an individual may be mistakenly combined with a father or grandfather of the same name. Consequently, he is linked to himself as his own father or grandfather.

Displaying Fewer Generations on the Family Tree View

If the Family Tree view contains too many generations of ancestors or descendants, you can close some to make navigation easier.

1. On the Family Tree view, find the line that you want to collapse. 2. Click the appropriate icon: • If you are viewing a pedigree and want to collapse one generation of ancestors, click (Collapse Pedigree), which appears to the right of the couple’s names: • If you are viewing descendants and want to hide a couple’s children, click (Collapse Descendancy), which appears to the left of the couple’s names. If you do not see the arrow icon, you cannot collapse the line any farther.

Highlighting the Path to Yourself on the Family Tree View

When you have many generations of ancestors or descendants open on the Family Tree view, it can be helpful to have the path back to yourself highlighted. This keeps you oriented as to where you are in your family line. Make sure the Family Tree view contains all of the generations that you want.

1. On the Family Tree view, hover your mouse pointer over a couple. The path back to you is highlighted in yellow. When you move your mouse to a different couple, the previous highlighting disappears, and the new path is highlighted. 2. If you want the highlighted path to remain on the screen, regardless of where your mouse pointer is located, follow these steps: a. Click the individual whose path you want to highlight.

b. Click (Highlight). The path from the ancestor to you is highlighted in yellow. c. (Optional) To remove the highlight, click an individual whose path to you is already highlighted, and click (Highlight) again.

Displaying Different Spouses and Parents on the Family Tree View

An individual can be linked to more than one spouse and more than one set of parents. If the Family Tree view does not show the parents or spouse that you want, you can select a different one.

When an individual has more than one spouse, you see a triangle by the spouse’s name. If a man has more than one wife, the triangle is beneath the wife’s name. If a woman has more than one husband, the triangle appears above the husband’s name. When an individual has more than one set of parents, you see a triangle to the left of the box in which the parents’ names appear.

1. On the Family Tree view, display the individual whose spouse or parents you want to switch. 2. Indicate that you want to see a different spouse or set of parents: • To see other husbands, click the Show All Husbands triangle, which appears above the name of the currently listed husband.

• To see other wives, click the Show All Wives triangle, which appears below the name of the currently listed wife.

• To see other parents, click the Show All Parents triangle, which appears to the left of the names of the currently listed parents.

A drop-down list of the other husbands, wives, or parents appears. 3. Click the option that you want: • To temporarily display a different spouse or parents on the pedigree, click the name on the list. • If you want to select a different spouse or parents to appear on the pedigree by default, click the option that lets you select the default spouse or parents. Then click the spouse or parents that you want, and click Done.

If you temporarily displayed a different spouse or parents, the pedigree displays that spouse or parents until you change to a different spouse or parents or until you sign out of the system. When you return, the pedigree displays the default spouse or parents. If you selected different default parents, the pedigree displays that set of parents every time you display the pedigree until you either display a different set of parents temporarily or change the default parents. If you selected a different default spouse, the result depends on whether you are descended from that spouse: • If you are descended from the default spouse that you selected, that spouse appears on the pedigree until you either display a different spouse temporarily or change the default spouse. • If you are not descended from that spouse, the spouse that you selected appears on the pedigree until you sign out of the system. When you return, the pedigree displays the spouse from whom you are descended. If it displayed a spouse to whom you are not related, the system would not be able to show you on your pedigree.

Straightening the Path between One Generation and Another on the Family Tree View

As you navigate through the Family Tree view, it sometimes becomes confusing to follow the multiple family lines that are displayed. You can straighten out the display of a family line so that the path between the beginning and ending of the line is easier to see and follow.

1. On the Family Tree view, click the individual at the end of the line that you want to straighten.

2. Click (Align Family).

Displaying Family Information on the Individual List View

Sometimes it is helpful to see a list of the individuals who are shown on a pedigree. You can switch to the Individual List view from the Family Tree view only. Important: You must be on the Family Tree view to display the Individual List view.

The (Highlight) and (Align Family) buttons do not work on the Individual List view.

1. On the Family Tree view, display all of the generations of ancestors or descendants that you want included in the list. 2. Switch to the Individual List view: a. Click the Change View drop-down list, located in the upper left corner of the pedigree. b. From the drop-down list, click Individual List.

3. To replace the contents of the list with the ancestors of a specific individual, follow these steps: a. Click the individual whose ancestors you want to see. b. Click (Show Ancestors).

The next generation of the individual’s ancestors appear. 4. To replace the contents of the list with the descendants of a specific individual, follow these steps: a. Click the individual whose descendants you want to see.

b. Click (Show Descendants). The next generation of the individual’s descendants appear. 5. To return to the Family Tree view, double-click an individual’s name. The Family Tree appears, with that individual and his or her spouse in the main position.

The individuals appear in a list. The individual whose name was highlighted on the pedigree when you switched to the list is highlighted with a blue bar.

Sorting Information in the Individual List View

Within the Individual List view, you can sort the information found within columns. Information displayed in columns can be sorted alphabetically, chronologically, or numerically.

1. Click the column heading that you want to sort by. You cannot sort all of the columns. If you click a column and nothing happens, the column cannot be sorted. You can also determine whether a column can be sorted if a dark triangle appears in the column heading after you click it. This triangle indicates the order in which the information is sorted: • If the triangle tip points up, the information is sorted from lowest to highest value. For example, dates are sorted from the earliest date to the latest. Names are sorted in alphabetical order. • If the triangle tip points down, the information is sorted from the highest to the lowest value. For example, dates are sorted from the latest to the earliest. Names are sorted in reverse alphabetical order. The rows in the list rearrange to the new sort order. 2. (Optional) Click the column heading again to change the sort order.

When you sign out of the system and come back in, the list is sorted in its original order. You cannot save the sort order from one session to the next.

Resizing the Columns in a List

You can make columns wider or thinner. This lets you display more of the information found within a column.

1. In the header of the column that you want to change, place the cursor exactly on the edge of the column line until the cursor changes shape from the cursor arrow to double vertical lines. Important: This does not work if the cursor is placed anywhere outside of the column header.

2. Left click the mouse, and drag the column lines to the position that you want.

When you sign out of the system and come back in, the columns are in their original size. You cannot save the column size from one session to the next.

Reordering the Columns in a List

You can change the order in which data appears in a list so that you can see the information in different columns closer together.

1. Move the cursor into the column heading that you want to move. 2. Left click the mouse, and hold the button down. 3. While holding the mouse button down, move the column head to the new location where you want it to appear, and let go of the cursor button.

When you sign out of the system and come back in, the columns are in their original order. You cannot save the order of the columns from one session to the next.

Displaying a Family Group Record

A family group record shows parents and their children. You can display and print a family group record for any individual shown on the pedigree.

1. On the pedigree, click the individual whose family group record you want to see. 2. Display the family group record: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, click the Parents and Children or Spouses and Children button, depending on which family you want to see. Then click the View family group record link that is located in the upper-right corner of the details. • If you are on the Family Tree view or Individual List view, click the View Family Group Record link, which is located at the top of the details panel to the right of the pedigree. The family group record appears in a pop-up. 3. (Optional) To see a family group record for a relative whose name does not appear on the family group record that you currently see, close the family group record pop-up. Then do one of the following: • On the pedigree, click the family that you want to view, and display the family group record. • To see the family group record with the individual and a different spouse, display the individual with that spouse. Then display the family group record. - On the Family Pedigree with Details view, click the spouse’s name in the list of other spouses. - On the Family Tree view, switch to that spouse on the pedigree. - On the Individual List view, switch to the Family Tree view, and then switch to that spouse on the pedigree. You can either display the family group record from there, or you can switch back to the Individual List first. • Use the Search feature to find a deceased individual in the family. Go to that individual on the Family Tree view or Individual List view, and display the family group record.

Seeing Details about Individuals and Families

You can see more information about each individual and family shown on the Me and My Ancestors screen. The details are displayed in different ways on the different view screens.

1. On any view screen, click the individual whose details you want to see. View Screen How to See the Details Family Pedigree The individual’s complete details appear beneath the pedigree. with Details Family Tree To see the complete details, double-click an individual’s name. view You can also click the View details link, which appears at the top of the panel that is located on the right side of the screen. Some details also appear on a panel that is located on the right side of the screen.

• To see the Summary, click (Summary). • To see the individual with his or her spouse and children,

click (Family).

Individual List Click the View details link, which appears at the top of the view panel that is located on the right side of the screen. Important: Do not double-click an individual. When you do this, the view changes to the Family Tree, with that individual in the main position. Some details also appear on a panel that is located on the right side of the screen.

• To see the Summary, click (Summary). • To see the individual with his or her spouse and children,

click (Family).

2. On the complete details, click a button to display the specific type of information that you want: • Click Summary to select the correct version of the individual’s name; gender; and birth, christening, death, and burial information. • Click Details to see all of an individual’s information in a list. The list contains all versions of the information. It may, for example, contain several versions of the name. • Click LDS Ordinances to see whether a deceased individual’s temple ordinances are complete. From here, you can reserve ordinances. • Click Time Line to see a time line of the individual’s life. • Click Map to see a map showing the places where events in the individual’s life occurred. • Click Parents and Siblings to see the individual as a child with his or her mother, father, brothers, and sisters. • Click Spouses and Children to see the individual with spouses and children.

• Click Possible Duplicates to see other records that might be about this same individual. • Click Discussions to see and participate in discussions about this individual.

Information Found in the Complete Details

The complete details contains many types of information about an individual and the families in which he or she is a member. At the top of the complete details, the following information appears: • The individual’s name. • Years of birth and death. • A link that you can use to “watch” the individual’s record for changes.

Along the left side of the complete details are buttons that allow you to see different types of information about the individual: • Click Summary to select the correct version of the individual’s name; gender; and birth, christening, death, and burial information. • Click Details to see all of an individual’s information in a list. The list contains all versions of the information. It may, for example, contain several versions of the name. • Click LDS Ordinances to see whether a deceased individual’s temple ordinances are complete. From here, you can reserve ordinances. • Click Time Line to see a time line of the individual’s life. • Click Map to see a map showing the places where events in the individual’s life occurred. • Click Parents and Siblings to see the individual as a child with his or her mother, father, brothers, and sisters. • Click Spouses and Children to see the individual with spouses and children. • Click Possible Duplicates to see other records that might be about this same individual. • Click Discussions to see and participate in discussions about this individual.

Complete Details: Summary Section

The Summary section shows an individual’s name, gender, birth information, christening information, death information, and burial information. Here you can also select the most correct version of the information. The Person identifier appears on this section of the details.

What the Screen Looks Like

What You Can Do

Here you can do the following: • You can select the version of the name, gender, birth, and death information that the system displays when it has room enough for only one version, such as the name on the pedigree. All users who look at this individual’s family line see the information selected here. If someone else changes the summary, you see what he or she selected. • You can see who made the last change to an item on the summary. • If the correct information is not available, click to enter it. The option to add new information is located at the bottom of the drop-down list. Tip: If you cannot see the option to add the information, then the details screen is shorter than the drop-down list. To fix this, click the right or left side of the details Window. While holding the mouse button down, drag your mouse to enlarge the Window. Click again. If you still cannot see the bottom of the drop-down list, enlarge the Window again. • See the Person Identifier, which is the individual’s unique identifying number in the system. Note: Person identifiers are generated randomly to help the system keep track of an individual. You cannot use them to determine specific information about the individual or the source of the information. • To see notes about the individuals, click Individual notes.

• To see if this individual’s record has been combined with other records, click Combined records. If you find a record about the wrong person, you can separate it.

Complete Details: Details Section

The Details section shows an individual’s information on a list. The list contains all versions of the information. It may, for example, contain several versions of the name. The Person identifier appears on this section of the details.

What the Screen Looks Like

What You Can Do

Here you can do the following: • You can see contributors, notes, and sources. Click the information or the Edit link that is next to it. • If you are the only contributor of the information, you can edit or delete it. If you are not the only contributor of the information, you can add another opinion. To begin, click the information or the Edit link that is next to it. • To add notes, click Individual notes. Then click the link that lets you add the type of note that you want. • To add sources, click the information or the Edit link that is next to it. If you added this information, click Add a source. If you did not add the information, click Add another opinion, and re-enter the information and its source. • To add new information, click the Add link for the missing information. If the screen does not contain an Add link for what you want to enter, click Add information. Then select the type of information that you want to add. • See the Person Identifier, which is the individual’s unique identifying number in the system.

Note: Person identifiers are generated randomly to help the system keep track of an individual. You cannot use them to determine specific information about the individual or the source of the information. • To see if this individual’s record has been combined with other records, click Combined records. If you find a record about the wrong person, you can separate it. • See place-names both as they were entered by the contributor and as the system standardized them. By default, you see the place-name as it was entered. Point your mouse cursor on the place-name to see if the system standardized it differently.

Complete Details: LDS Ordinances Section

The LDS Ordinances section shows whether a deceased individual’s temple ordinances are complete. From here, you can reserve ordinances.

What the Screen Looks Like

What You Can Do

Here you can do the following: • See the status of a deceased individual’s ordinances.

• If an ordinance is reserved, you see the contact name of the user who reserved it. To contact him or her, click the user’s name. If the user allows the system to display contact information, it appears. • Click an ordinance status to see its meaning. • Reserve ordinances that have the status of “Ready.” Click This individual needs temple ordinances. Click here to do them. Note: You cannot see ordinance information for any individual who is still living, including yourself. Only local priesthood leaders are authorized to provide that information.

Complete Details: Time Line Section

The Time Line section shows information about an individual on a time line.

What the Screen Looks Like

What You Can Do

Here you can do the following: • To see more information about an event on the time line, put your cursor on the event, and wait for additional details to appear.

• To see the contributor of the event and any notes or sources, click the event. • To edit or delete the event or to add a note or source, click the event, and then the appropriate link. • To add more information to the time line, click Add information.

Complete Details: Map Section

You can display a map that shows the events of an individual’s life on a map or satellite photograph. These places of events are marked on the map with a icon.

What the Screen Looks Like

What You Can Do

From the Map section of the details, you can do the following: • To see more information about the event indicated on the map, click the icon. From here, you can also zoom in (display more detail on the map) or zoom out (display less detail on the map). • To add new events to the individual’s record and the map, click Add information. • By default, you see the events on a map. To switch to a satellite view, click Satellite view. To switch back to the map, click Map view. • To move the map to the north, south, east, or west, click the corresponding arrow buttons.

• To change the scale of the map to show more of the world, move the slider control down. • To change the scale of the map to show a closer view of the place, move the slider control up.

Complete Details: Parents and Siblings Section

The Parents and Siblings section shows you all of the parents that an individual is connected to, as well as his or her brothers and sisters.

What the Screen Looks Like

What You Can Do

From the Parents and Siblings section, you can do the following: • Add information about the parents’ marriage, such as the marriage date and place, divorce information, and so on. To begin, click Add marriage event. You may need to scroll to the bottom of the existing marriage events to see this link. • To add a sibling (brother or sister), click Add or find sibling. • To see and change the types of relationships between the children and parents, click View relationship details. For example, you can change a biological relationship to adopted. • To see or add notes about the family as a whole, click View or add family notes. • You can remove the individual from the family. To begin, click the button that is next to his or her name. • Delete an individual. To begin, click the button that is next to his or her name. • Add a parent. To begin, click Add or find parents. • To see details about any individual shown on the page, click the individual’s name. • Combine duplicate records of parents, brothers, and sisters. To begin, click the button that is next to the individual who has a duplicate.

• If an individual is connected to more than one set of parents and if a user has disputed one or more of these relationships, you see a link that lets you view other opinions about the relationship. This link is located in the lower right corner.

Complete Details: Spouses and Children Section

The Spouses and Children section shows you all of the individual’s spouses and children.

What the Screen Looks Like

What You Can Do

From the Spouses and Children section, you can do the following: • Add information about the parents’ marriage, such as the marriage date and place, divorce information, and so on. To begin, click Add marriage event. You may need to scroll to the bottom of the existing marriage events to see this link. • To add a child, click Add or find child. • To see and change the types of relationships between the children and parents, click View relationship details. For example, you can change a biological relationship to adopted. • To see or add notes about the family as a whole, click View or add family notes. • You can remove the individual from the family. To begin, click the button that is next to his or her name. • Delete an individual. To begin, click the button that is next to his or her name. • You can add a spouse. To begin, click Add or find spouse.

• To see details about any individual shown on the page, click the individual’s name. • Combine duplicate records of spouses and children. To begin, click the button that is next to the individual who has a duplicate. • If an individual is connected to more than one spouse and if a user has disputed one or more of these relationships, you see a link that lets you view other opinions about the relationship. This link is located in the lower right corner.

Complete Details: Possible Duplicates Section

Some of your ancestors may have more than one record in the system. These records are called “duplicates.” The system automatically searches for possible duplicates and shows them in the details. You can then compare the records and decide if they are about the same individual.

What the Screen Looks Like

What You Can Do

From the Possible Duplicate section of the details, you can do the following: • See the possible duplicates that the system found automatically. • To see more detail about the possible duplicates and combine them if needed, click the check box that is next to each possible duplicate that you want to see. Then click Compare in More Detail. Note: If the records are about the same individual, you should combine them. Even if you disagree with some information in a duplicate record, you should still combine the records. Having all of the information about an individual in one place prevents

duplication of research. It also helps ensure that the individual’s ordinances are performed once only. • To search for other possible duplicates, click Advanced search for other possible duplicates.

Complete Details: Discussions

Each deceased individual in the system has a discussion board. Discussions help foster collaboration and cooperation between the users who are interested in making the individual’s information as correct as possible.

What the Screen Looks Like

What You Can Do

Here you can do the following: • To start a new discussion, click Start a New Discussion. • To enter comments about discussions or other comments, enter your comment in the comment box that appears beneath the discussion or comment. Then click Post. • To edit one of your own discussions or comments, click the Edit link that appears beneath it. • To delete one of your own discussions or comments, click the Delete link that appears beneath it. If you delete a discussion that you began, the system deletes the discussion and all of its comments, even if you did not enter all of the comments. • To report an inappropriate discussion or comment, click the Report abuse link that appears beneath it.

Seeing Contributors, Notes, and Sources

You can see contributors, notes, and sources for individuals and each piece of information about each individual, as well as for marriage events and families.

You can see the following: • The contributors, notes, and sources of each name, date, place, and fact about an individual. • Notes about the individual. • The contributors, notes, and sources for each date and place associated with a couple’s marriage. • The contributors, notes, and sources of child-to-parent relationships. (Currently there is no way to see the contributors, notes, and sources for spouse relationships.) • You can see notes about the family as a whole, called family notes.

1. On a view screen, click the individual or family whose contributors, notes, or sources you want to see. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Display the information that you want to see: Information to Display Steps Who selected the name, Click Summary. birth, christening, death, or burial information The contributor of the individual’s name, gender, 1. Click Details or Summary. events, or facts 2. If the word Multiple appears instead of a contributor’s name, click it to display the complete list of contributors. 3. To see contact information, click the contributor’s name.

The individual’s notes 1. Click Details or Summary. 2. Click Individual notes.

The individual’s sources 1. Click Details or Summary. 2. Click Individual sources.

Who reserved ordinances 1. Click LDS Ordinances. 2. To see contact information, click the contributor’s name.

The contributor, notes, or sources of a marriage event 1. Click Spouses and Children or Parents and Siblings, depending on which family the couple is in.

Information to Display Steps 2. Click the Edit link that is next to the marriage event. You may need to scroll to see all of the marriage events. 3. If the word Multiple appears instead of a contributor’s name, click it to display the complete list of contributors. 4. To see contact information, click the contributor’s name.

The contributor, notes, and sources of a child-to-parent 1. Click Spouses and Children or Parents and relationship Siblings, depending on which family the individuals are in. Note: Currently there is no 2. Click View relationship details. way to see the contributors, 3. Click the Edit link of the relationship. notes, and sources for 4. If the word Multiple appears instead of a spouse relationships. contributor’s name, click it to display the complete list of contributors. 5. To see contact information, click the contributor’s name.

Notes about a family 1. Click Spouses and Children or Parents and Siblings, depending on which family you want to see. 2. Click View or add family notes.

Contributor Names

When you see information about a contributor, you usually see his or her contact name. You may also see information that allows you to contact the individual. Sometimes you will see other types of contributors. These other types of contributors include the following: FamilySearch Ancestral The information was originally published in Ancestral File File, and the original contributor could not be determined. FamilySearch Pedigree The information was originally published in the Pedigree Resource File Resource File, and the original contributor could not be determined. FamilySearch The information was used to determine whether an individual’s record contained enough information for temple ordinances to be performed. FamilySearch Extraction The information was extracted from original records Program during a Church extraction project. LDS Church Membership The information came from membership records of The Records Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints.

Data Administrator The contributor is a system administrator of the new FamilySearch website. FamilySearch Medieval The contributor is a group of people at LDS Church Unit headquarters who specialize in medieval family history research. System Generated The information was provided as part of an automated process in the system. Unknown The contributor is not known.

Seeing Information about Living Relatives

You can add living individuals to your family tree. If you do this, only you can see the information. If you are a member of the LDS Church, your family tree may contain your living LDS spouse, children, parents, and grandparents. It does not show your living brothers, sisters, aunts, uncles, in-laws, and other living relatives. Before you add living individuals to your family tree, follow these guidelines: • Do not add large numbers of living relatives to your family tree, either by hand or in a GEDCOM file. Contribute living relatives only when you need to link the records of living individuals to deceased individuals. Adding living individuals to the system creates these risks: - Once the individual dies, the record that you entered may become a duplicate that someone will have to combine with other records about the same individual. - If you mistype information, the system might consider that the individual is deceased and display the information for everyone to see. Showing this information is a violation of that individual’s privacy. It also lets others inadvertently perform proxy temple ordinances for someone who is still living. These ordinances are invalid and must be corrected by a system administrator. • Please obtain permission from living individuals before you add their information to the system. See the Conditions of Use for more information. • Use a computer program like Personal Ancestral File if you want to keep extensive information about living relatives.

• Since you cannot use the Search feature to find living relatives, use these options to find one of them in your family tree: - Click the See Me and My Ancestors tab, and navigate to the individual. - Search for a close relative who has birth or death information, and display the pedigree. Then navigate to the individual that you want to find. - If you contributed a living individual in a GEDCOM file, you can view the results of the GEDCOM file, and go directly to him or her.

Reporting Living Individuals Mistakenly Displayed in the System

If you find living individuals whose information is displayed because the system contains incorrect death information, please contact FamilySearch Support.

You can either click the Feedback link or contact support directly (http://contact.fam ilysearch.org/). In your message, please include the following information: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • A brief explanation of how you know that the individual is still alive.

Adding Information about Living LDS Church Members

Add living LDS relatives only when you need their information in the system to connect to your deceased ancestors. Only you can see the records that you add. Further, the records that you add become duplicate records that will need to be combined after the individual’s death. The system automatically displays information from an individual’s Church membership record after one of the following occurs: • Death information is added to the membership record. • 110 years have passed since their birth. Note: The system uses these same rules to display information about Church members who were excommunicated or requested that their name be removed from Church records. It does not indicate that the individual was excommunicated or had his or her name removed from Church records. If you know that a deceased individual was excommunicated or requested that their name be removed from Church records, please be aware that First Presidency approval is required before temple ordinances may be performed for them.

Information That You Can See from LDS Church Membership Records about Living Individuals

If you are a Church member, your family tree contains some living relatives to whom your Church membership record is connected.

Living Relatives You Can See

You should be able to see the following information from Church membership records: • The names and genders of your current spouse, parents, grandparents, and other direct ancestors. Prior marriages appear only after you and each prior spouse is dead. • The names, genders, and birth dates of your children who are younger than 18 years old. • The names and genders of your children who are more than 18 years old. If you do not see these individuals, check the following: • If you do not see your parents, children, or current spouse, your membership record might not be linked correctly to their membership records. If you think that your membership record is incorrect, please work with your membership clerk to correct it.

• If you do not see your living LDS grandparents, your parents’ membership records might not be correctly linked to their parents. Your parents need to work with their membership clerk to correct it.

Living Relatives That You Might Not See

Privacy rules prevent you from seeing information from Church membership records for these relatives: • Living brothers, sisters, aunts, uncles, and cousins. • Living in-laws. If your spouse’s parents are Church members and are still living, you do not see them because they are not your direct-line ancestors. Your spouse sees them, but you do not. • Your previous spouses who are still living.

Ordinance Information

You cannot see ordinance information for any individual who is still living, including yourself. Only local priesthood leaders are authorized to provide that information.

How the System Displays Living People

You can easily identify individuals who may be living by the way the system displays their information. • In the complete details, the individual’s name is displayed in italics. The text is lighter than the names of deceased people. • In the complete details, the word “Living” appears next to the individual’s name.

Rules Used to Determine If an Individual May Still Be Living

The system uses rules to determine whether an individual may still be living. The system considers that an individual may be living if both of the following situations apply: • He or she was born 110 or fewer years ago, married 95 or fewer years ago, or had a child born 95 or fewer years ago. • The record contains no death information. Note: Any text in the fields for death and burial causes the system to determine that the individual is deceased. Leave these fields blank unless the individual has died.

Searching for Deceased Individuals

You can use the Search feature to find out whether a deceased individual is in the system. You cannot use the Search feature to find living individuals. Before you can search for a deceased individual, you must know one of the following: • At least part of the name of the deceased individual or his or her father or mother. You can add more information if you have it. • One of these identification numbers:

- Person Identifier. This unique number is assigned to every individual in the system. An example is KW3-BFN1. You can find it in an individual’s details by clicking either Details or Summary.

Note: Person identifiers are generated randomly to help the system keep track of an individual. You cannot use them to determine specific information about the individual or the source of the information. - AFN. This is the abbreviation for Ancestral File Number. An example of an AFN number is 3C88-WF. This unique number is assigned to every individual in the system that originally came from Ancestral File. If you know this number from your own records, then you can use it to find a deceased individual in the system. Otherwise, use a different search option.

1. Click the Search tab. Important: You can use the Search feature to find deceased individuals only. You cannot use it to find living people. The Search page appears. Unless you have changed your preferences, the Search page provides separate fields for the individual’s first and last names.

2. If you know the individual’s Person Identifier or Ancestral File number (AFN), use this shortcut: a. Click Search by Number b. Enter the number. c. Click Search. The system finds the individual whose number matches what you entered and displays him or her on the view screen. d. Skip the remaining steps. 3. (Optional) If needed, change the name fields on the Search page: • To enter the individual’s first and last names in one field, click Single name field. • To switch back to separate fields for the first and last names, click Multiple name fields. This option is useful if you want to find individuals with more than one last name (such as individuals with Spanish or Portuguese names) or individuals with names recorded in Chinese, Japanese, or Korean characters. Note: The Exact search options are available only when you select Multiple name fields.

b. Click the Exact check box of each field for which you want an exact search. For example, if you know an individual died in 1850, search using a death event. Enter 1850 in the Date field, and click the Exact check box beneath the Date field. The system finds only records of individuals who died sometime in 1850. 7. If a drop-down list with standardized dates and places appears, select an option to tell the system which date or place to use: • If you want the system to use only the standardized date or place, click the standard date or place in the drop-down list. The standard replaces what you entered. Tip: You may not need to type an entire place-name. Instead, start typing the place-name. When the correct place-name appears in the drop-down list, click it to add the place-name to the field. This shortcut reduces both the amount of typing that you do and the risk of typing errors. • If you want the system to save both what you enter and also a different standard, enter the date or place that you want. Then press Tab, or click the mouse outside of the field. If the system can identify a standard, it selects it for you. If the system cannot identify a standard, it indicates that a standard was not selected. • If you want the system to use the date or place-name exactly as you entered it and not save a standard, click None Selected. Note: If the system can identify a standardized date, it saves the standardized date, even if you select None Selected.

Tip: To change a standardized date, reenter the date. To change the standardized place that you selected, click the link that lets you select a standard. From the drop-down list, select a new standardized place. The system replaces the standardized place, but it does not change the place-name that you typed in. If the drop-down list does not contain the correct place, change the place that you entered to provide more information, such as a county or country name.

8. Click Search. The system looks for individuals who match what you entered and displays them on the Search Results page. 9. On the Search Results page, see if the individual is listed. The individuals whose records most closely match your search are listed first. Individuals who match less closely are listed after. 10. Indicate what you want to do next: • To see an individual’s complete details, click his or her name. • To see the individual on a view screen, click Go to. • If the system found many matching records, click the numbered links that are located in the top-center portion of the page. • If you want to refine your search, click Refine search. The Search page appears. Your previous search is in the fields so that you can modify the information. • To start a new search, click New search. The Search page appears. The fields will be blank.

Search Results

When you search, the system uses all of the information that you enter to find records about deceased individuals.

It then uses two methods to indicate how well each record matches what you searched for: • It places records that match more closely at the top of the list. • It uses a 5-star rating to indicate how close of a match the record is. More stars mean a closer match. The search results page can show only 20 names at a time. If the record did not closely match your search results and if the system found many matching records, you’ll have to click the number links to see all of them. It may be faster to refine your search. Note: An individual’s record might contain many different versions of a name, date, or place. The search results screen displays one version of that information. The search results may contain records that contain the name, date, or place that you looked for in a variation that does not show up on the search results page.

Refining a Search

If you conduct a search and do not find the individual that you want, you can use several techniques to refine your search. Remember, you cannot find living individuals with the Search feature.

1. On the list of search results, click Refine Search. The Search page appears. Your previous search is in the fields so that you can modify the information. 2. Modify your search. Try the following strategies: Option Description Search using less One of the most effective strategies is to enter less information information than you know about the individual. For example, if the name is not common, search using the name only. Enter only the parents’ names or only the spouse’s name. Try searching with only the name and a birth date or death date. The individual’s record may be in the system, but it may not contain all of the information that you know. Entering less information may help your search criteria match the individual’s record more closely and increase the likelihood that it will appear near the top of your search results with more stars.

Search using more Add more information about the individual if you know information it. If the individual’s record is in the system and has a lot of information, adding more information to your search may help your search criteria more closely match the record. Search using the Using the Multiple name field option is particularly Multiple Name Field useful in the following situations: option • The individual has a Spanish or Portuguese name. • The name is recorded in Chinese, Japanese, or Korean characters. • The name is patronymic (based on the father’s first name) or toponymic (based on a place-name).

Option Description Conduct an exact Try your search with and without exact searches. Using search exact searches on dates and places is especially helpful, since it limits the search results to people who lived in a specific place and time. Search for a close Search for a close relative, and then navigate to the relative instead individual you want to find. Use the GEDCOM If you contributed the individual in a GEDCOM file, you results can display the GEDCOM results, display a list of the individuals who were in the GEDCOM file, and display that individual’s pedigree. Search with other If the individual was from a country that does not use the alphabets or writing roman alphabet, such as China, Japan, Korea, or Russia, try systems searching for the name in the native writing system and in the roman alphabet. Wait for the system If the individual was recently added to the system, either to finish processing by data entry or by contributing a GEDCOM file, the system recently added may not be finished processing the information. Wait a individuals few minutes, and try again. (If the GEDCOM file was very large and if many people contributed GEDCOM files at the same time, the system may need up to 24 hours to process the file.)

3. Click Search. The system looks for individuals who match what you entered and displays them on the Search Results page. 4. On the Search Results page, see if the individual is listed. The individuals whose records most closely match your search are listed first. Individuals who match less closely are listed after. 5. Indicate what you want to do next: • To see details about an individual, click his or her name. • To see the individual on the family pedigree, click Go to. • If the system found many matching records, click the numbered links that are located in the top-center portion of the page. • If you want to refine your search, click Refine search. The Search page appears. Your previous search is in the fields so that you can modify the information. • To start a new search, click New search. The Search page appears. The fields will be blank.

How the Exact Check Boxes Affect Search Results

The exact search option limits the variations in names, dates, and places that the system considers close enough to include in the search results. It also specifies that the records in your search results must contain the information. The following example compares what records get found when you click the Exact check box for different fields. In your search, you enter the following information:

First name: Thomas William

Last name: Brand Birth date: 23 June 1896

The results you get depend on which Exact check boxes you click:

Which Exact Which Records the System Finds Check Boxes You Click None All records with variations of the names Thomas, William, and Brand, regardless of the birth date, and all records with birth dates within a few years of 23 June 1896, regardless of the name. For example:

Thomas William Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thomas William Frederick Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thomas William Brand-Jones, born 23 June 1896 Thos. William Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thomas W. Brand, born about 1896 Tom Bill Brannd, born 6 June 1896 Tom William Brannd, no birth date given Thomas Wm. Brandt, no birth date given Thomas Brandson, no birth date given John Wm. Brand, born 23 June 1896 Mathew Dixon Brand, born 23 June 1896

Records that match the name and birth date most closely appear higher on the search results. They also have more stars.

First name, last Only records that contain exactly Thomas and William in the name, and birth first name, exactly Brand in the last name, and exactly the birth date date 23 June 1896. For example:

Thomas William Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thomas William Frederick Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thomas William Brand-Jones, born 23 June 1896

Birth date All records with variations of the names Thomas, William, and Brand and exactly the birth date 23 June 1896. For example:

Thomas William Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thos. William Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thomas William Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thomas William Frederick Brand, born 23 June 1986 Thomas William Brand-Jones, born 23 June 1896

Last name and birth All records with variations of the first names Thomas and William, date and the exact last name Brand and exactly the birth date 23 June 1896. For example:

Thomas William Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thos. William Brand, born 23 June 1896 Tom Wm. Brand, born 23 June 1896 Thomas Brand, born 23 June 1896

How the Exact Check Box Affects a Search for Names

If you click the Exact check box to search for a name, the system finds records that contain that exact name somewhere in the name field. For example, if you enter Carl in the first name field and click the Exact check box, the system finds first names like these:

Carl Carl Matthew Ivan Carl

How the Exact Check Box Affects Searches for Dates

If you click the Exact check box to search for a date, the system finds records that contain that date or a date that is contained within that date’s range. For example, if you enter 1900 and click the Exact check box, the system finds dates like these:

1900 About 1900 April 1900 24 April 1900

This is helpful, for example, when you know that someone died in 1900 but not the exact month and day. Doing an exact search for April 1900 finds any day in April 1900. Doing an exact search for 1900–1905 finds all dates between 1 January 1900 and 31 December 1905 and dates like About 1903 and 1900–1901.

How the Exact Check Box Affects Searches for Places

When you click the Exact check box to search for a place, the system finds records from anywhere within that place’s boundaries. For example, if you enter England and click the Exact check box, the system finds records from anywhere in England. If you search for Lincoln County, Wyoming and click the Exact check box, the system finds places like these:

Lincoln, Wyoming, United States Thayne, Lincoln, Wyoming, United States Afton, Lincoln, Wyoming, United States

Printing Information

Using your browser’s print feature, you can print the information that is displayed on a screen. Therefore, you can print the following:

• You can print the information that is currently shown on the Me and My Ancestors screen. • You can print a family group record. • You can print your temple ordinances list.

1. Display the information that you want to print. 2. Click the correct print button: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, click Print. • If you are on the Family Tree view, Individual List view, or Family Group Record, click your browser’s File menu, and select Print. Also do this to print the temple ordinances list. Note: You can print up to 10 generations of ancestors or descendants from the Family Tree view.

Your browser’s print window appears. 3. Click Print.

The information prints. Sources do not print on family group records.

Using Certified Third-Party Computer Programs to Print Information

Some third-party computer and Web programs are certified to print information from the system. These programs offer wider variety of printing options than the system itself. For example, you can print more generations or different types of charts. You can use the following types of programs and services to print information from the system: • Add-in programs for Personal Ancestral File. These programs let you use Personal Ancestral File to exchange information with the online system. You can then store a copy on your computer and correct and add to the information online. You can also print charts and reports and use Personal Ancestral File’s other features. • Family history computer programs. These programs let you exchange information with the online system. You can then store a copy on your computer and correct and add to the information online. You can also print charts and reports and use the program’s other features. • Printing programs. These programs let you print information directly from the new FamilySearch Web site. Printing services use the information in the online system to create charts and reports.

For a current list of certified programs, see http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affili ates/index.html.

Chapter 3 Adding New Individuals and Families

If you cannot find information about your ancestors in the system, you can add what you know about them. When you add information, the system performs several tasks for you. • It adds your information to what is already there. If the information is about someone who is deceased, others can see it immediately. No one else will be able to change or delete what you contribute. • It identifies you as the contributor. Others who use the system can see the contact information that you chose to provide. • It determines if temple ordinances can be done and helps you do them. • It identifies if someone else may have already added the same individuals and families as you.

When to Add Information

You should add your family history to the system when you find information that it lacks. Adding the information soon after you find it gives you several benefits. You may be able to do temple ordinances for the individuals immediately. If you find more information after the ordinances are done, you can go back and add it. The system may already have information about that individual or family. You may find additional information or another contributor with whom you can work. You can come back and add to or correct the information that you added at any time.

How the System Helps You Enter Accurate Information

The system cannot determine whether your research is accurate. It does, however, help you clarify dates and places. When you enter dates and places, the system helps you clarify that information. Clarifying dates and places helps ensure that the system contains exactly the information that you intended to enter. It also helps the system to conduct more accurate searches. For example, if you enter 3/11/1876, the system asks if you meant 3 November 1876 or 11 March 1876. Or if you enter Paris, the system asks you to select which of the many places in the world named Paris you meant.

Linking Individuals Who Are Already in the System into Your Family Line

You may find that an individual is missing from your family line. If that individual is already in the system, you can link that existing individual into your family line rather than having to reenter the information. Before you can search for deceased ancestors, you must know either the individual’s name or his or her Ancestral File number (AFN) or person identifier.

1. On one of the view screens, click the appropriate link: View Screen Steps Family Pedigree Click the Add or find... link that appears instead of the with Details individual’s name. If that individual would not normally appear on this part of the pedigree, click the name of someone in the individual’s family. Then follow these steps: 1. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family the individual was a member of. 2. Click the appropriate Add or find... link.

Family Tree or To add a spouse that is missing on the pedigree, click the Add Individual List Spouse link that appears where the individual’s name should be. To add a different family member, follow these steps: 1. Click the name of someone in the individual’s family. For example, to add an individual’s brother or sister, click one of the parents. 2. Click Parents, Spouse, or Child. These links are located at the top of the panel that is located on the right side of the screen.

A screen appears where you can find an existing individual or enter a new one.

2. If you know the individual’s Person Identifier or Ancestral File number (AFN), use this shortcut: a. Click Search by Number. b. Enter the number. c. Click Search. d. Skip the remaining steps. 3. (Optional) If needed, change the name fields on the Search page: • To enter the individual’s first and last names in one field, click Single name field. • To switch back to separate fields for the first and last names, click Multiple name fields. This option is useful if you want to find individuals with more than one last name (such as individuals with Spanish or Portuguese names) or individuals with names recorded in Chinese, Japanese, or Korean characters.

Note: The Exact search options are available only when you select Multiple name fields.

The name fields change to the option that you selected. 4. In the Ancestor’s name field, enter at least part of the name of the deceased individual that you want to find, or enter at least part of the father’s name or mother’s name. 5. (Optional) Enter any additional information that you want to use to make your search more precise. If you enter dates or places, the system displays a drop-down list of the standardized dates or places that match what you are typing. Using standardized dates and places helps clarify the information that you enter. It also helps the system find individuals more accurately. 6. Click Search. The system looks for individuals who match what you entered and displays them on the Search Results page. 7. On the Search Results page, see if the individual is listed. The individuals whose records most closely match your search are listed first. Individuals who match less closely are listed after. 8. Indicate what you want to do next. • If the system found many matching records, click the numbered links. • If the individual is in the list, click his or her name to see details. • If the individual is not on the list and you want to search again, click Refine search. • Or if the individual is not on the list and you want to add him or her to the system, click No Match Found. Add Individual.

Entering a New Individual into Your Family Line

When an individual is missing from your family line, you can add him or her. After you enter the individual’s information, the system searches for other records that might be about the same individual. If it finds any, you can combine them. The process of entering a new individual into the system has several parts, which help you indicate where the individual fits into your family line and help you enter several types of information about him or her. Add as much information as you know. More information helps distinguish this individual from others who have similar names or who lived at the same time or in the same place.

To add more than one individual to the family, such as another child, repeat the entire process for each individual.

Part 1. Indicating Where the Individual Fits into Your Family Line

When you must indicate where a new individual fits into your family line, the system automatically connects him or her to family members who are already in your family line.

A screen appears where you can find an existing individual or enter a new one. 2. Click Add New Individual. A page appears in which you can enter the individual’s information. By default, the system displays either the data entry template that matches the language of your browser or the last template that you used.

Part 2. Entering the Name and Gender

Entering an individual’s name and gender is important for several reasons. • Names identify the individuals in a family line. They appear on pedigrees, family group records, and in the details. • You must also use an individual’s name when you search for individuals. You can also specify gender to help limit the search results. • The system uses names and gender to identify possible duplicates. • Name and gender are required for temple work to be done.

1. (Optional) If you need to select a different template to enter individuals whose names are recorded in Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Thai, Cambodian, Mongolian, or Cyrillic characters or individuals with Spanish or Portuguese last names, follow these steps: a. Click the Template drop-down list. If you cannot see the Template drop-down list, scroll to the bottom of the pop-up screen. It is in the lower right corner. b. Click the template that you want to use. If you enter names in non-Roman characters, use the correct template for the language. Then, if you assign the ancestor’s ordinances to the temple, the system

sends the ordinances to a temple district where the patrons can read and understand the name. After you select a different template, the system displays that template until you select a different one. 2. In the Name field or fields, enter the individual’s full name. To see examples of how to enter names, click the more examples link. Important: You can enter hyphens (-) and apostrophes (’) as required to spell the name correctly. The system allows you to do the ordinances when they contain these symbols. However, do not enter slashes (/), asterisks (*), quotation marks ("), or other symbols in the name. The system does not allow an individual’s ordinances to be done if the name contains symbols. If you enter a name in Chinese, Japanese, or Korean and if you have selected the correct template for that language, the system enters the name in Roman characters for you. The system uses the Roman characters to improve the accuracy of the search and possible duplicates features. You can correct the Roman characters if needed. 3. Click the correct option for the individual’s gender. The gender is preselected if you are entering an individual whose gender is assumed based on his or her relationships to others. For example, Male is preselected when you enter an individual's father.

Data Entry Templates for Names

The data entry templates help you enter names in Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Cyrillic, Latin American, Mongolian, Thai, and Cambodian. • The Standard template provides one field in which you enter both first names and last names. • The Chinese template provides fields in which you can enter the name in both Chinese and Roman characters. It has separate fields for first and last names. • The Japanese template provides fields in which you can enter the name in kanji, kana, and Roman characters. It has separate fields for first and last names. • The Korean template provides fields in which you can enter the name in hangul, hanja, and Roman characters. It has separate fields for first and last names. If you enter the name in hangul, the system automatically enters the name in Roman characters for you. • The Cyrillic template provides fields in which you can enter the name using both the Cyrillic and Roman alphabets. It provides one field in which you can enter both first names and last names. • The Latin template provides separate fields for first names and last names. Tip: If you prefer to enter first and last names in separate fields, select the Latin template. Though it is intended for Spanish and Portuguese names, you can also use it for other languages. This template is especially helpful for last names that have more than one word. • The Mongolian template provides fields in which you can enter the names in Cyrillic and Roman characters. The system identifies the characters as Mongolian so they can be searched and displayed correctly. • The Asian template is intended for Thai and Cambodian names. It contains fields for native and Roman characters.

What to Enter in Name Fields

When you enter names of individuals, you may have questions about issues such as nicknames, initials, titles, and so forth.

Issue Recommendation Name order If you are using a template that provides one field for the full name, enter the name in the order in which you would say it. The system helps you clarify the name parts before it saves the individual. If you are using a template that provides separate fields for different parts of the name, enter each part of the name in the correct field.

Initials If you know the full name, spell out each part of the name rather than use initials. Enter initials if that is all you know. If the individual used initials as a nickname, enter the full name. If you also want to enter the nickname, click the Add more information link to add a field for the nickname.

Last names of chil- Enter the last names of children. The system does not add them dren for you. Capitalization Capitalize the name correctly. The system saves the name exactly as you enter it. You may use all capital letters for last names if you want, but it is not required. Accent marks and Enter accent marks, diacritics, and other special characters as other special charac- needed. You can enter names in Chinese, Japanese, Korean, ters Greek, or any other writing system for which you are capable of typing. Women's names If a woman changed her name after marriage, enter the name that she used before her marriage. To add another name field for her married name, click the Add more information link to add a field for her married name. Titles If an individual has a title (such as those used for nobility, clergy, military ranks, professional affiliations, and scholastic achievements), please enter the information. You can do it in one of two ways: • Enter the title in the Full Name field. The system helps you clarify the parts of the name. • Add a field for a title of nobility to the page, and enter the title in it. To add this field, near the bottom of the Add Indi- vidual page, click the Add more information link.

Individuals who had Click I don’t know the name, which appears beneath the no name or whose Name field. name is unknown If you select this option, you cannot do the individual’s temple ordinances. If you want to do the individual’s ordinances, enter one of the following as the name: • If you do not know a mother’s name, enter Mrs. in the given name field and the huband's last name or family name in the

Issue Recommendation surname field. However, if the maiden name of the woman is known, enter the maiden name in the surname field. Do not enter a given name. Do not enter Miss. She will be uniquely identified by the relationship. • For an individual with an unknown name or a child who died without receiving a name, enter only the father's last name or family name into the surname field. Do not enter a given name. Do not enter Mr., Miss, son, or daughter. Be sure that the gender is correctly entered as male or female.

Individuals who had Enter the individual’s main, legal name. Then add more name more than one name, fields, and enter the other names in them. such as the following: To add another name field to the page, near the bottom of the • Nicknames Add Individual page, click the Add more information link. • Spelling variations • Different names that were recorded in church and other records • Name changes • The same name in different languages • Aliases

Slashes (/) around last You do not need to type slashes around the last name. names Names with hyphens If a name uses a hyphen or apostrophe, enter it as normal, such (-) or apostrophes (’) as Jean-Baptiste Boulanger or Mary O’Neill).

Part 3. Entering Birth, Death, and Relationship Information

Enter an individual’s birth and death information to identify when and where he or she lived. If you are adding an individual’s children or parents, you should also indicate whether the relationship was biological or something else. • Dates, places, and relationships can help distinguish individuals who have the same or similar names. • You can use dates and places to help you more accurately search for individuals. • The system uses dates, places, and relationships to identify possible duplicates. • The system uses dates, places, and relationships, among other information, to determine if an individual has enough information for temple ordinances to be done. • Knowing when and where an individual lived can help you understand what his or her life might have been like. • Knowing when and where an individual lived can also help you find records that may contain more information about him or her.

1. In the birth and death fields, enter as much information as you know. For help entering dates and places, look at the example, which is located beneath the date and place fields. For more information, click the more examples link.

• If you know an exact date, leave the On option selected in the drop-down list that is next to the date field. • If you do not know an exact date, select Before, After, or About from the drop-down list. • If this individual was stillborn (born dead), select Stillborn from the drop-down list. Note: Stillborn children (children who die before birth) do not need temple ordinances. Selecting Stillborn ensures that the system can allow or prevent ordinances as appropriate.

Important: Be sure to add death information if the individual was born less than 110 years ago or married less than 95 years ago. If you do not know an exact date, enter an approximate one. This prevents the system from treating the individual as “living.” Leave the death and burial fields blank unless the individual has died. Any text in these fields causes the system to determine that the individual has died.

2. Begin typing the date or place. A drop-down list of standardized dates and places appears. Using standardized dates and places helps clarify the information that you enter. It also helps the system find individuals with the search feature. Note: A standardized place-name is required for temple ordinances to be done. The standardized place-name must contain at least a country name. Note: You can enter place-names in your native language. However, the database that standardizes place-names is not yet complete. If the system does not have a standardized place-name for the place that you enter, select as specific a standardized place as you can, even if it is only the district, province, or country name. The standards will improve over time.

3. If a drop-down list with standardized dates and places appears, select an option to tell the system which date or place to use: • If you want the system to use only the standardized date or place, click the standard date or place in the drop-down list. The standard replaces what you entered. Tip: You may not need to type an entire place-name. Instead, start typing the place-name. When the correct place-name appears in the drop-down list, click it to add the place-name to the field. This shortcut reduces both the amount of typing that you do and the risk of typing errors. • If you want the system to save both what you enter and also a different standard, enter the date or place that you want. Then press Tab, or click the mouse outside of the field. If the system can identify a standard, it selects it for you. If the system cannot identify a standard, it indicates that a standard was not selected. • If you want the system to use the date or place-name exactly as you entered it and not save a standard, click None Selected. Note: If the system can identify a standardized date, it saves the standardized date, even if you select None Selected.

in. If the drop-down list does not contain the correct place, change the place that you entered to provide more information, such as a county or country name.

4. In the Relationship to father, Relationship to mother, or Relationship to child drop-down lists, select the relationship if it is other than biological. This drop-down list appears when you add a child, add parents, or add a spouse to an individual who has children but no spouse.

Part 4. Adding More Names, Events, and Facts (Optional)

If you know more information about an individual than you can enter on the basic data entry screen, you can add fields for more types of information. You can add the following: • More names. Use additional name fields if an individual used more than one name during his or her life or had a nickname. • More life events, such as christening. • Facts, which are pieces of information about an individual that are not related to a life event. Examples include titles of nobility, occupation, and physical description. You can add dates, places, and descriptive information about facts.

1. Click Add more information. 2. Click the box for each type of information that you want to add. 3. Click Continue. The system provides fields for the types of information that you selected. 4. Enter the information in the fields.

Part 5. Adding Descriptions, Research Notes, and Other Narrative Information (Optional)

Narrative, free-form information is called a “note.” You can add notes to events, facts, gender, individuals, and couples. In the notes, you might enter research findings and other information that does not fit anywhere else.

1. Indicate the type of note that you want to add: • To add notes about the individual in general, click Add note. • To add a note about a particular name, event, fact, or relationship, click the (Notes) icon that is next to the field to which the note pertains. A pop-up page appears in which you can enter the note. 2. Enter the note. You can enter up to 300 characters in a note. 3. Click Done.

The note is saved, and the pop-up page closes.

Part 6. Indicating Where You Obtained the Information (Recommended)

Sources indicate where you obtained information. You enter sources at the same time that you add or correct information about individuals and marriages. You can select the type of source from which you obtained the information. You can also add more detailed information about a source if you want.

1. Click the Where did you get the information? drop-down list, and click the appropriate option. 2. If all of the information on this page came from the same source, leave Use this source for everything on this page checked. If some of the information came from different sources, uncheck this option. 3. (Optional) If you want to add more information about the source, follow these steps: a. Click Source details. b. Enter as much information about the source as you can. The fields that are available on the page change, depending on which option you select in the Where did you get the information? drop-down list. If you select the Personal knowledge option, you can enter information about the individual whose knowledge you are citing and how that information was communicated to you. If you select any other option, you can enter basic information about the source, the place where you found it, and the type of media that it is stored on.

4. When you are finished, click Done.

The source information is saved.

Part 7. Determining Whether Other Records about the Individual Exist (Optional)

The system may have more than one record about the individual that you just entered. These additional records are called “duplicate records.” When you find duplicate records, you should combine them.

1. Click Review Possible Duplicates. 2. Click the box of each record that might be a duplicate, and click Compare in more detail. 3. Compare the record that you entered, which is on the left, to the possible duplicate on the right. Tip: The following tips may help you find the information that you need to decide if the records are duplicates: • Put your mouse cursor on a family member’s name. If the same name is highlighted on both records, then both records are linked to the same record about that family member. • To see the details about any individual listed on the page, click the individual’s name. • In some countries, if a child died young, the next child born of that same gender was often given the same name as the child who died. Carefully compare birth and death information before combining the records of individuals who have the same name and parents.

4. At the bottom of the page, click the appropriate option to indicate whether the records are about the same individual. 5. If there are more duplicate records to review, click Next to see the next possible duplicate. 6. When you finish checking duplicate records, click Done. The system lists the number of records that will be combined. No records have yet been combined. 7. When you are satisfied with your actions, click Combine the Records. The system displays a message indicating whether the records were successfully combined. 8. Click OK. The system looks for more possible duplicates. The list of possible duplicates reappears. 9. If you see more possible duplicates, repeat these steps. Otherwise, click Cancel.

Part 8. Reviewing and Saving the Information

After you enter information about the individual, you can review it. Of particular importance is reviewing the name to see if the system correctly categorized each part of the name.

1. When you are finished entering information about the individual, click Continue. The system shows a summary of the information that you entered. 2. Review the name parts. If a name part was classified incorrectly, click it, and select the correct name part. The system classifies only the last word as a last name. If the last name has more than one word, select Last name for each word in the last name. This helps the system search correctly for the individual by name. It also ensures that last names are marked correctly on family ordinance cards. If a name part is listed as “Other,” evaluate it carefully. The system does not use name parts that are listed as “Other” when it searches. Select a different name part if you can. 3. When the name parts are correct, click The name parts are identified correctly. 4. Review the remaining information. If any of it is incorrect, click the Edit link that is next to it, and make the needed corrections. 5. If the Review Possible Duplicates button appears, click it to review and combine duplicate records about this individual. 6. Click Done.

The information that you entered about the individual is saved.

If you need to add another individual to the family, such as another child, repeat the entire process him or her.

Adding Individuals and Families Who Are Not Connected to Your Family Line

You can add individuals and families who are not connected to your family line.

A common reason for adding individuals who are not connected to your family line is to add people who have a probable family relationship that cannot be verified because the records are inadequate, such as those who have the same last names and resided in the same areas as known ancestors.

Adding Individuals Who Are Not Connected to Your Family Line

You can add an individual who is not connected to your family line.

1. Click the Add Information tab. 2. Click Add an Individual That Is Not Connected to My Family Tree. A page appears in which you can enter the individual’s information. 3. The rest of the process is identical to adding an individual who is connected to your family line. Important: You must add a death date or place when you add an individual who is not connected to your family line. If you do not, the system adds a death date for you. It is listed as “before” today’s date. You cannot enter living people that are not connected to your family line.

The individual is added to the system. The system displays him or her on your default view.

Adding Families Who Are Not Connected to Your Family Line

You can add a family that is not connected to your family line.

1. Click the Add Information tab. 2. Click Add a Family That Is Not Connected to My Family Tree. The Add Family page appears. 3. To add the husband or father, follow these steps: a. Click Add or find the husband. b. Add the individual. The husband is added. 4. To add the wife or mother, click Add or find the wife, and follow the same instructions as for adding the husband. The wife is added. 5. To add the parents’ marriage information, follow these steps: a. Click Add couple information. This link does not appear until you enter information about both the husband and the wife. b. Click the box for each type of information that you want to add. c. Click Continue. The system provides fields for the types of information that you selected. d. Enter the information in the fields. e. Click Done. The parents’ marriage information is added. 6. To add the children, click Add or find child, and follow the same instructions as for adding the husband. Repeat this step to add each of the children in the family. The children are added.

7. If you want to add family notes: a. Click Add couple notes. b. Enter the note. You can enter up to 300 characters in your note. c. Click Done. The note is saved. 8. Review the information that you added about the family. • To correct any of the information, click the Edit link next to that information. • To remove an individual from the family, click the Remove link next to the individual.

9. When the family is as complete and correct as you can make it, click Done.

The family is added to the system. The system displays it on your default view.

Entering Characters from the World’s Languages

If your computer and keyboard are set up to enter the characters that you need, enter them as you normally would. If they are not, then you will have to use the Character Map feature of your operating system. You can add diacritics and special characters such as í, ü, ç, ß, and æ that are used in languages that use the Roman alphabet, such as Spanish, German, Swedish, and other European languages. You can also enter the characters used in Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Greek, Russian, and other languages. Note: These instructions work on a Windows operating system. If you are using a different operating system, please check the instructions that came with your operating system.

1. Click the Windows Start button. 2. Select Programs, then Accessories, then System Tools, and then Character Map. 3. Click the character that you want to add. If you do not see the character, select a different font, such as Andale or Tahoma. 4. Click Select. 5. Click Copy. The character is copied into the Windows clipboard. 6. Place the cursor in the field where the character should go. 7. In your browser, select Edit, and then Paste.

The character is entered into the field.

Chapter 4 Correcting Information That Is Already in the System

The system was designed to both allow information to be corrected and to protect your information from being changed. To ensure that the system contains the most accurate information available, it has been designed to accomplish the following: • Simplify the process of working together on shared family lines. • Allow information to be added, corrected, and deleted. • Protect the information that you contribute from change by others.

Types of Changes That Can Be Made

The system allows many types of changes to be made.

Changes That You Can Make to Information That You Contribute

When you contribute information, only you can make the following types of changes: • Correct and delete the names, dates, places, and facts about individuals that you contributed. • Correct and delete the marriage information for a couple that you contributed. • Edit the notes and sources that you contributed. • Delete individuals. • Remove individuals from families. • Combine an individual’s information with other information about that same individual. If you are the only contributor, the system no longer displays the incorrect information. If other users also contributed the same information, the system displays both your correction and the information from the other contributors. Note: When you do temple ordinances for an ancestor, you might be the only user who contributed all of the individual’s information. But when the ordinances are done, the contributor “FamilySearch” is added as the contributor of the name, gender, event, and relationship information that was used to do the ordinances. You can correct your own contribution but not that of “FamilySearch.” This is done to preserve the information that was used to perform the ordinance.

Other Types of Changes That You Can Make

You cannot change information that someone else contributed. You can, however, do the following tasks, which may affect how information contributed by others looks in the system: • Add different names, events, and facts to the individuals. • Add different marriage information about a couple. • Link the individuals to additional family members. • Combine an individual’s information with other information about that same individual. • Separate information that someone else incorrectly combined with the wrong individual.

When You Can Correct and Delete Information

When you find incorrect information, the way that you make corrections depends on whether you are the only contributor, one of multiple contributors, or not a contributor. The following table explains what you can do. Tip: If you must work with other contributors to make a correction, try contacting the other contributors first. This gives them the opportunity to make the correction, which may prevent the need for a discussion. If you start a discussion first, the other contributors may never see the discussion and may never make the required corrections.

Type of Error You Are the Only You Are One of You Are Not a Contributor the Contributors Contributor An individual’s Correct or delete name, gender, your contribution. 1. Correct or delete 1. If needed, add the events, or facts your contribu- correct information. are incorrect tion. 2. If the information is 2. Select the correct part of the individ- information for ual’s summary, select the summary. the correct informa- 3. Contact contribution for display. tors to see if they 3. Contact contributors can correct their to see if they can contributions. correct their contribu- 4. If incorrect infor- tions. mation remains 4. If incorrect informa- in the system, tion remains in the begin or partici- system, begin or pate in a discus- participate in a sion about the discussion about the issue. issue.

A marriage Correct or delete event is incor- your contribution. 1. Correct or delete 1. Contact contributors rect your contribu- to see if they can tion. correct their contribu- 2. Contact contributions. tors to see if they 2. If incorrect information remains in the

Type of Error You Are the Only You Are One of You Are Not a Contributor the Contributors Contributor can correct their system, begin or contributions. participate in a 3. If incorrect infor- discussion about the mation remains issue. in the system, begin or participate in a discussion about the issue.

Two individuals • If the incorrect 1. Contact contribu- 1. Contact contributors were not spouse was a real spouses tors to get the to see if they can person, remove needed correc- correct their contribu- him or her from tions made. tions. the family. 2. If incorrect infor- 2. If incorrect informa- • If the incorrect mation remains tion remains in the spouse was not a in the system, system, begin or real person, delete begin or partici- participate in a him or her from pate in a discus- discussion about the the system. sion about the issue. issue.

A child was not • If the incorrect 1. Contact contribu- 1. Contact contributors a part of a child was a real family tors to get the to see if they can person, remove needed correc- correct their contribu- him or her from tions made. tions. the family. 2. If incorrect infor- 2. If incorrect informa- • If the incorrect mation remains tion remains in the child was not a in the system, system, begin or real person, delete begin or partici- participate in a him or her from pate in a discus- discussion about the the system. sion about the issue. issue.

A child was not • If you do not the biological 1. Try to change the 1. Contact contributors want the child to relationship type. to see if they can child of one or show with this both parents 2. If you cannot, correct their contribu- family, delete the contact the other tions. relationship contributors to 2. If incorrect informa- between the child see if they can tion remains in the and the nonbio- make the needed system, begin or logical parent. corrections. participate in a • If you want the 3. If incorrect infor- discussion about the child to show mation remains issue. with this family, in the system, change the rela- begin or partici- tionship type to pate in a discus- show the correct sion about the relationship. issue.

Type of Error You Are the Only You Are One of You Are Not a Contributor the Contributors Contributor The individual Delete the individual never existed from the system. 1. Contact contribu- 1. Contact contributors tors to see if they to see if they can can delete their correct their contribu- information tions. about the individ- 2. If incorrect informa- ual. tion remains in the 2. If incorrect infor- system, begin or mation remains participate in a in the system, discussion about the begin or partici- issue. pate in a discussion about the issue.

Tip: To see who contributed child-to-parent relationships, delete relationships, and delete individuals, go to the Spouses and Children or Parents and Siblings section of the details pop-up. • To delete relationships and individuals, click the (Click for options) icon that is next to the name of the individual whose information is incorrect. • To find the contributor of child-to-parent relationships, click View relationship details, then Edit. Currently, you cannot see the contributors of spouse relationships.

Viewing and Removing Disputes

The dispute feature is being removed from the system. As a first phase, you can no longer add a new dispute. You can still see disputes that were previously entered. You can edit the notes of disputes that you added. You can also still remove your own disputes. Eventually, all of the disputes in the system, including their notes, will be moved to the discussion boards. Instead of using disputes, you are encouraged to work with other contributors to correct information: • You can work with a contributor directly. Click a contributor’s name to see if he or she has provided contact information. • You can also identify your concerns on the individual’s discussion board.

1. Find the individual whose information you want to work with. You can use either of these methods: • On the Home page, click the Me and My Ancestors tab. Then navigate to the individual. • Click the Search tab. Then find the individual.

2. Click the button where the dispute is located: • For disputes about the individual’s name, events, and other information, click Details. • For disputes about a marriage event or relationship, click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family has the dispute.

3. To change the note of a dispute that you added, follow these steps: a. Click (Disputed information) of a dispute that you added. b. Click Edit note. c. Make your changes. d. Click Done. e. Click Close. 4. To delete a disputed icon that you added, follow these steps: a. Indicate which (Disputed) icon you want to remove:

Type of Dispute How to Remove the Dispute You indicated that a particular name, gender, event, or 1. If you are not already there, click Details. fact was incorrect. 2. Click the (Disputed) icon that appears next to the information that you marked as incorrect.

You indicated that an individ- When you indicate that an individual does not ual did not exist. exist, the system adds the (Disputed) icon to each piece of information about that individual. To remove all of the (Disputed) icons at once, follow these steps: 1. If you are not already there, click either Spouses and Children or Parents and Siblings, depending on where the individual appears. 2. Click (Click for options). 3. Click Remove my dispute about the individual. 4. To remove the (Disputed) icon from some of the information only, follow the steps for removing a dispute about that particular piece of information.

You indicated that a relationship to a spouse or child was 1. If you are not already there, click Spouses and incorrect. Children. 2. Click the (Disputed) icon that appears on the line connecting the individual with the spouse or child.

You indicated that a relationship to a parent was incorrect. 1. If you are not already there, click Parents and Siblings. 2. Click the (Disputed) icon that appears on the line connecting the individual with the spouse or child.

You indicated that the individual’s marriage information 1. If you are not already there, click Spouses and was incorrect. Children. 2. Click the (Disputed) icon that appears next to the marriage information.

Type of Dispute How to Remove the Dispute You indicated that marriage information about the individ- 1. If you are not already there, click Parents and ual’s parents was incorrect. Siblings. 2. Click the (Disputed) icon that appears next to the marriage information.

b. Review the details about the dispute. If you are removing a (Disputed) icon that indicated an individual never existed, you cannot see the details about the dispute. Instead, the system asks if you want to remove your dispute and the associated notes. Click Yes, and skip the remaining steps. c. Click Remove my dispute. The system asks you to confirm that you want to remove your dispute. d. Click Yes. e. Click Close.

What Disputed Information Looks Like

When information has been disputed, the system displays the “Disputed information” icon ( ), which is a circle with a line through it. When you display information that you disputed, the information is shown with both the disputed icon and strike-out. When you display information that someone else disputed, you see only the disputed icon.

What You Can Do When a Record Contains a Dispute

When a record contains a dispute, you can make some types of changes and not others.

What You Can Do

When a record contains a dispute, you can do the following: • Add new opinions, notes, and sources about the information. • Contact contributors. • Combine records. • Separate records. • Start a discussion about the information. • Reserve the individual’s ordinances, print a Family Ordinance Request, do the ordinances, assign the ordinances to the temple, and do other temple-related tasks.

What You Cannot Do

When a record contains a dispute, you cannot do the following: • Delete the disputed information from the system. You can delete information without disputes. • Remove the individual from a family if the relationship is disputed.

• Change relationship types between parents and children if the relationships are disputed.

Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Information about Individuals

If the system does not display the correct information about an individual, you should first see if the record contains the correct information. If it does, you can simply select it for display. If information is missing, you can add it. You can also correct or delete information that you contribute. You can also enrich an individual’s information with notes and sources, whether you contributed that information or not. If your information, notes, and sources are about a deceased individual, your changes are available immediately for others to see.

2. To see if the record already contains the correct information, follow these steps: a. Click Summary.

b. Click the triangle ( ) that is to the right of the information that you want to change. c. From the information listed, click the information you want displayed. 3. If you need to change what you contributed in the past, delete what you contributed in the past, or add a new version of the information, follow these steps: a. Click Details.

b. Make the needed correction: • To delete or change what you contributed in the past, click the Edit link that is next to the information. Then follow the instructions on the screen. • To add new information, click Add information. Then follow the instructions on the screen.

Selecting the Correct Version of an Individual’s Name and Other Information

An individual’s record often contains multiple versions of his or her name, gender, birth, christening, death, and burial information. On many screens, however, the system has enough space to display one version only. When a record already contains the correct information, you can choose the version the system uses for display. This one version of an individual’s name, gender, birth, christening, death, and burial information is called the individual’s “summary.” The system uses the information that is selected on the individual’s summary to determine whether the individual’s temple ordinances can be done. If, for example, the name that is selected on the summary contains parentheses or quotation marks, the temple status is “Needs more information.” You can often change the temple status to “Ready” by adding or selecting different information on the summary. When you select information for the summary, the system also displays your contact name and information. Your contact information lets other users know that you are actively working on this individual. Tip: If the summary already displays the correct information, you can select the wrong information and then change it back to the correct information. Doing this adds your contact name and information to the summary. Having your contact name on the summary is the most visible way to indicate that you are actively interested in and working on an individual’s record.

1. On a view screen, click the individual whose summary you want to change.

4. Click the arrow to the right of the information that you want to change. All versions of the information appear. 5. From the information listed, click the information you want displayed.

All users of the system see the same summary. If you choose summary information, all users see it. If another user changes the summary information, you see that summary instead.

Adding a New Name, Event, or Fact to an Individual

You can add a new name, event, or fact about an individual who is already in the system. You can also add notes and sources about that information. When you enter information about an individual, leave the death and burial fields blank unless the individual has died. Any text in these fields causes the system to determine that the individual has died.

1. On a view screen, click the individual whose name, event, or fact you want to add. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel.

• If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Details. 4. Click Add information. A page appears listing the different types of events and facts that you can add. 5. Click the check box for each type of information that you want to add. 6. Click Continue. The system provides fields for the types of information that you selected. 7. Enter the information in each field. If you enter a date or place, the system displays a drop-down list containing the standardized dates or places that match what you are typing. Using standardized dates and places helps clarify the information that you enter. It also helps the system find individuals with the search feature. Note: A standardized place is required for temple ordinances to be done. The standardized place must contain at least a country name.

8. If a drop-down list with standardized dates and places appears, select an option to tell the system which date or place to use: • If you want the system to use only the standardized date or place, click the standard date or place in the drop-down list. The standard replaces what you entered. Tip: You may not need to type an entire place-name. Instead, start typing the place-name. When the correct place-name appears in the drop-down list, click it to add the place-name to the field. This shortcut reduces both the amount of typing that you do and the risk of typing errors. • If you want the system to save both what you enter and also a different standard, enter the date or place that you want. Then press Tab, or click the mouse outside of the field. If the system can identify a standard, it selects it for you. If the system cannot identify a standard, it indicates that a standard was not selected. • If you want the system to use the date or place-name exactly as you entered it and not save a standard, click None Selected. Note: If the system can identify a standardized date, it saves the standardized date, even if you select None Selected.

9. (Optional) Add narrative information, such as research notes or descriptions: a. Click the (Notes) icon that is next to the field for which you want to enter the note. b. Enter the note. You can enter up to 300 characters in your note. c. Click Done. The note is saved, and the pop-up page closes.

10. (Optional) Indicate where you found the information: a. Click the Where did you get the information? drop-down list, and click the appropriate option. b. If all of the information on this page came from the same source, leave Use this source for everything on this page checked. If it came from different sources, uncheck this option. c. (Optional) If you want to add more detailed information about your source, click Source details. d. (Optional) Enter as much information about the source as you can. The fields that are available on the page change, depending on which option you select in the Where did you get the information? drop-down list. If you select the Memory of someone option, you can enter information about the individual whose knowledge you are citing and how that information was communicated to you. If you select any other option, you can enter basic information about the source, the place where you found it, and the type of media that it is stored on. e. Click Done. The source information is saved. 11. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Your information is saved and displayed in the system. If the information is about a deceased person, all users can see the change. If the information is about a living person, only you can see the change. If you added a type of name, event, or fact that does not appear on the view screen, you cannot see it on that view. However, it was saved. To see it, click the individual’s name, and then click Details.

Correcting an Individual’s Name, Gender, Events, and Facts

If you contributed a name, gender, event, or fact about an individual, you can correct it. If you did not contribute the original information but have what you feel is more correct information, you can add a new opinion. You can also add notes and sources to information that is already in the system. As you correct information, keep the following in mind: • The system keeps all of the opinions. You need to work with other contributors to remove incorrect information that you did not contribute. You can also begin a new discussion to encourage corrections. • If an individual is linked to someone else as a father, mother, or spouse, you can change his or her gender to “Unknown.” You cannot change it to the opposite gender. This is also true if the individual’s temple ordinances have been done. • Leave the death and burial fields blank, unless the individual has died. Any text in these fields causes the system to determine that the individual has died.

1. On a view screen, click the individual whose information you want to correct. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel.

• If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Details. 4. Click the Edit link next to the information that you want to edit. Or click the information itself, and then click Edit. If you did not contribute this information, the system explains that you cannot edit it. Continue with the next step. If you did contribute this information, skip the next step. 5. Click Add Another Opinion. A pop-up screen appears with the information to be corrected. 6. If you want to change the information, delete the information that is currently in the fields. Then enter the correct information. As you enter dates and places, the system displays a drop-down list that contains the standardized dates or places that match what you are typing. Using standardized dates and places helps clarify the information that you enter. It also helps the system find individuals with the search feature. 7. If a drop-down list with standardized dates and places appears, select an option to tell the system which date or place to use: • If you want the system to use only the standardized date or place, click the standard date or place in the drop-down list. The standard replaces what you entered. Tip: You may not need to type an entire place-name. Instead, start typing the place-name. When the correct place-name appears in the drop-down list, click it to add the place-name to the field. This shortcut reduces both the amount of typing that you do and the risk of typing errors. • If you want the system to save both what you enter and also a different standard, enter the date or place that you want. Then press Tab, or click the mouse outside of the field. If the system can identify a standard, it selects it for you. If the system cannot identify a standard, it indicates that a standard was not selected. • If you want the system to use the date or place-name exactly as you entered it and not save a standard, click None Selected. Note: If the system can identify a standardized date, it saves the standardized date, even if you select None Selected.

8. (Optional) Add narrative information, such as research notes or a description, about the name, gender, event, or fact: a. To enter a new note, click Add a note. If you want to edit a note that you contributed previously, click the Edit note link near the note you want to change. b. Enter the note. You can enter up to 300 characters in a note. If you contributed this note in a GEDCOM file, then it might be longer than 300 characters. You can still edit it without losing the extra characters.

c. Click Done. The note is saved, and the pop-up page closes. 9. (Optional) Indicate where you found the information: a. Click the Where did you get the information? drop-down list, and click the appropriate option. b. If all of the information on this page came from the same source, leave Use this source for everything on this page checked. If it came from different sources, uncheck this option. c. (Optional) If you want to add more detailed information about your source, click Source details. d. (Optional) Enter as much information about the source as you can. The fields that are available on the page change, depending on which option you select in the Where did you get the information? drop-down list. If you select the Memory of someone option, you can enter information about the individual whose knowledge you are citing and how that information was communicated to you. If you select any other option, you can enter basic information about the source, the place where you found it, and the type of media that it is stored on. e. Click Done. The source information is saved. 10. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Your information is saved and displayed in the system. If the information is about a deceased person, all system users can see the change. If the information is about a living person, only you can see the change. If you edited a type of name, event, or fact that does not appear on the view screen, you cannot see it on that view. However, it was saved. To see it, click the individual’s name, and then click Details.

Requesting a Correction to an Individual’s Gender Information

If an individual is linked to someone else as a father, mother, or spouse, you can change his or her gender to “Unknown.” You cannot change it to the opposite gender. This is also true if the individual’s temple ordinances have been done. If you can provide proof that the gender is incorrect, then you can work with a system administrator to determine whether the gender can be corrected.

1. Remove your own disputes about the gender. Disputes can prevent corrections from being made. 2. Contact FamilySearch Support (https://contact.familysearch.org), and request that a system administrator change it for you. Provide the following information in your request: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • Proof of what the gender should be. This may be a document such as a birth certificate, a marriage license, a census record, your personal knowledge, or the

knowledge of a close family member who knew the individual. It could also be proof that the system contains a duplicate person who is clearly the same individual but with the correct gender.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

Deleting an Individual’s Name, Gender, Events, and Facts

If you are the only contributor, you can delete an individual’s name, gender, events, and facts. If you are not the only contributor, the information remains in the system. But you are no longer listed as one of its contributors. If all of the other contributors also delete the information, the system then deletes it. Tip: If you are not the only contributor of information that needs to be deleted, try using the discussion feature to describe your concerns.

1. On a view screen, click the individual whose information you want to delete. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Details. 4. Click the Edit link next to the information that you want to delete. You can also click the information itself. The details about the name, event, or fact appear. If you are a contributor of this information, the Delete link also shows. 5. Click Delete. The system asks why you think the information is incorrect. 6. (Optional) Enter a note that explains your reasons. Be as complete as possible, even when you delete information. You can enter up to 300 characters in your note. 7. Click Delete, which is located beneath the box where you enter the notes. You see this option if you are the only contributor of this information. If you are not the only contributor, skip this step.

8. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Notes and Sources about Individuals

You can correct and delete notes that you contributed. You can also add new notes. Individuals can have two types of notes: • Notes that are attached to a specific name, gender, event, or fact. For example, a note attached to a name might show how the name is spelled differently on different records, why the parents chose the name, or similar information. • “Individual notes,” which are attached to the individual as a whole.

1. On a view screen, click the individual whose notes and sources you want to work with. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Summary or Details. 4. Click the appropriate link: • To add, correct, or delete notes, click Individual notes. • To add, correct, or delete sources, click Individual sources. A pop-up listing the individual’s notes or sources appears. 5. Click the link that lets you add or edit the type of note or source that you want. To delete a note that you added, click the link that lets you edit the note. Then delete the contents of the note, and save the empty note. A pop-up screen appears in which you can add or edit your note or source. 6. Enter the information. You can enter up to 300 characters in a note. If you contributed this note in a GEDCOM file, then it might be longer than 300 characters. You can still edit it without losing the extra characters. 7. Click Done. The information is saved, and the pop-up screen closes. 8. When you are finished, click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Marriage Events (Including Divorces)

You can correct the marriage events that you contributed. You can also add missing marriage events. To indicate that a couple divorced, you add a “Divorce” marriage event. You can also add, correct, and delete sources and notes about the marriage events.

If your information is about a deceased couple, your changes are available immediately for others to see. Note: Currently, you cannot select the correct marriage event for a couple if the system contains multiple opinions about the couple’s marriage date and place. Tip: If you are not the only contributor of information that needs to be deleted, try using the discussion feature to describe your concerns.

Adding a New Marriage Event, Including Divorce Information

You can add a marriage event to a couple who is already in the system. To indicate that a couple divorced, you add a marriage event that is called “Divorce” to the couple’s information. You can also add notes and sources to marriage events. The following marriage events are available: • Marriage • Annulment • Divorce • Divorce filing • Engagement • Marriage banns • Marriage contract • Marriage license • Other (event not listed)

1. On a view screen, click one of the individuals in the couple for whom you want to add a new marriage event. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family has the information you want to work with. 4. If the correct spouse or parent is not showing on the chart, click the name of the spouse or parents that you want to see. The names are listed under “Other Spouses” or “Other Parents.” The spouse or parent you click is shown in the main part of the details. 5. Click Add a marriage event. If several marriage dates or places are already listed, scroll to the bottom of the list to see the Add a marriage event link. Tip: If the couple does not yet have a marriage date or place listed, you click Add. A page comes up in which you can enter the marriage date and place. Skip to the step where you enter the information. If you want to add more marriage events, click Add more couple information, and continue with the next step. A page appears listing the different types of marriage events that you can add.

6. Click the check box for each type of information that you want to add. 7. Click Continue. The system provides fields for the types of information that you selected. 8. Enter the information in each field. If you enter a date or place, the system displays a drop-down list containing the standardized dates or places that match what you are typing. Using standardized dates and places helps clarify the information that you enter. It also helps the system find individuals with the search feature. Note: A standardized place is required for temple ordinances to be done. The standardized place must contain at least a country name.

9. If a drop-down list with standardized dates and places appears, select an option to tell the system which date or place to use: • If you want the system to use only the standardized date or place, click the standard date or place in the drop-down list. The standard replaces what you entered. Tip: You may not need to type an entire place-name. Instead, start typing the place-name. When the correct place-name appears in the drop-down list, click it to add the place-name to the field. This shortcut reduces both the amount of typing that you do and the risk of typing errors. • If you want the system to save both what you enter and also a different standard, enter the date or place that you want. Then press Tab, or click the mouse outside of the field. If the system can identify a standard, it selects it for you. If the system cannot identify a standard, it indicates that a standard was not selected. • If you want the system to use the date or place-name exactly as you entered it and not save a standard, click None Selected. Note: If the system can identify a standardized date, it saves the standardized date, even if you select None Selected.

10. (Optional) Add narrative information, such as a brief description or research notes: a. Click the (Notes) icon that is next to the field for which you want to enter the note. b. Enter the note. You can enter up to 300 characters in your note. c. Click Done. The note is saved, and the pop-up page closes. 11. (Optional) Indicate where you found the information: a. Click the Where did you get the information? drop-down list, and click the appropriate option. b. If all of the information on this page came from the same source, leave Use this source for everything on this page checked. If it came from different sources, uncheck this option.

c. (Optional) If you want to add more detailed information about your source, click Source details. d. (Optional) Enter as much information about the source as you can. The fields that are available on the page change, depending on which option you select in the Where did you get the information? drop-down list. If you select the Memory of someone option, you can enter information about the individual whose knowledge you are citing and how that information was communicated to you. If you select any other option, you can enter basic information about the source, the place where you found it, and the type of media that it is stored on. e. Click Done. The source information is saved. 12. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Your information is saved and displayed in the system. If the information is about a deceased couple, all system users can see the change. If the information is about a couple in which at least one individual is still living, only you can see the change.

Correcting a Marriage Event

You can correct the marriage events, notes, and sources that you contributed. You can add new notes and sources to any marriage event, even if you did not contribute it. If you did not contribute the information but have what you feel is more correct information, you can add a new opinion. The system keeps all of the opinions. You need to work with other contributors to remove incorrect information that you did not contribute.

1. On a view screen, click one of the individuals from the couple whose marriage event you want to correct. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family has the information you want to work with. 4. If the correct spouse or parent is not showing on the chart, click the name of the spouse or parents that you want to see. The names are listed under “Other Spouses” or “Other Parents.” The spouse or parent you click is shown in the main part of the details. 5. Find the marriage information that you want to edit. Tip: You may need to scroll down through several marriage events.

6. Click the Edit link next to the information that you want to edit. Or click the information itself, and then click Edit.

If you did not contribute this information, the system explains that you cannot edit it. Continue with the next step. If you did contribute this information, skip the next step. 7. Click Add Another Opinion. A pop-up screen appears with the information to be corrected. 8. If you want to change the information, delete the information that is currently in the fields. Then enter the correct information. As you enter dates and places, the system displays a drop-down list that contains the standardized dates or places that match what you are typing. Using standardized dates and places helps clarify the information that you enter. It also helps the system find individuals with the search feature. 9. Begin typing the date or place. A drop-down list of standardized dates and places appears. Using standardized dates and places helps clarify the information that you enter. It also helps the system find individuals with the search feature. Note: A standardized place-name is required for temple ordinances to be done. The standardized place-name must contain at least a country name. Note: You can enter place-names in your native language. However, the database that standardizes place-names is not yet complete. If the system does not have a standardized place-name for the place that you enter, select as specific a standardized place as you can, even if it is only the district, province, or country name. The standards will improve over time.

10. (Optional) Add narrative information, such as a brief description or research notes, about the marriage event: a. To enter a new note, click Add a note. If you want to edit a note that you contributed previously, click the Edit note link near the note you want to change. b. Enter the note. You can enter up to 300 characters in a note. If you contributed this note in a GEDCOM file, then it might be longer than 300 characters. You can still edit it without losing the extra characters. c. Click Done. The note is saved, and the pop-up page closes. 11. (Optional) Indicate where you found the information: a. Click the Where did you get the information? drop-down list, and click the appropriate option. b. If all of the information on this page came from the same source, leave Use this source for everything on this page checked. If it came from different sources, uncheck this option. c. (Optional) If you want to add more detailed information about your source, click Source details. d. (Optional) Enter as much information about the source as you can. The fields that are available on the page change, depending on which option you select in the Where did you get the information? drop-down list. If you select the Memory of someone option, you can enter information about the individual whose knowledge you are citing and how that information was communicated to you. If you select any other option, you can enter basic information about the source, the place where you found it, and the type of media that it is stored on. e. Click Done. The source information is saved.

12. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Deleting a Marriage Event

If you are the only contributor, you can delete a couple’s marriage events. If you are not the only contributor, the marriage event remains in the system. But you are no longer listed as one of its contributors. If all of the other contributors also delete the marriage event, the system then deletes it. Tip: If you are not the only contributor of information that needs to be deleted, try using the discussion feature to describe your concerns.

1. On a view screen, click one of the individuals in the couple whose marriage event you want to delete. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click the appropriate button to display the information that you want to delete: • To delete events about the individual’s marriage, click Spouses and Children. • To delete information about the marriage of the individual’s parents, click Parents and Siblings.

4. Click the Edit link next to the information that you want to delete. You can also click the information itself. The details about the name, event, or fact appear. 5. If you are the only contributor of this information, click Delete. The system asks why you think the information is incorrect. 6. (Optional) Enter a note that explains your reasons. Be as complete as possible, even when you delete information. You can enter up to 300 characters in your note. 7. Click Delete, which is located beneath the box where you enter the notes. You see this option if you are the only contributor of this information. If you are not the only contributor, skip this step. 8. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

If you deleted the event and you were its only contributor, the system deletes it.

Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Notes about Marriage Events and Families

You can correct and delete notes that you contributed. Families can have two types of notes: • Notes that are attached to a marriage event. • “Family notes,” which are attached to the family as a whole.

1. On a view screen, click one of the individuals in the couple whose notes you want to work with. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family has the information you want to work with. 4. If the correct spouse or parent is not showing on the chart, click the name of the spouse or parents that you want to see. The names are listed under “Other Spouses” or “Other Parents.” The spouse or parent you click is shown in the main part of the details. 5. Click View or add family notes. A screen showing all of the notes about this couple appears. 6. Indicate whether you want to add a new note or edit a note that you entered previously: • To add a new note about the family or couple, click Add a note about this couple link. • To edit a note that you previously contributed about this family or couple, click the Edit note link near the note you want to change. Note: To delete a note that you added, click the link that lets you edit the note. Then delete the contents of the note, and save the empty note. • To add a note to a marriage event that is already in the system, click the Add a note... link that appears beneath the contributors of and notes about that information.

7. Enter the information. You can enter up to 300 characters in a note. If you contributed this note in a GEDCOM file, then it might be longer than 300 characters. You can still edit it without losing the extra characters. 8. Click Done. The information is saved, and the pop-up screen closes. 9. When you are finished, click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Sources about Marriage Events

You can add a new source about a marriage event that is already in the system. You can add the source whether you entered the event or not. You cannot delete a source about a marriage event. If you need to do this, you have to delete the event itself and add it again without the source.

1. On a view screen, click one of the individuals in the couple whose sources you want to work with. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family has the information you want to work with. 4. If the correct spouse or parent is not showing on the chart, click the name of the spouse or parents that you want to see. The names are listed under “Other Spouses” or “Other Parents.” The spouse or parent you click is shown in the main part of the details. 5. Find the marriage event to which the source applies. Tip: You may need to scroll down through several marriage events.

6. Click the Edit link next to the information that you want to edit. Or click the information itself, and then click Edit. If you did not contribute this information, the system explains that you cannot edit it. Continue with the next step. If you did contribute this information, skip the next step. 7. Click the correct option: • To add a new source, click Add a source. • To correct an existing source, click the Edit source link that appears beneath the source.

8. Enter the source information. 9. Click Done. The information is saved, and the pop-up screen closes. 10. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Correcting Family Relationships and Deleting Individuals

If the system displays family relationships incorrectly, you can correct or delete the relationship if you are its only contributor.

If you are not the only contributor, try these strategies: • Start a discussion about the incorrect relationships. • Work with the other contributors of the relationship to correct it. • If a child is incorrectly shown as a biological child, change the relationship type between the child and parent. For example, in step families you may see the children listed incorrectly as having biological relationships to both parents. To clarify the relationship, you could change the relationship type between the child and step-parent to step. If you cannot change the relationship type, you should begin a discussion to clarify it. • If the wrong people appear in a family because records were incorrectly combined, you can sometimes make the correction by separating the incorrect records. The family members linked to the removed record are also removed from the family. • A system administrator might be able to correct relationships that you did not contribute. Administrators might also be able to correct any relationships that were created as the result of a sealing to an incorrect spouse, parent, or child. Tip: Rather than trying to determine whether you are the only contributor of a relationship, it may be easiest to simply try to delete or correct the relationship. If the system does not let you delete or correct the relationship, try one of the above strategies.

Correcting Relationships That You Did Not Contribute

Often you cannot correct relationships in the system because you are not the only contributor of the information. If you cannot make the correction yourself and if you cannot work with the other contributors to correct it, a system administrator might be able to correct relationship information for you. System administrators can sometimes make the following corrections for you: • Remove an incorrect spouse, parent, or child from a family. • Delete an individual who never existed. • Change the relationship type (biological, adopted, step-, and so forth) between a parent or child. • Remove an incorrect relationship that resulted from someone being sealed to the wrong spouse or parents.

1. Remove your own disputes about the relationship. Disputes can prevent corrections from being made. 2. Try making the correction yourself. Tip: Sometimes you can remove the incorrect relationship by separating the record that contains that relationship.

3. If you cannot make the correction yourself because others have also contributed information, try working with those contributors. 4. If you cannot make the correction yourself or by working with others, contact FamilySearch Support (https://contact.familysearch.org), and request that a system administrator change it for you. Provide the following information in your request: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to).

• The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • Documentation that proves your correction. For example: - Your personal knowledge, or the knowledge of a close family member who knew the individual. - Census records that show the family over time. - A birth certificate that shows a child with the correct parents. - A death certificate that shows a woman’s name at her death. (This may indicate that she did not marry again.) - Any other record that shows the correct relationships between family members.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

Deleting Individuals from Families

You can delete individuals from families if you are the only contributor of that relationship. If the individual never existed, you can delete him or her. If the individual existed but has an incorrect relationship, you can delete the relationship. If you delete an individual, the individual is removed from the system. If you delete a relationship, the individual remains in the system but is removed from the family. Tip: If you want to remove an individual from a family and add him or her to a different family, write down the individual’s Person Identifier. Then you can use this number to add the individual to the correct family.

1. On a view screen, click an individual in the family from which you want to remove a family member. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family has the information you want to work with. 4. If the correct spouse or parent is not showing on the chart, click the name of the spouse or parents that you want to see. The names are listed under “Other Spouses” or “Other Parents.”

The spouse or parent you click is shown in the main part of the details. 5. Click the (Click for options) icon that is next to the name of the individual that is incorrectly linked to the wrong family member. A menu of options appears. 6. Select the menu option that best describes what you would like to do. Situation Instructions The individual never existed. 1. Click Delete individual. 2. When the system asks you to confirm that you want to delete the information, click Delete. 3. When the system shows you the relationships that will be affected and asks if you are sure, click Yes.

The individual existed but was never married to the 1. Click Delete relationship to spouse. spouse shown on the screen. 2. When the system asks you to confirm that you want to delete the information, click Delete.

The individual existed but was never related to one of 1. Click Delete relationship to father or the parents shown on the Delete relationship to mother. screen. 2. When the system asks you to confirm that you want to delete the information, click Delete.

Changing the Relationship Type between a Child and Parent

The “relationship type” specifies how a child and parent are related. By default, the system uses “Biological” as the relationship type. To change a relationship type, you must have contributed the relationship itself. For example, if you added a child to a family, you can edit the relationship type of that child to the father and mother. If you cannot change an incorrect relationship type, you can do one or more of the following: • Start a discussion about the correct relationship type. • Contact the contributor of the relationship to see if he or she can change the relationship type. To see who contributed the relationship, follow steps 1–5 below. • Add a note to the individual to explain the correct relationship type. • Work with a system administrator to see if the relationship type can be corrected. Note: A common reason that you may not be able to change a relationship type is when the relationship information comes from Church membership records. Membership records do not indicate how parents and children are related. The system shows these relationships as “Biological.”

1. On a view screen, click the individual who is in the relationship that you want to change. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree.

• If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family has the information you want to work with. 4. Click View relationship details. 5. Click the Edit link next to the relationship type that you want to correct. You can also click the relationship type, and then click the Edit link. 6. Click the Relationship drop-down list, and click the correct relationship type. This drop-down list appears only if you contributed the child-to-parent relationship. If you did not contribute this relationship, you cannot change the relationship type. Neither can you add another opinion, as you can do with other types of information. 7. (Optional) Add narrative information, such as a brief description or research notes, about the relationship type: a. If you want to add notes about the individual in general, click Add note. If you want to add a note about a particular name, event, fact, or relationship, click the (Notes) icon that is next to the name, event, fact, or relationship. b. Enter the note. You can enter up to 300 characters in a note. If you contributed this note in a GEDCOM file, then it might be longer than 300 characters. You can still edit it without losing the extra characters.

8. (Optional) Indicate where you found the information: a. Click Add a source. b. Click the Source Type drop-down list, and click the option that best describes where you obtained the information. c. (Optional) Enter as much information about the source as you can. The fields that are available on the page change, depending on which option you select in the Where did you get the information? drop-down list. If you select the Memory of someone option, you can enter information about the individual whose knowledge you are citing and how that information was communicated to you. If you select any other option, you can enter basic information about the source, the place where you found it, and the type of media that it is stored on. d. Click Done. The source information is saved. The source is added to the relationship type. 9. Click Done. The pop-up screen closes.

Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Notes and Sources about Relationships

You can add notes and sources to relationships that you added to the system. If you did not contribute the relationship, you cannot add a note or source to it. Instead, you might want to add a note to the family. You cannot delete a source about a relationship. If you need to do this, you have to delete the relationship itself and add it again without the source.

You cannot correct or delete a note that someone else entered. If you find a note from someone else with content that should not be in the system, please try to contact the note’s contributor first. If the contact information is not available or you still have concerns, please contact FamilySearch Support (https://contact.familysearch.org). In your message, please provide the following information: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five characters of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual who has the note. • A description of where the note is located (such as the birth event). • A brief summary of your concerns. • The contact name of the contributor.

1. On a view screen, click the individual who is in the relationship. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family has the information you want to work with. 4. Click View relationship details. If you contributed this relationship, you see Edit links next to each relationship type. If you did not contribute this relationship, you cannot change the relationship type. Neither can you add another opinion, as you can do with other types of information. 5. Click the Edit link next to the relationship to which you want to add a note or source. You can also click the relationship type. The screen on which you can select a new relationship type appears. This screen also lets you add notes and sources. 6. Click the link that lets you add or edit the notes or sources. To delete a note that you added, click the link that lets you edit the note. Then delete the contents of the note, and save the empty note. A pop-up listing the notes and sources about the relationship appears. 7. Enter the information. You can enter up to 300 characters in a note. If you contributed this note in a GEDCOM file, then it might be longer than 300 characters. You can still edit it without losing the extra characters. 8. Click Done. The information is saved, and the pop-up screen closes. 9. When you are finished, click Done. The pop-up screen closes. 10. Click Close.

Correcting Looping Pedigrees

A looping pedigree is a pedigree in which individuals are incorrectly linked back to themselves in future or previous generations. For example, an individual may be mistakenly combined with a father or grandfather of the same name. How you identify a looping pedigree depends on which view screen you are using: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, an individual is shown as his or her own father, mother, child, grandparent, or grandchild. • The Family Tree view does not display looping pedigrees. Instead, you see an arrow that lets you display the next generation. When you click that arrow, the next generation does not appear. This means the individual is already shown on the pedigree. The same individual might be on the pedigree for two reasons: - The family line contains a looping pedigree. - Two or more of your lines have the same ancestors. This happens, for example, when cousins marry.

1. If you are not already on the Family Pedigree with Details view, switch to that view. Tip: Because the Family Tree view does not display looping pedigrees, it is easiest to use the Family Pedigree with Details when you suspect a family line contains a looping pedigree. If you want to stay on the Family Tree view, print the pedigree. Although the Family Tree view does not display a looping pedigree, it does print one. You can then examine the printout to determine whether the family line contains a looping pedigree or whether two or more of your lines are interrelated.

2. Check to see if the looping pedigree was caused by individuals whose records were incorrectly combined: a. Click the individual who seems to be the cause of the looping pedigree. b. Click the Summary button. c. Click the Combined records link. d. Look at the combined records to see if you can find the problem individual or individuals. If you can, separate the records that are about the wrong individual. The dates or relationships to parents or spouse can often help you determine which record has created the loop. The looping pedigree should be fixed. 3. If the individual's record contains no combined records, then try one of the following: • If you are the only contributor of the record, delete the problem individual. You can then enter the individual again by hand. • If another user is the only contributor, contact the contributor to see if he or she can delete the problem individual.

4. If you cannot solve the problem any other way, contact FamilySearch Support (https://contact.familysearch.org). In your message, please provide the following information: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The names and Person Identifiers of the individuals involved in the looping pedigree.

• A description of the problem. • A scanned copy of the correct pedigree charts.

You can also mail the pedigree charts to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0005

If you mail the document, please include the case number so that we know which request the document belongs to.

Be aware that looping pedigrees can be complex, and it may take a long time for the problem to be solved.

How Looping Pedigrees Get into the System

Looping pedigrees get into the system in several ways. • Incorrect records were merged in Ancestral File. These records then became part of the website. This is the most common reason for looping pedigrees. • In the website itself, a user combines the records of an individual with a father, son, grandparent, or other individual. • A user imports a GEDCOM file that contains a looping pedigree.

Correcting Information Contributed by LDS Church Membership Records

The system contains information from the membership records of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. The contributor of this information shows as “LDS Church Membership Records.” If information from Church membership records is incorrect, then the individual’s Church membership record is incorrect. You cannot correct this information yourself. You can add another opinion about the information, but the incorrect information will stay in the system. If you want the incorrect information to be removed and the correct information added, you request a correction to Church membership records. How you make that request depends on if the individual is living or deceased.

Correcting Church Membership Records of Living Individuals

If the system contains incorrect information about living individuals that is from Church membership records, ward and branch clerks must correct the Church membership record itself.

• If you find incorrect information about you or immediate family members who live in your ward or branch, have your own ward or branch clerk correct the membership records.

Important: Please do not request changes to membership records of living people online through the new FamilySearch website. If your clerk is having trouble correcting your record, Church offers a Customer Service line for clerks. • If you find incorrect information about family members who do not live in your ward or branch, coordinate the corrections with the individuals themselves. They need to work with their own clerks to correct the membership records.

When the clerk corrects Church membership records, those corrections are added automatically to the new FamilySearch website.

Requesting a Correction to Church Membership Records of Deceased Individuals

Some of the information in the system comes from membership records of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. If this information is incorrect and if the individual is deceased, you can request a correction if the individual is deceased. You can request that changes be made to Church membership records under the following circumstances: • The individual is deceased, is one of your ancestors, and has “LDS Church Membership Records” listed as the contributor of the death information. • The individual is deceased, but the death was never recorded on his or her Church membership record. In this case, you can ask that the death date be added. You can also correct the name, relationships, and other dates or events. Note: You will be asked to provide a source. Please be prepared to provide one. • The individual has more than one Church membership record. • If you are calling FamilySearch Support or are sending an e-mail without going through the following process, please include the following information: - Your full name and birth date. - Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). - The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. - A description of the problem. - Proof of the correct information. This may be a document such as a birth certificate, a marriage license, a census record, your personal knowledge, or the knowledge of a close family member who knew the individual.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

2. Click the individual whose Church membership record you want to change. 3. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 4. Click Details.

5. In the list of contributors, click the contributor for the incorrect piece of information that came from LDS Church membership records. • If the information came only from the membership records, click LDS Church Membership Records. • If the information came from many contributors, click Multiple, which appears in the list of contributors.

6. Next to the contributor “LDS Church Membership Records,” click To request a correction, click here. A screen on which you can request the correction appears.

7. In the first section of the screen, select your relationship to the individual. 8. In the third section, select the option that best describes the type of correction to be made. Options appear on the page where you can enter the correction. 9. Enter the correction. Please include a source. 10. Click Done. 11. Repeat this process for each correction that needs to be made.

Your request to make a correction is sent to system administrators. They review it and make the needed changes to the membership record. When changes are made, you will see the correction in the new FamilySearch website.

Correcting Information That Was Contributed by “FamilySearch” or “Data Administrator”

When temple ordinances are done, the system adds the contributor “FamilySearch” to the information that it used to determine whether the ordinances could be done. You cannot correct information if the contributor is listed as “FamilySearch” or “Data Administrator.” If you originally contributed this information, you are also listed as a contributor, and you can correct it. If you cannot correct it, then you have not claimed the legacy submission that it was part of. But the version that is shown as being contributed by

“FamilySearch” cannot be changed. This is done to preserve the original information that was used to perform the ordinances. If you would like to see if a data administrator can make the corrections for you, please contact FamilySearch Support.

• You can either click the Feedback link or contact support directly (http://contact.fam ilysearch.org/). In your message, please include the following information: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • Proof for the correction. This may be a document such as a birth certificate, a marriage license, a census record, your personal knowledge, or the knowledge of a close family member who knew the individual.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

Correcting Invalid Ordinance Records

If you find ordinances that you believe are not valid, please contact FamilySearch Support to request a correction. Invalid ordinances occur in the following situations: • Individuals were sealed to the wrong spouse or parents. Note: Child-to-parent sealings that were performed before 1 July 1969 with an incorrect mother’s name can be redone with the correct mother’s name. Sealings performed on or after 1 July 1969 are valid even if a wrong mother’s name is given. The word “mother” used in the temple ordinance takes precedence over any name that is given. • Proxy ordinances were performed for the wrong gender. • Proxy ordinances were performed in error while the individual was still living. • Proxy ordinances were performed before the one-year anniversary of the individual’s death.

Send an e-mail to FamilySearch Support at https://contact.familysearch.org. You can also click the Send Feedback link at the bottom of the screen. Please provide the following information in your message:

• Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • Why you believe the ordinances are invalid. • Documentation that proves your correction. For example, you can send scanned copies of completed family ordinance cards; birth, marriage, or death certificates; census records, church records, and so forth.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

Adding Missing Ordinance Information

1. Review the possible duplicates, and combine records that are about the same individual. 2. If the ordinances are still missing, use the Advanced search for other possible duplicates feature to search for the missing duplicate records. If you find the ordinance records, combine the duplicates. To find this feature, open the individual’s complete details. Then click Possible Duplicates. The link appears towards the bottom of this screen. 3. If you still cannot find the ordinances, send an e-mail to FamilySearch Support at https://contact.familysearch.org. You can also click the Send Feedback link at the bottom of the screen. Please provide the following information in your message: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • The ordinances that you know are done, the dates when they were done, and the temple where they were done.

• Documentation that proves your correction. For example, you might send scanned copies of family ordinance cards or printed copies of an official ordinance record.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

Claiming Information That You Contributed to Previous Systems

Sometimes the new FamilySearch website does not let you correct information that you contributed to Ancestral File and the Pedigree Resource File because it does not recognize that you contributed it. You can claim your previous submissions, which then allows you to edit or delete the information. You can also claim names that you submitted for temple work using previous systems like TempleReady. When you claim a temple submission, the individuals are added to your Temple Ordinances list. There, you can reprint the family ordinance cards if the ordinances are not done. You need to claim submissions if you submitted information to Ancestral File or the Pedigree Resource File. When you claim submissions, you claim all of the information that was in the original submission. You do not need to claim each individual or piece of information separately. However, if you submitted information more than once, such as to Ancestral File and the Pedigree Resource File, you do need to claim each submission separately.

2. Click the name of the individual that contains information that you want to claim. 3. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 4. Click Details.

5. Click the contributor that is associated with the information that you contributed. • If you contributed this information to the new FamilySearch website as well as to previous systems, click your contact name, which appears in the list of contributors. A list of all of the contributors appears. Then click the contact name of the submission that you want to claim. • If the information came from many contributors, click Multiple, which appears in the list of contributors. Then click the contact name of the submission that you want to claim. A page with the contributor’s contact information appears.

6. Click Declare This Legacy Contributor as Yourself. A page appears where you can enter the information that will be used to evaluate your request.

7. If a field for your e-mail address appears, enter your e-mail address.

This field appears only if your user profile does not contain an e-mail address. If your user profile contains an e-mail address, the reply is sent to that address. 8. In the Comments about this request field, enter any information that you think would help a system administrator verify that you, not the user currently shown, originally contributed this information. This might include information such as the following: • Other names or versions of your name that you may have used for previous submissions. • Other places where you lived when you submitted information in the past. 9. Click Submit Request. You see a page explaining what will happen. Tip: Print this page. If you have questions about the status of your request, include the Help Center case number, which appears on this page.

Your request is sent to a system administrator. You will be notified by e-mail when a decision is made. If the submission is assigned to you, you will see both your contact name and the original contributor. Tip: Only your contact name appears when you claim information. Your contact information does not. If you want both your contact name and your contact information to be easily available for this individual, try one of the following: • If the summary does not display the correct name, birth, christening, death, or burial information, select it. If the summary is correct, you can select the wrong information and then change it back to the correct information. This makes your contact name and contact information available on the summary. Having your contact name on the summary is the most visible way to indicate that you are actively interested in and working on an individual’s record. • If you have additional information about the individual, add it. Both your contact name and contact information will be displayed with that information. If the submission was not assigned to you and you want to have your request reevaluated, simply respond to the e-mail notification. Provide any additional information that might help.

Submissions That Cannot Be Claimed

Several types of submissions cannot be claimed. You can identify these submissions by looking at the contributor’s name. You cannot claim submissions with the following contributor names: unknown4470317 This contact name appears on thousands of temple records that were created when the contributor’s name was not being saved. If you were allowed to claim this information, you would be shown as the contributor for all of those temple records. Instead of claiming the information, you should add another opinion and begin a discussion about the issue. Any contributor name These records belong to large batches of unrelated records. that contains the word If you were allowed to claim this information, you would “unknown” be shown as the contributor of all of them.

LDS Church These records are from official Church membership records. Membership Records FamilySearch These records are from official records of ordinances performed. If you originally contributed the genealogical information, you are listed as a contributor of that information, and you can claim it. FamilySearch These records were extracted as a part of an official Church Extraction Program extraction project. They were not submitted by individuals.

Requesting a Review of Information Claimed by Someone Else

If you see that someone else has claimed information that you believe you submitted to Ancestral File or the Pedigree Resource File, you can request that system administrators review the request and assign the information to you instead. You can also request a review if someone else claimed the genealogical data that was included when you submitted names for temple work.

2. Click the name of the individual that contains information that was claimed by someone else. 3. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 4. Click Details. 5. In the list of contributors, click the contributor whose claim you want to have reviewed. • If the contributor’s name is shown, click it. • If the information came from many contributors, click Multiple, which appears in the list of contributors. Then click the contact name of the submission that you want to have reviewed. A page with the contributor’s contact information appears.

6. Click Declare This Legacy Contributor as Yourself. A page appears where you can enter the information that will be used to evaluate your request.

7. If a field for your e-mail address appears, enter your e-mail address. This field appears only if your user profile does not contain an e-mail address. If your user profile contains an e-mail address, the reply is sent to that address. 8. In the Comments about this request field, enter any information that you think would help a system administrator verify that you, not the user currently shown, originally contributed this information. This might include information such as the following: • Other names or versions of your name that you may have used for previous submissions. • Other places where you lived when you submitted information in the past. 9. Click Submit Request. You see a page explaining what will happen. Tip: Print this page. If you have questions about the status of your request, include the Help Center case number, which appears on this page.

One of the advantages of having your family history online is the ability to work with close or distant relatives. You can work together to make the information about your shared history as complete and correct as possible. So that you can work with others, make sure that your user profile contains a valid e-mail address where you can be contacted. Also make sure that your preferences are set to allow contact by at least one method (mail, telephone, or e-mail). You can work with others in these ways: • You can contact the user who contributed information about an individual or family. • You can participate in discussions. • You can “watch” individuals in your family tree. The system sends you a weekly e-mail to notify you if changes occurred.

Appropriate Use of Contact Information and Discussions

Please keep all interactions with other users polite and appropriate to the purpose of the new FamilySearch website. For example, when you participate in discussions or contact another user directly, do not include the following types of information: • Offensive or abusive language or content. • Information that might harm or embarrass living relatives. • Links to external Web pages with inappropriate content. • Solicitations for business or research services. For more information, please see the Conditions of Use.

Directly Contacting Other Users of the System, Including Users Who Reserved Ordinances

The system shows who entered each piece of information. In many cases, you can contact the contributor by e-mail or other means. You can also see the user who has reserved an individual’s temple ordinances. You can contact other users under these circumstances: • The contributor is a current user of the system. • The contributor allows the system to display contact information. FamilySearch Support cannot give you contact information when a user chooses not to display it. • The contributor claimed his or her contributions to Ancestral File, the Pedigree Resource File, or the International Genealogical Index.

• A user reserved ordinances, and those ordinances are not yet done. If someone entered the information in behalf of someone else, you see both a contributor and a submitter. The contributor is the person who provided the information. The submitter is the person who entered it for the contributor. The system does not provide contact information for the contributor or the submitter.

1. On a view screen, click the individual or family whose contributors you want to see. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Find the contributors of the information: Contributor to Display Steps Who selected the name, birth, Click Summary. christening, death, or burial information The contributor of the Click Details or Summary. individual’s name, gender, events, or facts Who reserved ordinances Click LDS Ordinances. The contributor of a marriage event 1. Click Spouses and Children or Parents and Siblings, depending on which family the couple is in. 2. Click the Edit link that is next to the marriage event. You may need to scroll to see all of the marriage events.

The contributor a relationship 1. Click Spouses and Children or Parents and Siblings, depending on which family the couple is in. 2. Click View relationship details. 3. Click the Edit link of the relationship.

4. If the word Multiple appears instead of a contributor’s name, click it to display the complete list of contributors. 5. Click the contributor’s name. The information that the contributor chose to disclose is displayed. Note: If the contributor is listed as “LDS Church Membership Records,” you see a screen on which you can request changes to Church membership records for deceased individuals. See your ward clerk for changes to the membership records of living individuals.

6. Use the contact information.

• If the contributor provided an e-mail address, click it. Your e-mail program opens, and you can write your message. • If you prefer to communicate by other means, either print the contact information, or write it down so you can use it to call or write a letter. Tip: The printout does not contain any information that reminds you what information this contributor provided. You may want to also print the information in question or keep notes that help you remember what you wanted to discuss. • If a contributor chooses not to display contact information, try starting a discussion. That user may choose to respond through the discussion board. If not, please respect the privacy of users who choose not to display contact information. FamilySearch Support cannot give you contact information when a user chooses not to display it. Note: Much of the information in the new FamilySearch website came from older sources. The contact information might not have been available in these sources or might not have transferred to the website.

In your communications with other contributors, it is helpful if you do the following: • Unless you are contacting someone who reserved ordinances, do not assume that the contributor is a Church member. • Explain how you got the other person’s contact information. • List the individual or family line of interest to you. It is especially helpful if you can include person identifiers so the other person can quickly find the information of interest to you. • Remember that other users might not see exactly the same information as you when they look at their family line. For example, they may not see the same living people. Or they may see a different family line because they descend through a different spouse.

Participating in Discussions

Discussions are a great way to coordinate family history work with other FamilySearch users. Participating in discussions is easy. They work like social networking sites that you may already use.

The system provides a discussion board for most individuals in the system. It does not provide a discussion board for individuals who are living, who were stillborn, or who have restricted records. In a discussion board, you can do the following: • Identify yourself as someone who is interested in or actively working on an individual or family line. • Coordinate the correction of errors and additional research with other interested users. • Call attention to incorrect information on the individual’s record. Note: Because all discussions will eventually be visible to users who are not Church members, please discuss temple ordinances through e-mail.

1. On a view screen, click the individual whose discussions you want to see.

2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Discussions. If a discussion board is not allowed, the system displays a message instead of the discussion board. 4. Read through the discussions. • To see the comments on a discussion, click Show. • If a discussion or comment is too long to be displayed on the screen, click Read more.

5. (Optional) To add a comment to an existing discussion, follow these steps: a. Click the Comment link of the discussion or comment to which your comment pertains. b. In the field that appears, enter your comment. c. Click Post. 6. (Optional) To start a discussion about a new topic, follow these steps: a. Click Start a New Discussion. b. For the title, enter a brief description that introduces your concern. c. In the next field, explain the issue. Important: Please be polite and factual. Do not include information that might harm or embarrass living relatives. Review the Conditions of Use if you have any questions about what is appropriate content for a discussion. Because all discussions will eventually be visible to users who are not Church members, please discuss temple ordinances through e-mail. d. Click Post.

Advantages of the Discussions Feature

The discussions feature provides a cooperative environment where issues can be discussed and resolved. It has many advantages over the dispute feature, which discussions will eventually replace completely. • Adding a dispute blocks a user’s ability to make the needed corrections. Discussions do not. • The dispute feature is not cooperative. It is difficult to question a dispute, defend the disputed information, or add additional information that identifies correct information. • The discussion feature lets you work with users who do not allow the system to display their e-mail address or other contact information. • The sources and reasoning required to resolve a dispute are valuable and should be preserved with the record. Using the discussions feature to coordinate corrections preserves this valuable information with the individual’s record.

• A “discussion” sounds less contentious than a “dispute.”

What Happens to Discussions When Records Are Combined and Separated

When an individual’s record is combined with another record, the discussion boards are also combined. If an individual’s record is separated, the discussions go with the record to which they belong. If you begin a discussion on an individual and that individual’s record is combined with another record, find the combined individual by navigating your tree or by using search. The discussion may be located in a different place within the discussion board. If you cannot find a discussion that you were interested in, the record containing the discussion may have been separated from the record where the discussion was originally located. Do a search to find the correct record. If you cannot find it, the user who started it may have deleted it.

Editing Your Discussions and Comments

You can add to and correct the discussions and comments that you add.

1. On a view screen, click the individual whose discussions you want to edit. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Discussions. 4. Find the discussion or comment that you want to edit. 5. Click the Edit link for the discussion or comment. 6. Make your changes. 7. Click Save.

Deleting Your Discussions and Comments

You can delete the discussions that you begin and the comments that you enter. When you delete a discussion, all of its comments are also deleted, regardless of who entered them. Delete a discussion only when it contains no information of lasting value.

1. On a view screen, click the individual whose discussions you want to delete. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree.

What Causes Discussions to Disappear

A discussion can disappear from an individual’s record for several reasons. The most common reasons are the following: • The individual’s record was separated. Do a search to find the correct record. • The user who began the discussion deleted it. If you think the issue was not resolved, begin a new discussion. • A system administrator deleted the discussion. A system administrator would have deleted a discussion only if its content was not appropriate. You can begin a new discussion that is appropriate.

Reporting Inappropriate Discussions and Comments

If a discussion or comment contains content that you feel should not be included in the system, a system administrator can review it. If it is found to be inappropriate, the administrator can then delete it. Before you report an inappropriate discussion or comment, try adding a polite comment to suggest that discussion or comment be reworded or deleted. The issue may get resolved without having to report the issue to support. Types of inappropriate discussions or comments to report might include the following: • Offensive or abusive language or content. • Information that might harm or embarrass living relatives. • Links to external Web pages with inappropriate content. • Solicitations for business or research services. Important: Please use the Report Abuse link to notify FamilySearch Support about inappropriate content in a discussion. Do not use it to report inaccurate information about individuals or families in the system, such as incorrect names, dates, places, and relationships. To correct these errors, work with other contributors, and use the Discussions feature.

1. On a view screen, click the individual who has the discussion or comment that you think is inappropriate. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel.

• If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Discussions. 4. Find the item that you want to report. 5. Click the Report abuse link that appears beneath the item. 6. Click the reason that you feel the source is a problem. 7. Click Done. The system indicates that FamilySearch Support has received your report. This message also lists the e-mail address to which a response will be sent. 8. To close the message, click OK.

A data administrator reviews your concerns. If your user profile contains an e-mail address, you will receive an e-mail to explain what actions were taken.

Receiving E-mail Notifications about Changes

You can select individuals in whom you are interested and receive an e-mail notification when someone changes the individual’s summary, when new activity in an individual’s discussions occurs, or when the individual’s record is combined with or separated from a record. To receive e-mail notifications, your user profile must contain an e-mail address that you use.

1. On a view screen, click the individual that you want to follow. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Watch. This link is located in the upper-right corner of the complete details. A pop-up appears to confirm that you will receive notification e-mails. 4. On the pop-up, click OK.

Stop Watching Individuals

If you no longer want your notification e-mail to show a specific individual, you stop watching him or her. If you stop watching an individual, you still receive the notification e-mail as long as you are watching other individuals. If you stop watching all individuals, the e-mails automatically stop.

1. On a view screen, click the individual that you want to stop watching.

2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Stop Watching. This link is located in the upper-right corner of the complete details. If the link says Watch instead of Stop watching, you are not watching this individual.

Stopping and Starting Notification E-mails

You can start or stop receiving notification e-mails from the system. If you choose to stop receiving the e-mail notifications, the system does not automatically stop watching your chosen individuals. This allows you to stop receiving the e-mails temporarily and start them again when you are ready. Tip: At the bottom of each notification e-mail is a link that you can use to unsubscribe. To stop receiving the e-mails, you can click that link instead of using the following process.

If you use Personal Ancestral File (PAF) or a similar computer program, you can transfer your family history information to the new FamilySearch website. Many people, especially those just starting family history, find that the new FamilySearch website is all they need. People who do a lot of family history, however, may want the additional features that programs like Personal Ancestral File provide. For example, these programs let you do the following: • View, add to, and correct information in your family line when you are not connected to the Internet. • Maintain a working copy of your family history on your own computer. • Use features that the new FamilySearch website lacks. For example, you can do the following: - Print reports, including pedigrees with more than four generations. - Search, sort, and filter your information. - Keep lists of research tasks that you have done or need to do. - Include stories and multimedia (photos, videos, and so forth) in your family line. - Track sources in more detail.

Accepted File Types

The new FamilySearch website accepts GEDCOM files, which end with “.ged.” The website also accepts TempleReady submission files, which end with “.sub.” To contribute a TempleReady submission file, you must work with a family history consultant, a family history center director, or a temple worker. The website does not accept the following types of files, which are commonly used in Personal Ancestral File: • .PAF files. These are files that Personal Ancestral File uses in its program. • .ZIP and .BAK files. These are backup files that you create to restore your family history information if your .PAF file is lost or damaged. Note: The new FamilySearch website does not accept GEDCOM files that have been directly downloaded from Ancestral File, Pedigree Resource File, and the International

Genealogical Index. This helps reduce duplication. If this happens, you are notified why your file was rejected.

Ways to Transfer Information between Your Personal Computer and the New FamilySearch Website

If you decide to use a family history computer program, choose one that allows you to transfer family history information between your personal database and the new FamilySearch website. If possible, use a program that can transfer information without the use of GEDCOM files. If you cannot use one of these programs or prefer not to, select one that creates GEDCOM files.

Programs That Transfer Information without GEDCOM Files

Please consider using a program that is certified to work with the new FamilySearch website without the use of GEDCOM. These programs let you compare the information on your computer with the website. You can then selectively transfer information from your personal database to the new FamilySearch website and add information from the website to your personal database. If you decide to use one of these programs, choose a program that has the following certifications: • Access. Programs that are certified for access can download information from the new FamilySearch website and add it to your database. • Update. Programs that are certified for update can send information from your database to the new FamilySearch website without using GEDCOM. • Sync. Sync is short for “synchronization.” Programs that are certified for “sync” maintain a two-way communication between your database and the new FamilySearch website. You can do the following: - Combine duplicate records that you obtained from the new FamilySearch website and send the combined record back to the website. - Send new information and corrections from your personal database to the website. - Download to your database the changes and new information that others add to the website. You choose the individuals that should be synchronized and whether the information exchange occurs.

Many popular family history computer programs have these certifications. For a list of programs, see http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affiliates/index.html. Note: This list of certified products is updated regularly. The list is currently available in English only. Most certified programs are available in English only.

Add-in Programs for Personal Ancestral File (PAF)

If you use Personal Ancestral File, you might be able to use a program that is certified to work with the new FamilySearch website without the use of GEDCOM. For a list of add-ins, see http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affiliates/index.html.

Programs That Transfer Information with GEDCOM Files

As a minimum, select a computer program that creates and imports GEDCOM files. Personal Ancestral File and many other family history computer programs do. GEDCOM files allow you to exchange family history information with others who use computer programs that accept GEDCOM files. After you create a GEDCOM file, you can contribute it to the new FamilySearch website. The website does not allow you to export GEDCOM files that you can put into your personal database. Instead, you have to retype the information into your personal database. The following features are particularly helpful if you plan to use GEDCOM to exchange information with the new FamilySearch website: • Unique Record Serial Numbers. A unique record serial number is a unique identification number that is assigned to each record in a .paf file. Unlike other identification numbers, which are unique only within the same database, unique record serial numbers are unique worldwide. (You may also hear these numbers called “GUIDs,” “Global Unique Identifiers,” or “Globally Unique Identifiers.”) These numbers allow the program to minimize duplication when contributing GEDCOM files to the new FamilySearch website. The following computer programs support unique record serial numbers. • Personal Ancestral File 5.0 and higher • Legacy Family Tree • Roots Magic • Ancestral Quest • Reunion 9 • Automatic Change Tracking. Some family history computer programs can track changes that you make to your database. You can then use this information to identify records that you changed and probably need to contribute again to the new FamilySearch website. Personal Ancestral File 4 and 5 both track changes and allow you to create a GEDCOM file containing only changed records.

Preparing Your Information for Transfer

Before you transfer information from your computer to the new FamilySearch website, take some time, and prepare it first.

1. Compare the information that you plan to contribute to what is already in the new FamilySearch website. Contribute only what is new or different. If you do not, you may end up creating duplicate records that must be combined manually. 2. Review the records about individuals who are still living. Make sure that you do the following before you contribute information about someone who is living: • Get permission from each living individual before you add the information. • Contribute only enough information to connect you to your deceased ancestors. The new FamilySearch website is not a good place to store information about all of your living relatives.

• Make sure that fields for death and burial are blank. Any information in these fields (such as the word “living”) causes the new FamilySearch website to determine that the individual is deceased. • Make sure that birth years are correct. A mistyped birth year can cause the system to determine that the individual is deceased. 3. Review information in the ordinances fields. If an individual’s ordinances are not yet done, the ordinance fields should be blank. Any information in these fields (such as the word “submitted”) causes the system to determine that the individual’s ordinances are completed. As a result, no one will be able to reserve and do the ordinances. 4. Review your sources and notes for any information that should not be made public.

Using GEDCOM Files to Transfer Information

The new FamilySearch website accepts GEDCOM files containing 1,000 or fewer individuals. However, unless you are sure that the system does not have the information, you may want to contribute files with 100 individuals or less. The website does not allow you to export GEDCOM files that you can put into your personal database. Instead, you have to retype the information into your personal database.

What Is GEDCOM?

GEDCOM (GEnealogical Data COMmunications) is a computer format that lets computer users transfer genealogical data from one computer program to another. GEDCOM was created by The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. This standard format is used by many family history computer programs, which allow you to create GEDCOM files. The names of GEDCOM files end with .ged, such as brand.ged.

Creating a GEDCOM File

The new FamilySearch website accepts GEDCOM files with 1,000 or fewer individuals. If your personal database contains more than 1,000 individuals, you have to divide your information into smaller GEDCOM files. Then contribute each file separately. To create a GEDCOM file, you need a computer program like Personal Ancestral File to put your information in. Note: If you do not have Personal Ancestral File or a similar program, you can enter your information directly into the new FamilySearch website instead. For instructions on how to create a GEDCOM file, please check the instructions that come with your family history computer program.

Contributing a GEDCOM File

When you contribute a GEDCOM file, the new FamilySearch website tries to see if the individuals in your file are already in the database. If it finds them, it adds your information to the information that is already in the system. If it does not find them, it creates new records for the individuals and families in your GEDCOM file. When you contribute GEDCOM files to the system, you might create duplicate records, which can be time-consuming to combine. You cannot delete a GEDCOM file from the system, so you may want to consider the following recommendations before you contribute a GEDCOM file: • Carefully compare the information that the system has about your ancestors to the information that you have on your personal computer. Contribute only what is new or different. • Consider making small additions and corrections by data entry. It may be faster than creating and uploading a GEDCOM file and then combining the duplicate records. • You can contribute GEDCOM files with up to 1,000 individuals. However, unless you are sure that the system does not have the information, you may want to contribute files with 100 individuals or less. • If you have a large amount of family history information on your personal computer and update it often, consider a long-term strategy. The first time you contribute the GEDCOM file, you have to combine duplicate records. In your subsequent contributions, the system should be able to automatically recognize the duplicate records and automatically combine the records for you. Important: If you change information in your personal database and then contribute it in a GEDCOM file, the system adds your new information to what is already there. It does not replace any information that you contributed previously with the updated information in the GEDCOM file. Use a third-party program that supports synchronization if you want to make changes in this manner.

To reduce the possibility of creating more duplicate records, please consider using a family history computer program that is certified with the new FamilySearch website for “synchronization,” “access,” and “update.” These programs let you compare the information on your computer with the website. You can then selectively contribute small amounts of new or corrected information. For a list of certified computer programs, see http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affiliates/index.html. Note: The list of programs is currently available in English only.

When to Contribute a GEDCOM File

If you do family history research, you may want to contribute GEDCOM files more frequently than someone who has received a copy of a GEDCOM file from someone else. This helps make sure that the user who is most knowledgeable about a family line is listed as the contributor. Other users who have questions about the information can then contact the person most likely to know the answer.

If You Do Family History Research

If you do family history research and often add new information to your family history database, contribute your updated information as often as possible. This gives you these advantages: • Your new information is preserved.

• Your new information is available for others and may help prevent duplication of research effort. • You and other family members may be able to begin doing temple ordinances for the individuals and families. A family history program that is certified with the new FamilySearch website for “synchronization,” “access,” and “update” is usually the best option for doing frequent updates. For a list of programs, including add-ins for Personal Ancestral File, see http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affiliates/index.html. Note: This list of programs is currently available in English only.

If You Obtained Most of Your Information from a “Family Genealogist”

If you obtained most of the information in your GEDCOM file from a “family genealogist” who is still alive, who is knowledgeable about your shared family lines, and who is a member of the Church, let him or her contribute the GEDCOM file. Then synchronize, add, or upload only the information that is different, such as information about family lines that you do not share in common with the family genealogist. This strategy gives you a large advantage in working with others. The system lists the first user to provide the information as the contributor. The family genealogist will be listed as the contributor of the information about your shared family lines. You will be listed as the contributor of the information that is different from what the family genealogist provided. This allows other users to contact the contributor who is the most knowledgeable about the information in question.

Contributing GEDCOM Files

If you have family history information on your computer, you can use GEDCOM to contribute it without reentering it. Before you can contribute a GEDCOM file, you must first create it using your family history computer program. When you create your GEDCOM file, note the name of the file and the drive and folder in which it is stored. Important: Carefully compare the information that the system already has about your ancestors to the information you have on your personal computer. Contribute only what is new or different. If you do not, you may end up creating duplicate records that must be combined manually.

1. Click the Add Information tab. 2. Click Contribute a GEDCOM File. A warning page appears. 3. Read the information on the warning page. 4. If you have compared the information in your GEDCOM file to the information that is already in the system, click I have compared the information in my GEDCOM file with the information already in FamilySearch. 5. Click Continue. Note: The Continue button is not available until you click I have compared the information in my GEDCOM file with the information already in FamilySearch.

6. Click Browse, and find the GEDCOM file that you want to contribute. Tip: If you know the name of the file and where it is stored, you can enter the drive, folders, and file name directly into the field.

7. Click Continue. When your file is received, you see a page showing that your file has been received and is being processed. 8. Click View Results Later. It may take some time for the system to finish processing your file. If you want to wait until the processing finishes, click View Results Now. Keep clicking this button until the results appear.

To view the results of your GEDCOM file, go to the Home page, and click GEDCOM Files That I Have Added. Click the file that you want to see.

Seeing the Results of a GEDCOM File That You Contributed

You can see whether your GEDCOM file has been processed. If it has, you can see a list of the individuals who were in it and display those individuals on your pedigree. If needed, you can reserve ordinances for the individuals who were in the file. Before you can see the results of a GEDCOM file, you must first have contributed the GEDCOM file, and the system must have finished processing it.

1. Click the Home tab. 2. Click GEDCOM Files That I Added. A list of the GEDCOM files that you contributed appears. Note: This option appears on the page if you have contributed a GEDCOM file.

3. Click the GEDCOM file whose results you want to see. The results appear. If the file has been processed, you see how many individuals and families were added to the system, how many were new, and how many were already in there. You also see a See list link, which you can click to view the individuals. 4. If you are finished, click Done. To see a list of the individuals who were in the GEDCOM file and be able to see those individuals on a family pedigree, follow these steps: a. Click See list. A page appears where you can see all of the individuals who were in your GEDCOM file. b. If the GEDCOM file contained more individuals than can be displayed, click the Next, Previous, or number links. c. To see the details about each individual, click the individual’s name. d. To see the individual on a pedigree, click Go to.

To reserve the ordinances of an individual from the GEDCOM file, click (This family needs temple ordinances. Click here to do them), and follow the instructions on the screens. After you reserve the ordinances, click the Temple Ordinances tab. There you see your reserved ordinances and can print a Family Ordinance Request to take to the temple.

What Determines How Quickly GEDCOM Files Are Processed

Two main factors determine how quickly your file is processed.

• The size of your GEDCOM file. • How many other GEDCOM files are being processed at the same time.

What Information from Your GEDCOM File Gets Added to the System

When you contribute information in a GEDCOM file, the system adds it to its own database. How the information is displayed depends on whether the individual is living or deceased and the type of information. When you contribute a GEDCOM file, none of the information you contribute is changed. Only you can change the information you contribute.

Information about Deceased People

The system does the following when it receives a GEDCOM file with information about deceased people: • It displays all of the information. If you have information about a deceased individual that should not be published, please do not include it when you create your GEDCOM file. • It records that you contributed the information. • It looks for other records that might be for the same individual. Other information about the same individual may indicate that the temple ordinances are already done. In an individual’s details, click Possible Duplicates to see if it found any. If it did, you can decide whether they are the same individual. • It checks to see if there is enough information for ordinances to be done.

Information about Living People

If your GEDCOM file contains information about people who may still be alive, only you can see it until you add death information.

Notes

All of the notes in your GEDCOM file are displayed. Important: When you create your GEDCOM file, please make sure that you select the option to exclude confidential information. If some of your notes should be confidential, but you have not marked them as such, please do not include notes in your GEDCOM file. When you enter notes directly into the system, you can enter up to 300 characters. When you import notes using a GEDCOM file, there is no limit on the number of characters.

Sources

All of the sources in your GEDCOM file are displayed.

Multimedia

No photos, video clips, audio clips, scanned documents, or other multimedia are added or displayed. If you include multimedia links in your GEDCOM file, the system does not keep them.

Reasons Why a GEDCOM File Is Not Accepted

The system might not accept a GEDCOM file for several reasons. • It may not be a GEDCOM file. If your file name does not end in .ged, please create and contribute a new GEDCOM file. • You may have removed the floppy disk or other storage device from the drive before your computer finished saving the GEDCOM file on it. Please create a new GEDCOM file, and make sure the file has been completely saved before you remove the storage device from the drive. • The GEDCOM file may have become corrupted. Please create another GEDCOM file. • The GEDCOM file may contain more than 1,000 individuals.

Using Personal Ancestral File (PAF) to Transfer Information

Personal Ancestral File (PAF) is a free computer program that helps you record, manage, and share your family history information. It is available in several languages. Personal Ancestral File was created before the new FamilySearch Web site. If you use it alone, you need to create GEDCOM files to get your information into the website. If you obtain an add-in program, you can exchange information with the website without the use of GEDCOM files. Some add-in programs also let you use Personal Ancestral File to reserve temple ordinances and print the Family Ordinance Requests that are required for doing temple ordinances for your ancestors.

Certified Add-In Programs for Personal Ancestral File

Some certified third-party programs let you use Personal Ancestral File and the new FamilySearch website together. They are called “add-in” programs because they add features to Personal Ancestral File that are not in the original program. With a certified PAF add-in, you can add information from the new FamilySearch website directly into your .paf file without retyping the information. You can then send information from your .paf file to the website without using GEDCOM. A certified Personal Ancestral File add-in program must meet these requirements: • It must be certified in Access, Print, Update, Synchronization, and Multilanguage. • It must be available to users in the Tools drop-down menu within Personal Ancestral File. • It must read information from the new FamilySearch website and store it in the Personal Ancestral File database. • It must be made available for a 60-day free trial to allow users to evaluate the program and determine if they want to buy it. This 60-day trial allows users to do one upload of names from GEDCOM to the new FamilySearch website whether or not they decide to buy the program. • It must be made available for free use in the Family History Library in Salt Lake City, Utah, United States of America, and in family history centers worldwide. For a list of add-ins, see http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affiliates/index.html. Note: This list of certified products is updated regularly. The list is currently available in English only. All currently certified programs are available in English only.

Creating a GEDCOM File in Personal Ancestral File

Personal Ancestral File is a tool to help you record, manage, and share your genealogical information. With it, you can create GEDCOM files.

1. Select File, and then Export. The Export window appears. 2. In the Export To box, select the option for how to save the GEDCOM file: • If you are using Personal Ancestral File 4.0, click Standard GEDCOM 5.5. • If you are using Personal Ancestral File 5.0, click PAF 5.

3. In the Include box, click the options that you want. The following types of information are particularly helpful to include in a GEDCOM file: • Notes • Sources • Full information on living • LDS data If you have marked some notes or events in your database as confidential, be sure that the “Confidential data” option is not selected. 4. In the Selected Individuals box, indicate whether you want to include all or some of the individuals in your .paf file. You can contribute GEDCOM files with up to 1,000 individuals. However, unless you are sure that the system does not have the information, you may want to contribute files with 100 individuals or less. • To select all of the individuals in the .paf file, click All. • To select some of the individuals, click Partial, and then Select. Create a focus list that contains the names that you want to include in the GEDCOM file.

5. Click Export. 6. Select the drive and folder where you want to save your GEDCOM file. 7. Enter a name for the file, and click Export. When the export process is complete, a message appears telling you how many names were in the file. 8. Click OK.

Creating a Focus List of Records That Changed

Personal Ancestral File tracks the date when you change a record. Therefore, you can use field filters to select records that changed after a certain date. This may be a useful feature if you want to contribute only the changes you have made since the last time you contributed a GEDCOM file. Important: If in your personal database you change information that you previously contributed, the system adds your new information to what is already there. It does not replace any information that you contributed previously with the updated information in the GEDCOM file. For example, you contribute a GEDCOM file that contains an individual’s birth date and place. You later learn that this information was not correct. You change it in your

personal database and then contribute a new GEDCOM file with the correction. The new FamilySearch website shows both of the birth dates and places that you contributed. You need to delete manually the incorrect birth date and place from the website. The best way to make corrections in your personal database and then contribute them to the new FamilySearch is to use a family history computer program that is certified for “synchronization” and “update.”

1. Select File, and then Export. The Export window appears. 2. In the Selected Individuals box, click Partial. 3. Click Select. The Select Individuals window appears. 4. In the Field Filter box, click Define. The Field Filtering window appears. 5. In the Possible Fields box, scroll down until you see the Last Changed Date option. Click it. 6. Click >. The Last Changed Date Field Filter window appears. 7. Click the Options drop-down list, and select the option you want. For example, to select all records that were changed after a certain date, select Is greater than. 8. Enter the date or range of dates that you want to filter on. 9. Click OK. The filter is added to the Current Filter box. 10. On the Field Filtering screen, click OK. Personal Ancestral File searches your records and finds the ones that match the filter. 11. To see only the records that were selected, click the Show results only box, which appears in the Filtered List box. 12. When all of the records that you want to include are selected, click OK. Tip: Remember, your GEDCOM file must contain 1,000 or fewer individuals. If you have changed more individuals than that, you need to add another filter to limit the size of your GEDCOM file. Consider adding a filter that selects individuals by name. For example, add a field filter that selects changed individuals whose surnames begin with A to L. Then create another GEDCOM file using a filter that selects changed individuals whose surnames begin with M to Z.

The field filter is created. This list of individuals selected using the field filter remains selected until you create another filter or until you exit Personal Ancestral File. Tip: If you use a certain field filter often, you can save it for later use. See Personal Ancestral File help or the user’s guide for instructions.

Types of Information to Include in a GEDCOM File

Include in your GEDCOM as much information as you are able to share. It is very helpful if you include sources, notes, full information about living people, and tags in notes. Do not include any confidential information, especially in notes.

Sources

Sources are valuable. They show the origin of your information. They can help you and others evaluate how accurate the information is likely to be. If your personal database contains sources, include them in your GEDCOM file.

Notes

Your notes probably contain information that other members of your family will find interesting or useful. Before you include your notes in a GEDCOM file, please make sure that they do not contain information that might hurt or embarrass living people. Mark all notes that contain such information as confidential. When you create your GEDCOM file, make sure that you do not include confidential information. If you have used tags in your notes, the system keeps them. (A “tag” is a word or phrase that is typed at the beginning of a note to classify the information in it.) Wherever the system recognizes a tag about an event, it associates that note with the correct event. For example, if you have a note that begins with the tag “BIRTH:,” the system adds that note to the individual’s birth event. Note: When you enter notes directly into the new FamilySearch website, you can enter up to 300 characters. When you import notes using a GEDCOM file, there is no limit on the number of characters.

Full Information on Living People

If you contribute information about people who may still be alive, the system displays it only to you. When you add death information to the record, other FamilySearch users can also see it. Before you contribute information about people who may still be alive, please see the conditions of use for the new FamilySearch website.

LDS Ordinance Information

Include ordinance information if the ordinance date fields contain information that indicates ordinances are done or not needed. Do not include ordinance information if you have entered other types of information into ordinance date fields. For example, do not include ordinance information if you entered terms like “Submitted” or “Cleared” in the ordinance date fields. If an ordinance date field contains any information, the new FamilySearch website indicates that the ordinance is completed, even if it is not.

Using Third-Party Computer and Web Programs to Transfer Information

Third-party computer and Web programs can enhance your ability to work with the information in the new FamilySearch website. Consider using a third-party program if you want to do the following: • View, add to, and correct information in your family line when you are not connected to the Internet.

• Maintain a working copy of your family history on your own computer. • Use features that the new FamilySearch website lacks. For example, you may be able to do the following: - Print reports, including pedigrees with more than four generations. - Receive a notification when information changes. - Keep lists of research tasks that you have done or need to do. - Include stories and multimedia (photos, videos, and so forth) in your family line. - More easily combine and separate duplicate records. - Search online records for more information about your ancestors. - Import a GEDCOM file, compare its information to the website, and add only what is new or different. - Track sources in more detail.

For more information about third-party programs that are certified to work with the new FamilySearch website, see http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affiliates/index.html.

Certified Third-Party Programs

Certification is a process in which developers at FamilySearch International evaluate a third-party computer or Web program to see how well it works with its products and whether the affiliate who produces it can adequately support its users. During the certification process, a review board evaluates the following: • The affiliate and its marketing, support, and technical capabilities. • The feature to be certified. Once features are certified, affiliates can do the following: • They can use the “FamilySearch Certified” logo on their products, website, and marketing literature. On a website, this logo should link to the official FamilySearch description of that company’s certification. The logo looks like this:

• They can call themselves “FamilySearch Certified Affiliates.”

Exporting Information from the New FamilySearch Website

If you find information in the new FamilySearch website that you do not have, you have a few options for getting it onto your personal computer.

• Use a family history computer program with either “access” or “synchronization” certification. See http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affiliates/index.html for a list. • If you cannot or choose not to use a computer program with “access” or “synchronization” certification, you need to either use the cut and paste features of your operating system or retype the information into your computer program.

Transferring Information from Personal Ancestral File to a Third-Party Computer Program

If you currently use Personal Ancestral File (PAF) and would like to change to a different family history computer program, you can export your information as a GEDCOM file. You can then import that file into your new program. A better way might be to choose a program that uses .paf files or imports .paf files. Using a program that uses or imports .paf files directly has these advantages: • It is easier than creating and importing GEDCOM files. • It provides the cleanest transfer of information. Different computer programs handle GEDCOM files differently. For example, with GEDCOM you might find that some of your source information does not transfer as you would expect. • Your RINs (record identification numbers) and MRINs (marriage record identification numbers) stay the same. If you create a GEDCOM file, these identification numbers change. • If the new program uses .paf files directly, you can use your .paf file in both programs. Therefore, you can still use the features in Personal Ancestral File that you like. You can also use features from your new program. The following programs import .paf files:

Legacy Family Tree from Millennial Corp. (http://www.legacyfamilytree.com) RootsMagic from RootsMagic, Inc. (http://www.rootsmagic.com)

The following programs use .paf files directly:

Ancestral Quest from Incline Software (http://www.ancquest.com) FamilyInsight from Ohana Software (http://www.ohanasoftware.com)

As you look at your family line, you may see that the system contains more than one record about the same individual. These additional records are called “duplicate records.” When you find duplicate records, you should combine them. When you combine records, the following happens: • All of the information is put into the same place. No information is overwritten or deleted. • The contributors, sources, and notes for each piece of information are maintained and listed. • The system remembers where each piece of information came from. If you later find that some records are really about someone else, you can separate them back out again. • You can quickly tell if the temple ordinances are complete. • The discussion boards are combined. The system provides several ways that you can find duplicate records.

• To have the system automatically find some “possible duplicates” for you, open the individual’s details, and click Possible Duplicates. • To combine duplicate family members, open the individual’s details. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family you want to look at. If you find duplicate individuals, click the (Options) icon that is next to one of their names. • To search for possible duplicates, click Possible Duplicates, and then click Advanced search for other possible duplicates.

After you find possible duplicates, you can choose the ones that you want to compare. As you compare the records, look at other family members, names, dates, and places. If the records are about the same individual, you can then combine them.

Benefits of Combining Records

Combining duplicate records reduces the duplication of effort that can occur in family history work. Combining records also ensures that an individual’s and family’s ordinances will be done only once. Having an individual’s information in one place allows you to see everything about the individual in one place. You can then work with other contributors to do the following: • Correct errors. • Add sources and notes to indicate correct information. Even if you disagree with some of the information that has been contributed about an individual, you should combine duplicate records anyway. You can then begin a discussion to work with other contributors to correct it.

Why the System Contains Duplicate Records

The new FamilySearch website contains information about hundreds of millions of individuals. Some of those records are duplicates because the records came from many different sources. The information in the website came from these sources: • Information that users enter directly into the system or contribute with a GEDCOM file. • Ancestral File and Pedigree Resource File. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints published these computerized databases to help Church members and other family history enthusiasts coordinate family history research. • Church membership records of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. Much of this information is about living people and has restrictions that limit who can see it. • The International Genealogical Index. This index also contains records of proxy temple ordinances that have been performed for the deceased.

In the past, it was very difficult for people to work together. Consequently, people contributed information about the same individuals and families to the Church for publication in different family history databases. People also did the temple work for the same individuals and families several times. All of the information that was contributed multiple times has been added to the new FamilySearch website. All of the duplicate ordinance records have also been added.

The website automatically combines some duplicate records, and many duplicates have already been combined. But it cannot automatically combine all duplicate records. Therefore, some of your ancestors appear more than once. Note: If you find records that were combined incorrectly, you can separate them, even if they were combined by the website instead of a user.

Combining the Possible Duplicates That the System Finds for You

The system automatically finds possible duplicates and displays them when you click Possible Duplicates. Here, the system lists only records that are very likely to be duplicates. There may be more possible duplicates, but you have to use another method to find them.

1. On a view screen, click the name of the individual whose possible duplicates you want to review. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Possible Duplicates. The system displays the possible duplicates that it found.

4. Click the box next to each individual whose record you would like to compare to the individual whose details are displayed. You can click the name of a possible duplicate to see the individual’s details. The stars beneath an individual’s name indicate how closely the possible duplicate matches the record from your family line. More stars mean a closer match.

5. Click Compare in More Detail. You see a screen that lets you compare two records. The record on the right is the possible duplicate. The record on the left is the individual from which you started. 6. Compare the possible duplicate to the record on the left. Caution: Two children in a family with the same name may not be the same individual. In some countries, if a child died young, the next child born of that same gender was often given the same name as the child who died. Carefully compare birth and death information before combining the records. Tip: If the same father, mother, spouse, or child is listed on both records, put your mouse cursor on the family member’s name. If the name is highlighted on both the right and left records, then both records are linked to the same record about that family member. For example, if you put your mouse cursor on the spouse’s name and the name is highlighted on the right and left records, then both the records are linked to the same spouse. This is a strong indication that the two records are about the same individual.

7. (Optional) To see the details about any individual listed on the page, click the individual’s name. To close the details, click Close. The individual’s details open beneath the individual whose record you are reviewing. 8. At the bottom of the page, click one of the following options: • Click Yes, combine the information if these records seem to be identical and if they are about the same individual. The system will combine the records. • Click Yes, but some information is different if the records are about the same individual but some of the information is different. The system will combine the records. • Click No, or I cannot tell if the records are not about the same individual or if you cannot tell. The system will not combine the records. They will remain on the list of possible duplicates until someone adds enough information to one or both of them that the system no longer considers them possible duplicates.

9. If you are satisfied with your actions, click Combine the Records. The system tells you the records were combined. If any of the records could not be combined, the system lists the records and gives a reason why. 10. Click OK.

The system looks for more possible duplicates. Depending on how long this search takes, you may see a message indicating that it is happening. When the system looks for more possible matches, it reconsiders all possible duplicates that you did not combine as well as all other records in the system. To see the new list of possible duplicates, go to the Possible Duplicates section of the details. You may see more possible duplicates, or you may see fewer.

Combining Duplicate Family Members

If an individual is linked to the same family member more than once, you can quickly combine the duplicate family members.

1. Click the Me and My Ancestors tab. 2. Find the individual whose information you want to work with. You can use either of these methods:

• On the Home page, click the Me and My Ancestors tab. Then navigate to the individual. • Click the Search tab. Then find the individual.

3. Click the name of an individual whose family you would like to check for duplicate family members. 4. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 5. Indicate the family that you would like to check: • To check for duplicate parents, brothers, and sisters, click Parents and Siblings. • To check for duplicate spouses and children, click Spouses and Children. The family appears.

6. Click the (Click for options) icon that is next to the family member who appears more than once. A menu appears. 7. Click the menu option that allows you to combine the duplicate records. The system lists the individuals who can be combined. 8. Click the check box next to each individual whose record you think might be a duplicate. 9. Indicate whether you want to compare each record in detail or simply combine the selected records:

• If you want to compare each record in detail, click Compare in More Detail. Continue with the next step. • If you want to simply combine the records, click Combine. Skip to the last step.

10. Compare the possible duplicate to the record on the left. Caution: Two children in a family with the same name may not be the same individual. In some countries, if a child died young, the next child born of that same gender was often given the same name as the child who died. Carefully compare birth and death information before combining the records. Tip: If the same father, mother, spouse, or child is listed on both records, put your mouse cursor on the family member’s name. If the name is highlighted on both the right and left records, then both records are linked to the same record about that family member. For example, if you put your mouse cursor on the spouse’s name and the name is highlighted on the right and left records, then both the records are linked to the same spouse. This is a strong indication that the two records are about the same individual.

11. (Optional) To see the details about any individual listed on the page, click the individual’s name. To close the details, click Close. The individual’s details open beneath the individual whose record you are reviewing. 12. At the bottom of the page, click one of the following options: • Click Yes, combine the information if these records seem to be identical and if they are about the same individual. The system will combine the records. • Click Yes, but some information is different if the records are about the same individual but some of the information is different. The system will combine the records. • Click No, or I cannot tell if the records are not about the same individual or if you cannot tell. The system will not combine the records. They will remain on the list of possible duplicates until someone adds enough information to one or both of them that the system no longer considers them possible duplicates.

13. Indicate what you want to do next: • If you have more possible duplicates to compare, click Next to display the next one. Compare each possible duplicate. • To go to a previous possible duplicate, click Previous. • When you are finished comparing possible duplicates, click Done. The system lists the number of records to be combined. No records have yet been combined. Continue with the next step. • If you want to quit reviewing possible duplicates, click Cancel. No records will be combined.

14. If you are satisfied with your actions, click Combine the Records. The system tells you the records were combined. If any of the records could not be combined, the system lists the records and gives a reason why. 15. Click OK.

Combining Duplicate Parents and Spouses on the Family Tree View

On the Family Tree view, you can quickly identify where duplicate parents and spouses might be. You can quickly combine them when you find them.

1. On the Family Tree view, click the appropriate icon to display the list of other husbands, wives, or parents: • To see other husbands, click the Show All Husbands triangle, which appears above the name of the currently listed husband.

• To see other wives, click the Show All Wives triangle, which appears above the name of the currently listed wife.

• To see other parents, click the Show All Parents triangle, which appears to the left of the names of the currently listed parents.

A drop-down list appears. 2. From the drop-down list, click the option that lets you combine the duplicates. 3. On the tab that lets you select a different spouse, father, or mother, click the individual who may have duplicate records. 4. Click the tab that lets you combine duplicate spouses, fathers, or mothers. A list of possible duplicates appears. 5. Click the check box next to each individual whose record you think might be a duplicate. 6. Indicate whether you want to compare each record in detail or simply combine the selected records: • If you want to compare each record in detail, click Compare in More Detail. Continue with the next step. • If you want to simply combine the records, click Combine. Skip to the last step.

7. Compare the possible duplicate to the record on the left. Caution: Two children in a family with the same name may not be the same individual. In some countries, if a child died young, the next child born of that same gender was often given the same name as the child who died. Carefully compare birth and death information before combining the records. Tip: If the same father, mother, spouse, or child is listed on both records, put your mouse cursor on the family member’s name. If the name is highlighted on both the right and left records, then both records are linked to the same record about that family member. For example, if you put your mouse cursor on the spouse’s name

and the name is highlighted on the right and left records, then both the records are linked to the same spouse. This is a strong indication that the two records are about the same individual.

8. (Optional) To see the details about any individual listed on the page, click the individual’s name. To close the details, click Close. The individual’s details open beneath the individual whose record you are reviewing. 9. At the bottom of the page, click one of the following options: • Click Yes, combine the information if these records seem to be identical and if they are about the same individual. The system will combine the records. • Click Yes, but some information is different if the records are about the same individual but some of the information is different. The system will combine the records. • Click No, or I cannot tell if the records are not about the same individual or if you cannot tell. The system will not combine the records. They will remain on the list of possible duplicates until someone adds enough information to one or both of them that the system no longer considers them possible duplicates.

10. If you are satisfied with your actions, click Combine the Records. The system tells you the records were combined. If any of the records could not be combined, the system lists the records and gives a reason why. 11. Click OK.

Combining Duplicate Parents and Spouses on the Family Pedigree with Details View

On the Family Pedigree with Details view, you can quickly identify where duplicate parents and spouses might be. You can quickly combine them when you find them.

1. On the Family Pedigree with Details view, click the (See other spouses) or (See other parents) button that is located near the individual’s name. Note: The (See other spouses) icon appears only when a couple is in the main position. To combine duplicate spouses for someone else on the pedigree, first move that individual to the main position.

2. On the tab that lets you select a different spouse, father, or mother, click the individual who may have duplicate records. 3. Click the tab that lets you combine duplicate spouses, fathers, or mothers. A list of possible duplicates appears. 4. Click the check box next to each individual whose record you think might be a duplicate. 5. Indicate whether you want to compare each record in detail or simply combine the selected records: • If you want to compare each record in detail, click Compare in More Detail. Continue with the next step. • If you want to simply combine the records, click Combine. Skip to the last step.

6. Compare the possible duplicate to the record on the left. Caution: Two children in a family with the same name may not be the same individual. In some countries, if a child died young, the next child born of that same

gender was often given the same name as the child who died. Carefully compare birth and death information before combining the records. Tip: If the same father, mother, spouse, or child is listed on both records, put your mouse cursor on the family member’s name. If the name is highlighted on both the right and left records, then both records are linked to the same record about that family member. For example, if you put your mouse cursor on the spouse’s name and the name is highlighted on the right and left records, then both the records are linked to the same spouse. This is a strong indication that the two records are about the same individual.

Searching for Duplicate Records

The system may contain more duplicate records than you can find using the other methods. To find them, you search for them, select the possible duplicates from a list of search results, compare the records, and combine them. Caution: When you search for duplicate records, be extra careful when you compare them. The list of search results contains many records that may look like the same individual but that may not be duplicate records.

1. On a view screen, click the individual for whom you want to search for duplicates. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Possible Duplicates. The system displays the possible duplicates that it found.

4. Click Advanced search for other possible duplicates. A caution appears. 5. Read the caution, and click OK. The Search page appears with the individual’s information already entered. 6. If needed, change the information that you want to use for the search. Caution: Be sure to enter information about the same individual as the one whose details you started from.

7. Click Search. The Search Results page appears. Tip: If you do not get the results that you expected, click Refine Search to go back and change what you are searching for.

8. For each individual that you think may be a duplicate, click the box that is next to his or her name. Tip: To see an individual’s details, click his or her name. Remember, during this step, you do not need to determine whether these records should be combined. You simply need to select records that might be duplicates. You will compare them in more detail during the next step.

9. If you think the search results contain more possible duplicates than can be shown, click the numbered links at the top of the page to see more. 10. Click Compare in More Detail. You see a screen that lets you compare two records. The record on the right is the possible duplicate. The record on the left is the individual from which you started. 11. Compare the possible duplicate to the record on the left. Caution: Two children in a family with the same name may not be the same individual. In some countries, if a child died young, the next child born of that same

12. (Optional) To see the details about any individual listed on the page, click the individual’s name. To close the details, click Close. The individual’s details open beneath the individual whose record you are reviewing. 13. At the bottom of the page, click one of the following options: • Click Yes, combine the information if these records seem to be identical and if they are about the same individual. The system will combine the records. • Click Yes, but some information is different if the records are about the same individual but some of the information is different. The system will combine the records. • Click No, or I cannot tell if the records are not about the same individual or if you cannot tell. The system will not combine the records. They will remain on the list of possible duplicates until someone adds enough information to one or both of them that the system no longer considers them possible duplicates.

14. Indicate what you want to do next: • If you have more possible duplicates to compare, click Next to display the next one. Compare each possible duplicate. • To go to a previous possible duplicate, click Previous. • When you are finished comparing possible duplicates, click Done. The system lists the number of records to be combined. No records have yet been combined. Continue with the next step. • If you want to quit reviewing possible duplicates, click Cancel. No records will be combined.

15. If you are satisfied with your actions, click Combine the Records. The system tells you the records were combined. If any of the records could not be combined, the system lists the records and gives a reason why. 16. Click OK.

Separating Incorrectly Combined Records

Sometimes records about two different individuals get combined. This creates a composite record that contains a lot of incorrect information. If the individuals are both linked to spouses, children, and parents, the record can become very confusing. The best way to correct these records is to separate the records so that each individual has one record. When you separate records, the system keeps the separated record. No information is deleted. It still appears on the separated record. Note: If the records were merged in Ancestral File, you cannot separate them. But you can correct the information.

Tip: If you are the contributor of a record with incorrect information and that record has been combined with other records, you might not be able to correct your own contribution. You might, however, be able to separate your record from the others, make the needed corrections, and recombine the records.

1. On a view screen, click the individual that contains the record that you want to separate. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click either Details or Summary. 4. Click Combined records. The system displays all the records that were combined about this individual.

1 The combined record. 2 The records that were combined about the individual. 3 Click the check boxes to separate records. 4 Select the number of records to be displayed on the page. 5 Links to see more records.

5. Find the record or records that should be separated. If you do not see the records, do one of the following: • If the page contains more records than you can see, use the horizontal scroll bar to see the records that do not appear.

• Click Records per page. You can select 5, 20, 40, or 100 records. • Click the numbered links to navigate through the pages.

6. Click the check box of each record that should be separated. • If the combined record contains the records of 2 individuals, click the check box of each record that is about the wrong individual. For example, if a father’s combined record also contains two records about his son, click the check boxes for each of the son’s records. The system separates the son’s records all at once and creates a new record for the son. That new record contains all of the son’s records that were separated from the father’s record. The son may also have other duplicate records that need to be combined separately. • If the combined record contains 3 or more individuals, separate all of the records for one individual. Then repeat the process for the next individual. For example, if a combined record contains records for an individual, his father, and his grandfather, first separate the father’s records. The system separates the father’s records from the son’s record and combines the father’s records into one record. Then separate the grandfather’s records.

7. Click Separate Selected Records. The system shows you the record that will be separated and asks if you are sure. If you separate this record, the system creates a new individual that contains all the information from the records that you selected. The information is not deleted. 8. Click Yes. Important: Separate records only when the records are about different individuals. Do not separate a record that is about the same individual simply because it contains errors. If you want to separate a different record, click No. The Combined Records page reappears, and you can select a different record to separate. 9. Indicate which record you would like to see. • To see the record that you separated, click View the individual that I separated. • To see the record of the individual that you started from, click Close.

After records are separated, the information about each individual goes to the appropriate record. Spouses, children, and parents go to the record to whom they were originally linked. Discussions go to the record that they are associated with. Tip: If you separate records that were combined by someone else, you should add notes to each individual to explain why you think they are not the same. If possible, list the sources of information that helped you arrive at your conclusion.

Reasons to Separate and Reasons to Leave Records Combined

If combined records are about the same individual, leave them combined. Separate them when the problem record is about a different individual or if the problem record contains a relationship to an incorrect spouse, parent, or child. The following table lists some common problems and explains whether the problem should be solved by separating records:

Problem Separate Reason the Records? The record contains incor- No Research might be duplicated. Temple ordi- rect versions of names, nances might also be duplicated. Instead, dates, or places. begin a discussion about the issue, and work with other contributors to correct the errors. The record is about the Yes All of the information about the same indi- wrong individual. vidual should be in one record. If the record is about the wrong individual, it does not belong. The record contains an Yes Separating the record may be the only way incorrect spouse, parent, or to show correct family relationships. child.

Cleaning a Pedigree with Many Duplicate Records

If your family line has many duplicate records, use a systematic approach to finding and combining them. A suggested approach follows. Examine each individual on your pedigree. Start at the top left side of the pedigree, and work your way down and to the right. For each deceased individual, do the following:

1. Click Possible Duplicates, and combine the duplicate records. 2. Click the Spouses and Children button, and combine all of the duplicate spouses and children. In turn, click the name of each parent, sibling, spouse, and child. That individual’s details appear in a pop-up box. Click Possible Duplicates, and combine any duplicate records listed there. 3. Click the Parents and Siblings button, and combine all of the duplicate parents and siblings. 4. Close the pop-up box details of all family members, and examine the details of the individual from which you started. Look for evidence that more duplicate records exist. For example, look for the following types of evidence: • If a deceased individual was a Church member, click Details. You should see “LDS Church Membership Records” as one of the contributors. If you do not, the individual’s Church membership record is probably a duplicate record that has not yet been combined. • Click LDS ordinance. Review the dates to see if they make sense. Ordinances that are missing or out of order may indicate that more possible duplicates exist. For example, the endowment date may indicate that the individual was endowed during life. But the baptism date may obviously be a proxy baptism that was done much later. In this case, a duplicate record probably contains the date of the individual’s baptism during life.

5. If you think that more duplicate records exist but cannot find them using any other method, click Possible Duplicates. Then click Advanced possible duplicate search to find them.

Verifying That Information Was Not Deleted When Records Were Combined

When you combine an individual’s duplicate records, no information is deleted or overwritten. This combining of records may, however, change how the system displays your family line. Consider the following situations: • Some pages have room to display only one version of a name, date, or place. If the system now has more than one opinion about an individual’s name, date, or place, it may display a different opinion from what you saw previously. • The individuals’ families were combined. The individual may now be linked to additional parents, siblings, spouses, children, grandparents, and so forth. The system may display one of these individuals instead of the one you saw previously.

Verifying That Individual Details Were Not Deleted After You Combined Records

Sometimes the system has room to display only one version of a name, date, or place. After you combine duplicate records, the system may have more than one opinion about an individual’s name, date, or place. It may display a different version of that information from what you saw previously. The information that was displayed previously has not been deleted, and you can verify that it is still there.

1. On a view screen, click the name of the individual whose information changed. 2. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel. The individual’s complete details appear. 3. Click Details.

You see that the information you saw previously is still there. If it is gone, it means that one of the following occurred: • The original contributor changed or deleted the information. • Someone separated the record that contained the information from the record that you are seeing.

Verifying That a Family Line Was Not Deleted After You Combined Records

When you combine individuals, the individuals’ families are combined. As a result, the individual may now be linked to additional parents, siblings, spouses, children, grandparents, and so forth. The system may display one of these new family lines instead of the one it displayed previously. The information that was displayed previously has not been deleted, and you can verify that it is still there.

1. On the Family Pedigree with Details view or the Family Tree view, look at the family line to see if the individual now has multiple spouses or parents. View Screen What to Look For

Family Pedigree If you see , then the individual now has multiple spouses. with Details If you see , then the individual now has multiple sets of parents.

Family Tree If you see a triangle above the husband’s name, then the wife has multiple husbands. If you see a triangle below the wife’s name, then the husband has multiple wives. If you see a triangle to the left of both parents’ names, then the individual now has multiple sets of parents.

2. View the individual’s family information: a. On the pedigree, click the individual’s name. b. If you are on the Family Tree view, click View Details to display the individual’s details. This link is located in the right panel. If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the individual’s details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. c. Click Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which of the individual’s families you want to see. You see all of the individual’s family members. Look for the lists of other spouses or parents.

3. Verify that the spouse or parents are still there.

Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Information

To decide if records are duplicates, carefully compare family members, names, dates, and places. Remember, records with different information might be about the same individual. Common reasons that duplicate records contain different information include errors in research and typing errors. Important: If the individuals are the same, combine the records even if you think some of the information is incorrect. You can always begin a discussion about the incorrect information. If you do not combine the information, temple ordinances and research might be duplicated.

Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Family Members

Two individuals may be the same even though information about family members may have differences. When you compare family members, remember the following: • An individual may have married more than once. • An individual may have had more than one set of parents, such as adoptive and biological parents. • A contributor may not have provided information about all of an individual’s spouses, children, parents, brothers, and sisters.

Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Names

Two individuals might be the same even though the names are not identical. And, just because names are identical or similar, do not assume that the individuals are the same.

Conflicting Records

The records about an individual may contain conflicting information. For example, record keepers may have recorded only part of a name. They may have misspelled names or used nicknames, abbreviations, or initials. The system considers many common nicknames, initials, and abbreviations when it finds possible duplicates.

Language Differences

The same individual’s name may have been written in different languages during his or her lifetime. • Individuals who moved to a new country often spelled their names in the language of the new country. • The place where an individual was living may have been taken over by a different country. Records may have then been kept in the language of the conquering country. • Names were often written in Latin in Catholic Church records. The system considers many other languages when it finds possible duplicates.

Nonstandard Spelling

In many languages, spelling did not become consistent until the 19th or 20th centuries. An individual may have spelled his or her own name differently during his or her own lifetime. Different record keepers may have also spelled the same individual’s name differently in different records. The system considers many common spelling variations when it finds possible duplicates.

Siblings with the Same Name

Two children with the same name in a family may not be matches. In some countries, if a child died young, the next child born of that same gender was often given the same name as the child who died.

The system may identify these children as possible duplicates. Carefully compare birth and death information.

Same Individual, Multiple Names

Individuals may have used more than one name during their lifetime. Immigrants may have adopted or been assigned a new name in their new country. Others may simply have changed their legal name for other reasons.

Legal Name Changes

The individual’s name might have been changed legally, such as when a child was adopted.

Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Dates

Two individuals might be the same, even if dates of birth, marriage, death, and other events are different.

Approximate Dates

Some contributors may have provided approximate dates and others exact dates or no dates. The system considers approximate dates when it finds possible duplicates.

Conflicting Records

The records about an individual may contain conflicting information. For example, the birth date may be different on church records and on the death certificate. The system considers a range of dates when it finds possible duplicates.

Different Calendars

The same date might be written differently in different calendar systems. The Gregorian calendar is the calendar commonly used in Western and Westernized countries. The system correctly interprets dates when they are written in one of these calendars: • Gregorian calendar • Chinese lunar calendar (Chinese lunar dates must be entered in Chinese characters) You may also see dates as they would be written in other calendars, such as the Christian Ecclesiastical (which uses feast dates), French Revolutionary, Soviet, Persian, Hindu, Arabic, and Hebrew calendars.

Why Duplicate Records Might Contain Different Places

Two individuals might be the same, even if places of birth, marriage, death, and other events are different.

Data Entry Differences

Different contributors may have listed the same place in more than one way. They may have used abbreviations, left out part of the name, or made typing errors. Some contributors may not have provided a place. The system considers common variations of place-names when it finds possible duplicates.

Conflicting Records

The records about an individual may contain conflicting information. For example, the birthplace may be different on church records and on the death certificate.

Assumed Places

Some contributors may have provided an “assumed” place. For example, they may have assumed that a second child was born in the same place as the first and third children. Other contributors may have provided a more exact place. You can often recognize an assumed place if “of” is the first word.

Name Changes

The same place may have had more than one name throughout time. The system considers many changes in place-names when it finds possible duplicates.

Boundary Changes

Government and ecclesiastical boundaries may have been renamed or changed over time. The system considers many boundary changes when it finds possible duplicates.

Language Differences

The same place-name is written differently in different languages. The system considers many other languages when it searches for possible duplicates.

Dealing with Records That Cannot Be Combined

If the system cannot combine duplicate records, it displays a screen that tells you which records could not be combined and why. The reasons can include the following: • The records have different genders. • The records are duplicate LDS Church membership records. • The records are too large because they have too many combined records. This is a temporary problem. • One or both records are about living individuals (records of individuals born within the last 110 years that do not have death information). If you were allowed to combine these records, then the individual’s record would be treated as if he or she were living.

Only users who are directly related to the individual would then be able to see the record. This might prevent you or the original contributor from seeing it. • The records have restrictions that limit the types of changes that can be made or who can make changes. These restrictions may prevent you from combining the records.

Requesting That Duplicate Records Be Combined or Separated

You may find that the system does not allow you to combine or separate some records. In some cases, you can request that a system administrator combine or separate them for you. Important: A system administrator cannot combine records if the resulting record would be too large. These large records create problems in the system.

To make that request, please send feedback. In your feedback, be prepared to provide the following information: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper identification number. (This is usually the last five characters in your membership record number, which your membership clerk can get for you.) If you do not know your number, you can see or select one in your user profile. • Whether you want records to be combined or separated. • The Person Identifier, name, birth date, and birthplace found on the records to be combined or the record with information to be separated. If the records have more than one version of this information, you can include just one. If the record does not contain all of this information, provide as much as you can, particularly the Person Identifier. • If possible, a source or reason that verifies why the records should be combined or separated.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

Requesting That Duplicate LDS Church Membership Records Be Combined

Occasionally you may find that an individual has two records that came from LDS Church membership records. The usual reasons are that the records have slightly different birth dates or that the spelling of the last name is slightly different. You cannot combine these duplicates yourself. You can, however, request a correction. How you request that the duplicate records be combined depends on if the individual with the duplicate records is living or deceased.

• If the individual is still alive, the correction will have to be made by the membership clerk of the ward or branch where the member lives. Note: The clerk does not combine the membership records in the new FamilySearch website. Instead, he has to work with Church headquarters to get the records combined. When the membership records are combined, the correction appears automatically in the new FamilySearch website. • If the individual is deceased, you can follow the steps below to request the correction.

1. Use the system to combine records. The system tells you which records cannot be combined and the reason. If both records came from LDS Church membership records, you see a link that you can use to request a correction. 2. Click To request a correction, click here. This link appears beneath the person identifier. A form appears that you can fill out to request the change. 3. In the first section, select your relationship to the individual. 4. In the third section, click the option Resolve duplicate membership records if it is not already selected. You see the duplicate records. 5. Click the correct record. Sometimes it does not matter which record you click because both contain correct information. For example, the records might have the same name with different capitalization. 6. Click Done. 7. Review the information. 8. Click Submit.

A system administrator will review the request and combine any duplicate Church membership records found. Once the membership records have been corrected, an updated, combined record is sent to the system and appears automatically.

Handling Records That Are Too Large to Combine

Some records cannot be combined because the resulting record would be too large. These large records create serious problems for the system. This is a temporary problem. You cannot do much about these records until the system is fixed. Until then, do the following:

• Keep a list of large records to combine later when the system is repaired.

The What’s New document will inform you when this occurs. • Work on other records in your family line. • Do not redo ordinances. This means that the ordinances won’t show on this person until the problem is resolved and the records are combined.

Before you can perform temple ordinances for your ancestors, information about them must be in the new FamilySearch website. This website automatically determines whether it contains enough information about individuals for temple ordinances to be performed. If it contains enough information, it helps you prepare to perform the ordinances.

The Prevention of Duplicate Ordinances

When you prepare to perform an individual’s temple ordinances, you should ensure that the ordinances have not already been done. President Gordon B. Hinckley said:

One of the most troublesome aspects of our temple activity is that as we get more and more temples scattered across the earth there is duplication of effort in proxy work. People in various nations simultaneously work on the same family lines and come up with the same names. They do not know that those in other areas are doing the same thing. We, therefore, have been engaged for some time in a very difficult undertaking. To avoid such duplication, the solution lies in complex computer technology (“Opening Remarks,” Ensign, Nov. 2005, pp. 5–6).

The new FamilySearch website is this computer technology. It prevents duplication of ordinances in these ways: • It contains the most recent information about completed temple ordinances. Information about completed ordinances is usually added to the system within 24 hours. • If an individual’s ordinances have been completed, the system prevents them from being performed again. • You can reserve an individual’s ordinances. If other users try to do the same ordinances, the system tells them that those ordinances are “reserved” by someone else. Occasionally you may find that someone else has already performed or reserved ordinances that you would like to perform. Please honor the work being done by others. Do not add duplicate records into the system just so you can perform the ordinances. Duplication of ordinances, however well meaning, should be avoided.

Preparing to Perform Ordinances for Ancestors

Before you perform ordinances for your ancestors, you need to prepare the information that will be needed at the temple. To prepare to do ordinances, you need to do the following: 1. Find ancestors who need ordinances and reserve the ordinances. 2. Determine whether the ordinances are already done. 3. Print a “Family Ordinance Request.” A Family Ordinance Request lists the ordinances that you have selected and the individuals for whom you will perform them. You then take the Family Ordinance Request to the temple, where temple workers can print the family ordinance cards that will be used to record the ordinances.

Part 1. Reserving Ordinances for Ancestors

The first part of performing ordinances for your ancestors is finding the ancestors who need the ordinances and reserving the ordinances. After you reserve ordinances, no one else can do them. These reserved ordinances appear on your Temple Ordinances, where you can print a Family Ordinance Request to take to the temple. Important: If the individual was born in the last 95 years, please obtain permission from the closest living relative before you reserve the ordinances. Relatives may not want the ordinances performed or may want to perform the ordinances themselves. The closest living relatives are, in this order: • An undivorced spouse. (The spouse to whom the individual was married when he or she died.) • An adult child. • A parent. • A brother or sister. To see your reserved ordinances and print a Family Ordinance Request to take to the temple, click the Temple Ordinances tab.

Reserving Ordinances for a Family or Individual

You can quickly find out whether anyone in a family on the pedigree needs ordinances. If they do, you can reserve all of the ordinances at once or select the family members whose ordinances you want to do.

1. Click the Me and My Ancestors tab. 2. If you are on the Individual List view, change to the Family Pedigree with Details view or the Family Tree view. a. Click Change View. b. Select Family Pedigree with Details or Family Tree. Tip: You can display many more generations on the Family Tree view. Therefore, you might find families who need ordinances more quickly by using that view screen.

3. Navigate to the family whose temple ordinances you want to check.

4. Click the icon that indicates the family needs ordinances:

• If you are on the Family Tree view, click (This family needs temple ordinances. Click here to do them.) • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, click (This family needs temple ordinances. Click here to do them.) A list of the family members and the status of each family member’s ordinances appears. 5. Review the list of ordinances: a. (Optional) Click the check box of each individual whose ordinances you do not want to do. b. Click Continue. 6. If the individual was born in the last 95 years, indicate whether you are the closest living relative or have permission to do the ordinances from the closest living relative. The closest living relatives are, in this order: • An undivorced spouse. (The spouse to whom the individual was married when he or she died.) • An adult child. • A parent. • A brother or sister. If you need to obtain permission to do ordinances, verbal approval is acceptable. Family members should work together to determine when the ordinances will be done and who will do them. a. Click the option that best describes your situation. If you click None of the above, the system does not reserve the ordinances for anyone in the family who was born less than 95 years ago. b. Click Continue. 7. Click Church policies, and carefully read the policies. Scroll to read the policies. Important: Please perform ordinances only for people to whom you are related. The only exception would be for a close friend whose closest living relative has given permission for the ordinances to be performed. If the policies indicate that you should not do these ordinances, please click Cancel.

8. Click I have read and will comply with the above statements. You do not have to click Hide before you continue. 9. Click Add to Temple Ordinances List.

If the system finds records that might be duplicates, you can compare them. If the records are about the same individual, you combine them. Combining duplicate records helps determine if the ordinances are already done. After you combine the duplicate records, the system adds to your Temple Ordinances list all of the ordinances that are not yet done. To see your Temple Ordinances list, click the Temple Ordinances tab.

Reserving Ordinances of Individuals from a GEDCOM File

When you import a GEDCOM file, you can reserve the ordinances of all or some of the individuals who were in that file. Before you can reserve ordinances from a GEDCOM file, contribute the GEDCOM file first. Then let the system finish processing the file.

1. Click the Home tab. 2. Click GEDCOM Files That I Added. A list of the GEDCOM files that you contributed appears. Note: This option appears on the page if you have contributed a GEDCOM file.

5. To reserve the ordinances of an individual from the GEDCOM file, Click (This family needs temple ordinances. Click here to do them). 6. Review the list of ordinances: a. (Optional) Click the check box of each individual whose ordinances you do not want to do. b. Click Continue. 7. If the individual was born in the last 95 years, indicate whether you are the closest living relative or have permission to do the ordinances from the closest living relative. The closest living relatives are, in this order: • An undivorced spouse. (The spouse to whom the individual was married when he or she died.) • An adult child. • A parent. • A brother or sister. If you need to obtain permission to do ordinances, verbal approval is acceptable. Family members should work together to determine when the ordinances will be done and who will do them. a. Click the option that best describes your situation. If you click None of the above, the system does not reserve the ordinances for anyone in the family who was born less than 95 years ago. b. Click Continue. 8. Click Church policies, and carefully read the policies. Scroll to read the policies. Important: Please perform ordinances only for people to whom you are related. The only exception would be for a close friend whose closest living relative has given permission for the ordinances to be performed. If the policies indicate that you should not do these ordinances, please click Cancel.

9. Click I have read and will comply with the above statements. You do not have to click Hide before you continue.

10. Click Add to Temple Ordinances List.

Tips for Determining Why Ordinances Have the Status “Needs More Information”

The ordinance status “Needs more information” indicates that an individual’s record does not have enough information for ordinances to be performed. To see what typical problems cause this ordinances status, click Needs more information. You can often make simple corrections that let you reserve the ordinances. The system indicates that an individual’s ordinance status is “Needs more information” for one or more of the following reasons: • The individual’s name contains invalid punctuation marks, numbers, or words that are not technically part of the name. • The individual’s record lacks a valid name or event. • An invalid name or event is selected on the individual’s summary. • The individual’s gender is listed as “Unknown.” • A couple’s marriage event lacks a standardized date or standardized place-name. • An individual is not linked to a spouse or parents. In this case, the sealing ordinances have the status “Needs more information.” The name or event information that is selected on the summary of a spouse’s or parent’s record can also cause the sealing ordinance to have the status “Needs more information.”

Invalid Names

The name that is selected on the individual's summary must be valid. When you evaluate the name, consider whether the name selected on the summary is valid:

Possible Problem Solution The name contains invalid punctuation If the record contains a correct version of marks. This situation commonly occurs the name that does not have the parenthe- because a nickname, initials, or similar ses or quotation marks, select it for the information was entered in parentheses or summary. quotation marks. If the record does not contain a correct For example, the following names would version of the name, add it. cause the “Needs more information” status You can add the information that was to appear: deleted from the name to a Nickname field, Michael "Mike" Alfred Smith another field, or the notes. Richard Wheeler (Dr.)

The name contains words that are not part If the record contains a correct version of of the name. Instead, they describe a rela- the name, select it for the summary. tionship or status, such as one of the If the record does not contain a correct following: version of the name, add it. Stillborn

Possible Problem Solution Child If you want to keep the information that Son was in the name, add it to a different place Daughter in the record, such as the notes. Father Mother Twin

This is not a complete list. But look for words that are not names.

The name contains a number. If the record contains a correct version of the name, select it for the summary. Note: Roman numerals that indicate a generation, such as “John William Wiley, If the record does not contain a correct III” are allowed. version of the name, add it.

The name contains information other than Add or select a version of the name that the name. contains only name information. Note: Some users add information in a Name field to tell other users not to combine this record with another. Before you reserve the ordinances for a record like this, please contact the user who put the note in the name.

The name contains words that are classified If the record contains a correct version of with the wrong name part. For example, the name, select it for the summary. an initial is classified as a last name. If the record does not contain a correct version of the name, either add a new version of the name, or edit your version of the name. Before you save the name, you can verify and correct the name parts.

Unknown Gender

The individual's gender must be male or female. Even though you can indicate the gender is unknown, you cannot do the ordinances until you know the gender.

Incomplete or Invalid Event Information

An individual’s record must contain at least one of these events:

Birth Christening Marriage Death Burial

The event must contain both a standardized date and a standardized place-name. The place-name must contain at least the name of the country.

The version of the event that is selected on the summary must contain both a standardized date and a standardized place-name. When you evaluate the event information, look for one of the following problems:

Possible Problem Solution The record does not contain one of the Add the event if you know it. required events. Note: You can see most of the required events on the Summary section of the details. To see or add marriage events, go to the Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children sections of the details.

The summary lists an event that contains In the Summary, select a version of the only a date or place, not both. event that contains both a standardized date and place-name. If the record does not contain an event with both a standardized date and place- name, add one.

The summary lists an event that contains In the Summary, select a version of the a date or place-name that has not been event that contains both a standardized standardized. date and place-name. A nonstandard place-name often lacks a If the record does not contain an event country name, does not include all proper with both a standardized date and place- jurisdiction levels (such as counties or name, add one. districts), or uses abbreviations.

Missing Relationship Information

Sometimes you see that only a sealing ordinance has the status “Needs more information.” Consider the following reasons: • The individual is not linked to a spouse or parents. • The name of the spouse or parents is either missing or invalid. • The records of the spouse or parents do not contain the required event information.

Getting Information about Ordinances Listed as “Not Available”

The ordinance status “Not Available” means that an individual’s ordinance information is not available to the public. If you are related to this individual, you can request more information about the individual’s ordinance status.

1. On the LDS Ordinances portion of the details, click one of the Not Available links.

An explanation of “Not Available” appears. 2. Read the explanation. If the individual was born before A.D. 1500, please look for possible duplicates that indicate the ordinances are done. The records for individuals born before A.D. 1500 are usually very complex. Please do not combine records unless you are certain that they are about the same individual. 3. If the explanation did not answer your question, click please click here to contact support. 4. Enter the requested information, and click Submit. You see a page explaining what will happen. Tip: Print this page. If you have questions about the status of your request, include the Help Center case number, which appears on this page.

Your request is sent to a system administrator. You will receive a reply by e-mail. If you were given permission to do incomplete ordinances, the family ordinance cards will be mailed to you.

Guidelines for Reserving Ordinances

As you reserve ordinances, be aware of a few guidelines. • Before you reserve ordinances for individuals who were born in the last 95 years, please get permission from the closest living relative. The closest living relatives are, in this order: spouse, then children, then parents, then siblings. Verbal permission is acceptable. • Reserve ordinances for your deceased ancestors. Do not reserve ordinances for celebrities, Holocaust survivors, and other individuals who are outside of your family line unless the individual is a close, personal friend for whom you have permission to do the ordinances. • There is no limit on the amount of time that ordinances can be on your Temple Ordinances list, but try to get them done in a timely manner. • If you have many ancestors who need ordinances, we recommend that you do not print large numbers of family ordinance cards to give to others. It is very easy for cards to be lost. And even though you can reprint lost cards, there is a risk that the ordinances will be done again if the original cards are found.

Instead, do one of the following if possible: • Encourage your relatives to use the new FamilySearch website to select and reserve the ordinances that they would like to perform. • Assign ordinances to the temple.

Temple Icons

You can use the temple icons to identify whether a family’s temple ordinances are needed.

Temple Icons on the Family Pedigree with Details View

The following icons appear: • . One or more ordinances have the status of “Ready.” • . All of the ordinances for this individual and his or her family are completed or not needed. Important: The sealing of the parents to their parents may not be done. To check those ordinances, display the parents’ parents on the family pedigree, and check their temple icons. • . This icon indicates that an individual or someone in his or her family may need ordinances. Specifically, this icon indicates that at least one ordinance has one of the following ordinance statuses: • “Needs more information” • “Not ready” • “Not available” • “On hold” • “Reserved” • “In progress”

Temple Icons on the Family Tree View and the List of Individuals in a GEDCOM File

The following icons appear: • . At least one individual in the family has incomplete ordinance information. The individual’s record contains enough information for ordinances to be performed. Note: When the system says that an ordinance is “Ready,” it does not necessarily mean that you can or should perform the ordinances. The ordinances might be done. The system will help you check for duplicate records later. You also need to make sure that you are following Church policies. For example, you should not perform ordinances for people who are not in your family line. You should obtain permission from the closest living relative before performing ordinances for someone who was born in the last 95 years. • . This icon indicates one of the following:

- A family member needs ordinances, but his or her record does not contain the required information. - A family member’s ordinances are not done but he or she has not been deceased for one year. - The system does not display the individual’s ordinance information. Instead, it displays the ordinance status “Not available.” The system displays this status when it needs to protect the privacy of ordinance information, such as when an individual in the family is living. • . The ordinances for all family members are either done or not needed. Important: The sealing of the parents to their parents may not be done. To check those ordinances, display the parents’ parents on the family pedigree, and check their temple icons. • . The ordinances for all family members are reserved or in progress. • . The system could not load the ordinance information. Try again later.

Part 2. Determining Whether the Ordinances Are Already Done

Before the system reserves ordinances for you, it checks for other records about the individual. These other records, which are called “possible duplicates,” may indicate that ordinances are already completed. If the system finds possible duplicates, review them carefully. Combine the records if they are about the same individual. If the ordinances are not already done, the system reserves them for you and puts them on your Temple Ordinances list. Important: If the system finds other records about this individual, it is important that you combine them, even if you disagree with some of the information. When you look at possible duplicates, ask yourself, “Are these records about the same individual?” If they are, combine them. The ordinances do not need to be redone, even if the genealogical information contains errors. If you believe that some of the information is incorrect, please combine the records anyway. Then begin a discussion to work with other contributors to correct the information.

1. Wait while the system looks for possible duplicates. • If it finds possible duplicates, the system shows the first one to you. Continue with the next step. • If it does not find any possible duplicates, the system tells you so. Click OK, and skip to step 6.

2. Compare the possible duplicate to the record on the left. Caution: Two children in a family with the same name may not be the same individual. In some countries, if a child died young, the next child born of that same gender was often given the same name as the child who died. Carefully compare birth and death information before combining the records. Tip: If the same father, mother, spouse, or child is listed on both records, put your mouse cursor on the family member’s name. If the name is highlighted on both the right and left records, then both records are linked to the same record about that family member. For example, if you put your mouse cursor on the spouse’s name and the name is highlighted on the right and left records, then both the records are linked to the same spouse. This is a strong indication that the two records are about the same individual.

3. (Optional) To see the details about any individual listed on the page, click the individual’s name. To close the details, click Close. The individual’s details open beneath the individual whose record you are reviewing. 4. At the bottom of the page, click one of the following options: • Click Yes, combine the information if these records seem to be identical and if they are about the same individual. The system will combine the records. • Click Yes, but some information is different if the records are about the same individual but some of the information is different. The system will combine the records. • Click No, or I cannot tell if the records are not about the same individual or if you cannot tell. The system will not combine the records. They will remain on the list of possible duplicates until someone adds enough information to one or both of them that the system no longer considers them possible duplicates.

5. Indicate what you want to do next: • If you have more possible duplicates to compare, click Next to display the next one. Compare each possible duplicate. • To go to a previous possible duplicate, click Previous. • When you are finished comparing possible duplicates, click Done. • If you want to quit reviewing possible duplicates, click Cancel. No records are combined. The system combines the records that you indicate are about the same individual. 6. (Optional) If you want to print a Family Ordinance Request now, click Go to Temple Ordinances List.

The LDS Ordinance portion of the individual’s details now shows the ordinance status “Reserved.” When you are ready to perform the ordinances, display the temple ordinances list. There you can select the ordinances that you want to perform and print a Family Ordinance Request.

Part 3. Printing a Family Ordinance Request

After you resolve possible duplicates, go to your temple ordinances list. There you can select the ordinances that you want to perform next and print a Family Ordinance Request. You can select ordinances for about 50 individuals on one Family Ordinance Request. Select only the number of ordinances that you can complete in a reasonable amount of time. Important: Please do not print a separate Family Ordinance Request for each individual whose ordinances you want to perform. At the temple, it takes more time to print the cards for several requests with one name each. It also wastes paper because each sheet of paper contains only one card.

Tip: To select all of the ordinances on the list, click the check box that appears in the column heading above the check boxes. If the individual has no check box, then you assigned all of his or her ordinances to the temple. If the temple has not yet started performing the ordinances, you can assign them back to you and print the cards. If you see instead of a check box, one of the following occurred: • The prerequisite ordinances are not done. Either someone else has reserved them, or they are assigned to the temple. For example, you see this triangle if you reserved an individual’s endowment but someone else has reserved but not yet performed the baptism, confirmation, and initiatory. If you assigned the prerequisite ordinances to the temple and if the temple has not yet started performing the ordinances, you can assign them back to you and print the cards. • The individual no longer qualifies for temple ordinances. To see why the individual no longer qualifies, click . Common reasons include the following: - The system uses rules to determine whether an individual’s record contains enough information for ordinances. When these rules change, some records no longer contain enough information for ordinances to be done. You can often make simple corrections that allow the ordinances to be done. For example, make sure that the Name field contains only the individual’s name. Make sure the place-names include country names. - The individual’s record changed. It no longer has enough information for ordinances. For example, an event place was deleted. - Someone selected a different name, gender, or event on the summary. That version of the name, gender, or event does not allow ordinances to be done. To solve this problem, you add or select a death event that contains the name of the country where the death occurred. - Someone combined the individual that you reserved with another record. The record either indicates that the ordinances done, or it lacks the information required for temple ordinances.

3. Click Print or Reprint Request. Important: Do not use your browser’s print feature. This prints your Temple Ordinances list, not a Family Ordinance Request. The system shows you the individuals and ordinances that you selected for the request. 4. (Optional) Click the check box of any ordinance that you do not want to do right now. 5. Click Print Request. The system displays a message to explain what happens. If the family ordinance card was printed and then lost, the system reminds you to destroy the card if you find it later. 6. Click OK. The system asks if your request printed correctly. 7. Indicate if your Family Ordinance Request printed correctly. • If it printed correctly, click Yes. • If not, click No. The system tries to print the request again. If the request does not print because your printer has a problem, check the following before you try to print it again:

- Adobe Reader is installed on the computer. - Pop-up blockers are turned off. - The printer is turned on. - The printer has paper. - The cables are all properly connected. - There is not a paper jam or other printer malfunction.

The system indicates that the ordinances are now “In Progress.” Take the Family Ordinance Request to the temple. Temple workers will print the family ordinance cards that you will use while you perform the ordinances. As you perform the ordinances, temple workers record them and send the information back to the new FamilySearch website. There is no time limit on how long you can take to perform the ordinances after you print a Family Ordinance Request or family ordinance cards.

Reprinting Family Ordinance Requests and Family Ordinance Cards

Occasionally, a Family Ordinance Request or family ordinance cards are lost or destroyed. You can reprint these items on the Temple Ordinances tab. You cannot directly reprint family ordinance cards. Instead, select the individuals or couples whose cards you need to reprint. The system prints a Family Ordinance Request that you can take to the temple. There, temple workers will reprint the cards for you. If you performed some of the ordinances before a card was lost, the new cards indicate which ordinances are already done. This information helps prevent the ordinances from being performed again. If you reprint cards and then find the originals, please destroy the originals. Doing the ordinance on both cards results in duplicate ordinances. The steps for printing and reprinting Family Ordinance Requests are the same. Please see the above section for details.

Seeing an Individual’s Ordinance Information

If you want to perform an individual’s ordinances, you can quickly determine which ordinances are needed. If needed, you can then reserve the ordinances for the individual and his or her family.

1. Click the Me and My Ancestors tab. 2. Click the name of the individual or the individual’s parents or spouse. 3. Display the individual’s complete details: • If you are on the Family Pedigree with Details view, the complete details appear automatically beneath the pedigree. • If you are on the Family Tree view, you can either double-click the individual or click View Details, which is located in the right panel. • If you are on the Individual List view, click View Details, which is located in the right panel.

The individual’s complete details appear. 4. If you want to see the ordinance status of a family member instead of the individual, follow these steps: a. Click either Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children, depending on which family the individual was a part of. b. Click the individual’s name. The individual’s details appear. 5. Click LDS Ordinances.

If an ordinance has been done multiple times, the earliest ordinance date should be the one displayed.

If you want to reserve the ordinances for the individual and his or her family, click (This family needs temple ordinances. Click here to do them.) If you do not want to do ordinances for the entire family, click the Temple Ordinances tab, and unreserve them.

Monitoring the Completion of Ordinances

When you assign ordinances to the temple or give cards to family and friends, you can use your Temple Ordinances list to monitor the completion of those ordinances. In the column labeled “Ordinance Status,” the Temple Ordinances list shows each ordinance that is available for the individual. It also indicates the following information: • Whether the Family Ordinance Request has been printed. • Whether the ordinances are done. Use the legend, which is located in the upper right part of the temple ordinances list, to learn what the different colors mean. You can also hover your mouse pointer over the ordinance to see an explanation. After all of an individual’s ordinances are done, the system automatically removes him or her from the Temple Ordinances list.

Displaying and Printing the Temple Ordinances List

The Temple Ordinances list allows you to see all individuals whose ordinances you have reserved and individuals whose ordinances you have done. Printing the Temple Ordinances list can help you manage and track family ordinance cards and ordinances. For example, you can write the names of the people to whom you have given cards. Important: If you want to do the ordinances, print a Family Ordinance Request, not the Temple Ordinances list.

3. (Optional) To print a list of the individuals whose ordinances you have reserved, click your browser’s File menu, and then click Print.

Why an Individual Appears More Than Once on the Temple Ordinances List

The same individual can appear more than once on the temple ordinances list. This typically happens with sealings and when ordinances are assigned to the temple. • Sealings are on separate lines from an individual’s baptism, confirmation, initiatory, and endowment. Each sealing appears on a new line. • When you assign some of an individual’s ordinances to the temple, the ordinances that are assigned to the temple appear on a different line from the ordinances that are assigned to you.

Sorting Information in the Temple Ordinances List

Within the Temple Ordinances list, you can sort the information found within columns. Information displayed in columns can be sorted alphabetically, chronologically, or numerically.

If you sort the list by the name, the list is sorted alphabetically by the last name of the individual. Individuals with no first name appear at the top of the list. Because the first name is listed first, the list may appear unsorted. When you sign out of the system and come back in, the list is sorted in its original order. You cannot save the sort order from one session to the next.

Resizing the Columns in a List

You can make columns wider or thinner. This lets you display more of the information found within a column.

2. Left click the mouse, and drag the column lines to the position that you want.

When you sign out of the system and come back in, the columns are in their original size. You cannot save the column size from one session to the next.

Reordering the Columns in a List

You can change the order in which data appears in a list so that you can see the information in different columns closer together.

When you sign out of the system and come back in, the columns are in their original order. You cannot save the order of the columns from one session to the next.

Ordinance Abbreviations Used on the Temple Ordinances List

The abbreviations B, C, I, E, SP, and SS represent the names of each of the temple ordinances. You see these abbreviations on the Temple Ordinances tab, under the column heading “Ordinance Status.” The following table lists the abbreviations and their meanings:

Letter Ordinance B Baptism C Confirmation I Initiatory E Endowment SP Sealing to parents SS Sealing to spouse

How Ordinance Statuses Change When Ordinances Are Assigned to the Temple

When you assign ordinances to the temple, the temple ensures that the ordinances are performed in the correct order. The ordinance statuses tell you which ordinances are done, which are being performed, and which are still on the list waiting to be performed.

Action Ordinance Status Ordinance Status on the Temple Ordinance in the Individual’s Ordinances Tab Icon Details You The system shows the The individual is added to your reserve an ordinances as Temple Ordinances list. The ordi- “Reserved.” Your nance status indicates that the family display name and ordinance cards are not printed.

Action Ordinance Status Ordinance Status on the Temple Ordinance in the Individual’s Ordinances Tab Icon Details individ- contact information ual’s ordi- also appear. nances. You assign The system shows the The ordinance status changes to “On an individ- ordinances as hold.” ual’s ordi- “Reserved.” The The Assigned To column indicates nances to contact name of the which ordinances are assigned to the the user who reserved the temple. You can still assign the ordi- temple. ordinance also shows. nance back to yourself. You cannot see that the ordinance is assigned to the temple. A temple The ordinances that The ordinance status indicates that receives the temple receives the card has been printed. all or have the status “In The Assigned To column contains a some of progress.” lock, indicating that you cannot the ordi- If a temple did not assign the individual’s ordinances nances receive all of the ordi- back to yourself. and nances or if some of begins to them are assigned to work on you, the remaining them. ordinances have the status “On hold” until the temple completes the ordinances that it received. When the temple completes the ordinances, the status of the remaining ordinances changes from “On hold” to “Reserved.” When this change happens, you can do one of the following: • If the remaining ordinances are assigned to the temple, you can wait for the temple to do them or assign them back to yourself. • If the remaining ordinances are

Action Ordinance Status Ordinance Status on the Temple Ordinance in the Individual’s Ordinances Tab Icon Details assigned to you, you can now print a Family Ordi- nance Request and perform them. You can also assign them to the temple.

An ordi- The ordinance date The ordinance status indicates that nance is and temple are added the ordinance is done. done. to the system.

How Ordinance Statuses Change When the Ordinances Are Assigned to You

When you reserve ordinances, the ordinance statuses help ensure that the ordinances are performed in the correct order. They also can help you track the completion of the ordinances.

Action Ordinance Status Ordinance Status on the Ordinance in the Individual’s Temple Ordinances Tab Icon Details You reserve The system shows the The individual is added to your an individ- ordinances as Temple Ordinances list. The ordi- ual’s ordi- “Reserved.” Your nance status indicates that the nances. display name and family ordinance cards are not contact information printed. also appear. You print a The status of all ordi- The ordinance status indicates the Family Ordi- nances that were ordinances for which the Family nance included on the Ordinance Request or cards were Request for Family Ordinance printed. the reserved Request change to “In ordinances. progress.” If you do not include all of an individual’s ordinances on the request, the status of the remaining ordinances is “Reserved.”

You have The ordinance status The ordinance status indicates the the family in the LDS Ordi- ordinances for which the Family ordinance nances portion of the Ordinance Request or cards were cards details remains “In printed. printed. progress.”

Action Ordinance Status Ordinance Status on the Ordinance in the Individual’s Temple Ordinances Tab Icon Details You perform The system shows the The ordinance status indicates one of an date when and which ordinances are done. individual’s temple where the ordinances. ordinance was performed. You perform The system shows the The system automatically removes all of an date when and the individual from the Temple individual’s temple where the Ordinances list. ordinances. ordinances were performed.

Problems and Solutions Related to Family Ordinance Cards

After you print a family ordinance card, you may notice that some of the information on the card is incorrect. You may find that the ordinances are already done or that you printed more cards than you and your family can get done. Cards might get lost or damaged. You can solve these types of problems.

Problem Resolution The card contains incorrect infor- Do the ordinances using the current card. Then mation about the individual. The correct the details in the new FamilySearch website. errors are minor, such as an incorrect spelling of the name or an inaccurate date or place. The card contains serious errors, such as the following: 1. Unreserve the individual. 2. To prevent the ordinances from being • You printed a card for the wrong performed by mistake, destroy the card. individual. 3. Correct the information in the system, and • The gender is wrong. reserve the ordinances again. • The individual never existed. 4. Print a new Family Ordinance Request • The wrong spouse or parents are containing the correct individuals and ordi- listed for sealings. nances.

Your name, address, or telephone Perform the ordinances using the current card. number is wrong. Then make sure that your user profile in the new FamilySearch website contains your correct name, address, and telephone number. Tip: The system prints the display name and address from your user profile on family ordinance cards. If you want your cards to use a different name or address, change your user profile. If you reprint the cards, be sure to delete the originals so that you do not duplicate the ordinances.

The ordinances are already done. Unreserve the individual. If needed, combine the duplicate records.

Problem Resolution The card you originally printed Check your Temple Ordinances list to see if the cannot be used for reasons such as ordinances are done. If not, print another Family these: Ordinance Request for the ordinances. Take it to • You lost the card. the temple to have the cards reprinted. • You gave the card to someone and cannot get it back. • The card is damaged.

You printed more cards than you Remove the individuals from your temple ordi- and your family can get done. nances list, and destroy the family ordinance cards. The system makes the ordinances available for other users to reserve and perform. You printed more cards than you Take the cards to the temple, and ask the staff to can get done, and you want the assign them to the temple. temple to perform them.

Canceling the Reservation of Ordinances (“Unreserving” Ordinances)

If you no longer want to see that an individual’s temple ordinances get performed, you can cancel your reservation. The incomplete ordinances become available for other users of the system to reserve. Whether you can unreserve an reserve an ordinance depends on whether the ordinance has been assigned to a temple and what the temple has done with the ordinance. The following table indicates when you can unreserve an ordinance:

To Whom the What Has Happened Ordinance Can You Unre- Ordinance Is Icon serve the Ordi- Assigned nance? You You reserved the ordinance. Yes

You You have printed a Family Ordi- Yes. If you do, nance Request for this ordinance. please destroy The family ordinance card might the Family Ordi- also be printed. nance Request or card. You A preliminary ordinance that is Yes assigned to the temple is not yet done. Temple The temple has not yet started the Yes ordinance. Temple The temple has started the ordi- No nance.

1. If the Temple Ordinances list is not already showing, click the Temple Ordinances tab.

At the bottom of the screen, a progress bar indicates how much of the list has been loaded. 2. Click the individual’s Unreserve link. This link appears on the right side of the screen. Caution: If you have assigned ordinances to the temple and the temple has printed out those ordinances for someone to do, you see a Remove link instead of an Unreserve link. Do not click the Remove link, or one of the following results happens: • If your Temple Ordinances list does not contain another line with ordinances for this individual, clicking this link does nothing. • If your list contains another line with a sealing for this individual, the system unreserves both the individual’s ordinances and all of the ordinances for the spouses or parents involved in the sealing. After you click the Unreserve link, the system displays a message telling you that the ordinances are no longer reserved. If you have cards for incomplete ordinances, the system reminds you to destroy the cards to prevent the ordinances from being performed more than once.

The individuals are removed from the list. Ordinances that are not yet done are made available for other Church members to reserve. If you canceled a reservation for the wrong individual, simply reserve the individual’s ordinances again. The individual reappears on your temple ordinances list.

Using Personal Ancestral File and Similar Programs to Reserve Temple Ordinances

To do the temple ordinances for the names in your personal database, you have to contribute information to the new FamilySearch website. You can get your information into the new FamilySearch website in one of these ways:

• Use a certified third-party computer program to synchronize your database with the new FamilySearch website. Some of these third-party programs, called “PAF add-ins” can be used from within Personal Ancestral File. • Contribute a small GEDCOM file that contains the names you want to do. • Reenter the information into the new FamilySearch website.

After the information is in, use the new FamilySearch website to reserve the ordinances and print a Family Ordinance Request. Note: If you use a certified third-party computer program, you might also be able to use your program to reserve the ordinances and print the Family Ordinance Request.

Getting Others to Help with Temple Ordinances

When you reserve ordinances, other Church members can help you perform the ordinances for your ancestors. You can coordinate the temple work among your family and friends, or you can assign the ordinances to the temple. The temple will arrange for the ordinances to be performed by temple patrons.

In the past, people who had many ordinances to do often printed many family ordinance cards at a time and gave the cards to family and friends. They did this for a number of reasons, such as the following: • They wanted to get as many cards as possible while they had access to TempleReady at a family history center. • They provide baptisms for a large youth group to do. They then have large numbers of initiatories and endowments to do, and these ordinances take more time. Managing large numbers of cards creates some problems, such as the following: • It can take a long time to perform all of the ordinances on all of the cards. • The person distributing the cards has to keep close track of where the cards are. • Cards get lost. The person tracking the completion of the ordinances may not have known whether the ordinances were performed. With the convenience of the new FamilySearch website, you may find that you can have smaller numbers of cards printed each time. This reduces the amount of tracking you need to do. When you provide baptisms for youth temple trips, you can reserve only the baptism and confirmation. You can leave the remaining ordinances for other Church members to reserve, or you can assign them to the temple.

Having Family and Friends Do Temple Ordinances for You

If family or friends will perform some of the ordinances that you reserved, get the family ordinance cards printed at the temple. Then distribute them to the people who will help. It is not recommended that you print large numbers of cards to give to others.

1. Print a Family Ordinance Request for the names. The Family Ordinance Request is sent to your computer as a PDF file. You need Adobe Reader 8.0 or higher to view and print it. 2. Take the request to the temple Tip: If it is more convenient, save the Family Ordinance Request to your computer, and e-mail the PDF file to the person who will perform the ordinances. That person can print the Family Ordinance Request, take it to the temple, and have the cards printed. The cards will contain your name and address because you prepared the request. The temple personnel will use the request to print the family ordinance cards for you. 3. Distribute the cards to the people who will help you perform the ordinances. 4. (Optional) Track who has the cards, especially if more than one person performs ordinances for an individual (for example, one person performs the baptism and confirmation, and another person performs the initiatory). Tip: One way to track the cards is to print your temple ordinances list and write the name of the person who has the card on the list. Update the list when the card is returned to you.

As the ordinances are completed and recorded, the ordinance dates appear in the system. Use the Temple Ordinances list to track completion. When an individual’s ordinances are completed, the system automatically removes him or her from the temple ordinances list.

Assigning Ordinances to the Temple or Yourself

When you reserve names, you can assign the ordinances to the temple. The temple gives the ordinances to temple patrons who do not bring family names to the temple. After you assign ordinances to the temple, you can assign the ordinances back to yourself until the temple begins the process of performing the ordinances. Consider assigning the ordinances to the temple under these circumstances: • Your family line has more ordinances than you and your family can perform. • You are not able to go to the temple, and you want the ordinances completed soon.

1. If the Temple Ordinances list is not already showing, click the Temple Ordinances tab. At the bottom of the screen, a progress bar indicates how much of the list has been loaded. 2. Decide which individual you want to assign to the temple. 3. Click the individual’s Reassign link. The Reassign link is located in the Assigned To column, on the right side of the list. The Assigned To column indicates who is currently assigned to do the ordinances. It contains either your name or the word “Temple.” If you also see a lock icon, the following table explains what it means:

Table 1: What the Lock Icon ( ) Means

What Is Next to What the Lock Icon Means the Lock Icon The lock icon is next The ordinances are assigned to you, and you have already to your contact printed a Family Ordinance Request or family ordinance card name containing those ordinances. If you want to assign the ordinances to the temple, do the following: 1. Unreserve the individual from your Temple Ordinances list. 2. Reserve the individual’s ordinances again. 3. Assign the ordinances to the temple. 4. If possible, destroy the duplicate family ordinance card or Family Ordinance Request.

The lock icon is next All of the individual’s ordinances are assigned to the temple, to the word and the temple has started doing at least one of them. You “Temple” cannot assign the ordinances back to yourself. Caution: Instead of an Unreserve link, you see a Remove link instead of an Unreserve link. Do not click the Remove link, or one of the following results will happen: • If your Temple Ordinances list does not contain another line with ordinances for this individual, clicking this link does nothing. • If your list contains another line with a sealing for this individual, the system unreserves both the individual’s

What Is Next to What the Lock Icon Means the Lock Icon ordinances and all of the ordinances for the spouses or parents involved in the sealing.

4. For each ordinance that you want to reassign, click the Assigned To drop-down list, and select who will do the ordinances. 5. When you have finished assigning ordinances for this individual, click OK. You may need to scroll down to see the OK button.

Your Temple Ordinances list reappears. Tip: You can sort the Temple Ordinances list so that all of the ordinances assigned to you or the temple appear at the top of the list. Click the Assigned to column heading once to see the ordinances sorted one way. Click it again to sort the list the other way. Use the ordinance icons to track completion of the ordinances:

• Blue icons ( ) indicate one of the following: - If the ordinance is assigned to the temple, the temple has not started doing it. - If the ordinance is assigned to you, at least one preliminary ordinance is assigned to the temple. You cannot do the ordinance until the temple completes the preliminary ones.

• Green icons ( ) mean that the ordinance has been printed. If the ordinance is assigned to you, you printed the ordinance on a Family Ordinance Request. If the ordinance is assigned to the temple, the temple printed the ordinance for someone to do. • Gray icons ( ) mean the ordinance is done. Hover your mouse cursor over the icon to see the date and temple. After all of an individual’s ordinances are done, the system automatically removes him or her from the Temple Ordinances list.

Where Ordinances Assigned to the Temples Go

When you assign ordinances to the temple, the system sends the ordinances to a temple that is able to perform them. Most ordinances are sent to any temple that needs them. Some ordinances are sent to specific temples.

Roman (English and Most European Languages)

If the individual’s name is recorded in the roman alphabet only, the ordinance might be sent to any temple that needs ordinances.

Cyrillic (Russian, Mongolian, and so forth)

If an individual’s name is recorded in Cyrillic characters, the ordinances are assigned as follows: • If the name was entered on the Cyrillic template, will be sent to the Kyiv Ukraine Temple when it opens.

• If the name was entered on the Mongolian template, it is sent to a Chinese temple. If the Chinese temples cannot get the ordinances done, they are sent to another temple that accepts Mongolian.

Chinese, Thai, and Cambodian

If the individual’s name is recorded in Simplified Chinese or Traditional Chinese, the ordinances are sent to the Hong Kong China Temple, the Taipei Taiwan Temple, or any other temple that is set up to accept Chinese. Thai and Cambodian are sent to temples that accept these languages.

Japanese

If the individual’s name is recorded in Japanese characters, the ordinances are sent to a temple in Japan. If the temples in Japan cannot get the ordinances done, they are sent to another temple that accepts Japanese.

Korean

If the individual’s name is recorded in Korean characters, the ordinances are sent to the Seoul Korea Temple. If that temple cannot get the ordinances done, they are sent to another temple that accepts Korean.

Switching from TempleReady to the New FamilySearch Website

When the new FamilySearch website becomes available in your area, TempleReady will be phased out. You should start adding your family history information to the website as soon as it is available in your area. There are several benefits. • The website uses more sophisticated rules than TempleReady to determine whether an individual or couple has enough information for ordinances to be performed. You may find that you can now perform ordinances that TempleReady would have prevented. For example, you may find that an individual qualifies for ordinances even though the record lacks dates or places. This is because the website uses relationships in addition to dates and places to qualify individuals for temple ordinances. • The website contains the most current temple ordinance information. You will have a much lower chance of duplicating ordinance work if you use the website than if you use TempleReady. • With the website, you can easily make ordinances available for others to perform. You can also see immediately when these ordinances are done. • You may find others who are working on shared family lines. This can minimize duplication of research and data entry efforts. It can also foster enduring family relationships. • The website is available from anywhere you can use the Internet, not just in family history centers.

Using Family Ordinance Cards Printed with a TempleReady Disk

Family ordinance cards that were printed with TempleReady will work after the new FamilySearch website is released in your area. If you have these cards, however, you may want to make sure the ordinances have not been performed since you printed the cards.

1. In the new FamilySearch website, find an individual for whom you have a family ordinance card. 2. Check the individual’s ordinance status. It takes less time to check the status than it does to redo ordinances. The ordinances may have been performed by someone else since the International Genealogical Index was last updated. 3. Claim the information about this individual that was part of your TempleReady submission. This allows the website to display these ordinances on your Temple Ordinances list, where you can do the following: • Monitor the completion of the ordinances. • Assign the ordinances to the temple. • Remove an individual’s ordinances from the list, which allows other Church members to reserve the ordinances. 4. If the individual’s ordinances are done, remove the individual from your Temple Ordinances list, and destroy the card. The individual does not appear on your Temple Ordinances list until you receive notice that the submission in which he or she was included has been assigned to you. 5. Perform any remaining ordinances.

Adding a TempleReady Submission File

If a Church member has a TempleReady submission file for which the family ordinance cards have not been printed, a family history consultant or family history center director can convert the file to a Family Ordinance Request. The member can then take the request to the temple to have the cards printed. To add a TempleReady submission file, you must be registered with FamilySearch Support as a family history consultant or family history center director. If you have one of these callings but have not yet registered with FamilySearch Support, you can do so at consul tant.familysearch.org. Please be prepared to provide your membership record number, your ward or branch unit number, the name of your ward or branch, and the name of your stake. You can obtain this information from your membership clerk. Be aware of the following issues when you convert a TempleReady submission file: • The new FamilySearch Web site and TempleReady use different rules to determine whether an individual has enough information for ordinances to be done. When you convert a TempleReady submission file to a Family Ordinance Request, the new FamilySearch website re-examines each record to determine whether it contains enough information for ordinances to be performed. Some individuals may no longer have enough information. Very often, you can make simple corrections to the record that will allow the ordinances to be performed. • The new FamilySearch Web site does not recheck the records to see if the ordinances are already done. There is a possibility that the ordinances may be duplicated.

1. Sign in to the new FamilySearch website with your own sign-in name and password. 2. Sign in to help the Church member who has the TempleReady submission file. 3. Place the TempleReady floppy disk into the disk drive. 4. Click the Add a TempleReady Submission option. A warning appears that reminds you that processing a TempleReady disk may increase duplication. 5. Click the Continue button. 6. Click the Browse button, and find the submission file. The submission file should be listed on the computer’s A drive. The file name will have a .sub extension at the end. 7. Double-click on the file to select it. The system adds the information to the Location and file name field. 8. Select who will perform the ordinances. • If the patron wants to perform the ordinances, click the I will do the ordinances button. • If the patron wants the temple to perform the ordinances, click the Assign the ordinances to others button.

9. Click the Continue button. The system displays a message that asks you to wait while the file is received. Then it will display a screen that indicates the results might be ready. 10. Click the See Results Now button. If the system has not finished adding the file, it displays a message that the processing is not finished. • If the file is a small one, click the Check again button. Usually the results will be ready. • If the file is larger, click the Check later button. Wait for awhile, and then click GEDCOM Files That I Added. From the list of GEDCOM files, click the submission file. Then click Print the Family Ordinance Request. Note: It may take several minutes to process the file.

11. When the system has finished adding the file, it displays the file summary and totals: • If the patron will perform the ordinances, click the Print the Family Ordinance Request link. • If the temple will perform the ordinances, click the Done button. FamilySearch will return you to the Home page.

12. If the patron will perform the ordinances, the system tells you that the Family Ordinance Request has been saved. Click the Print Request button. Your browser’s print screen will be displayed. 13. Print the Family Ordinance Request. The system asks if the request printed correctly. 14. Get the Family Ordinance Request from the printer, and review it to make sure it printed correctly. • If the request printed correctly, click the Yes button. The system returns you to the Home page. • If the request did not print correctly, click the No, Print Again button. The system reprints it. If it prints correctly this time, click the Yes button.

The individuals in the TempleReady submission file are added to the system. The Family Ordinance Request prints. Tip: The GEDCOM results allow you to see each individual in the submission file. If the Church member that you are helping has access to the new FamilySearch, you may want to suggest that he or she use this result list to see whether the system has duplicate records for each individual in the submission file.

Checking a TempleReady Submission File for Possible Duplicates

When the new FamilySearch website processes a TempleReady submission file, it does not check to see if each individual’s ordinances are already done. The system, however, will identify possible duplicates for each individual in the file. If you combine the duplicate records, the individuals in the submission file are connected into their proper place in the pedigree. Important: If you are a family history consultant, family history director, or temple worker, you do not need to check the submission file for possible duplicates before you print a Family Ordinance Request. Nor do you need to require the member to do it. Simply print the request for the member. If the member wants to recheck the ordinances for duplication, you can show him or her how to do it.

1. Click the Home tab. 2. Click GEDCOM Files That I Added. A list of the GEDCOM files that you contributed appears. Note: This option appears on the page if you have contributed a GEDCOM file.

Handling Individuals in a TempleReady Submission File Who Did Not Qualify for Ordinances

When the new FamilySearch website finishes processing a TempleReady submission file, it displays a screen that tells you the results of the upload. This screen may tell you that some individuals did not “qualify” for ordinances. This means the system does not have enough information to allow the ordinances to be performed. You can often make simple corrections that allow the ordinance to be performed. If you are a family history consultant or temple worker, make sure that you are signed in to help the person with the TempleReady submission file.

Common reasons that an individual did not qualify include the following: • The places of birth, christening, marriage, death, or burial are not standardized. The new FamilySearch website requires a standardized place for ordinances to be done. • The individual’s gender is listed as “Unknown.” The new FamilySearch website requires the gender to be “male” or “female.” • Relationships to parents and spouses were not correctly established when the information was transferred from the submission file to the new FamilySearch website. Relationships are required for sealings. • The records of the father, mother, or spouse do not contain death information. The system considers that they may still be living. Review each individual who does not qualify to see whether you can make simple changes that will allow the ordinances to be performed.

1. Click the Home tab. 2. Click GEDCOM Files That I Added. A list of the GEDCOM files that you contributed appears. Note: This option appears on the page if you have contributed a GEDCOM file.

3. Click the submission file whose results you want to see. Submission files have the extension .SUB at the end of the file name. GEDCOM files have .GED. The results appear. If the system has finished processing your file, you will see how many individuals and families were added, how many were new, and whether some individuals did not qualify. 4. Click the See list link that appears next to the number of individuals who did not qualify. 5. For each individual on the list, determine whether simple corrections may allow the ordinances to be performed: a. On the list of GEDCOM results, click the individual’s name. The individual’s details appear. b. To see what ordinances did not qualify, click LDS Ordinances, and look for the ordinance status “Needs more information.” c. If an individual needs more information for baptism, confirmation, initiatory, or endowment, click the Details button. d. Look for the following problems, which can usually be corrected easily: • The individual’s gender is listed as “Unknown.” • The individual was born less than 110 years ago, and the record contains no death information. • The individual is not connected to family members. This prevents sealings from being done. • The place-names have not been standardized. Tip: To determine whether a place-name has been standardized, hover the mouse pointer over the place-name. If it has been standardized, the standard appears in a small pop-up. If the place has not been standardized, no small pop-up appears.

e. If the individual needs more information for sealing to spouse, click Spouse and Children, and examine the marriage information. Look for the following problems, which can usually be corrected easily: • The spouse is not correctly linked to the individual.

• The spouse’s record contains no death information. • The marriage place has not been standardized. Tip: To determine whether a place-name has been standardized, hover the mouse pointer over the marriage place. If it has been standardized, the standard appears in a small pop-up. If the place has not been standardized, no small pop-up appears.

f. If the individual needs more information for sealing to parents or if the parents did not qualify for sealing to spouse, click Parents and Siblings, and examine the marriage information. Look for the following problems, which can usually be corrected easily: • The individual is not correctly linked to the parents. • The records of the father or mother do not contain death information. • The marriage place has not been standardized. Tip: To determine whether a place-name has been standardized, hover the mouse pointer over the marriage place. If it has been standardized, the standard appears in a small pop-up. If the place has not been standardized, no small pop-up appears.

g. To close the details, click Close. 6. If you decide to make corrections, follow these steps: a. Click the Go to link that is next to the individual’s name on the list of GEDCOM results. The individual’s pedigree appears. Because submission files do not contain large amounts of relationship information, the individual’s record does not contain much information. b. If it is not already open, click the Details button. c. Make the needed corrections. Tip: While you correct an individual’s record, you may also want to click the Possible Duplicates button to determine whether the system already contains information about this individual. If you find duplicates, you can combine them. The system then connects the individual from the submission file to the rest of the information that the system contains about him or her.

If the ordinances are still needed, reserve them. When you are ready to perform the ordinances, print a Family Ordinance Request.

Finding Temple Information (Schedules, Driving Directions, etc.)

You can obtain up-to-date information about temples throughout the world. The information includes the following: • A discussion about the purposes of the temple. • Useful information about individual temples, such as an address and telephone number for the temple, directions for getting there, schedules, etc. • A discussion about temple and family history work. • Answers to frequently asked questions about temples and temple work.

1. Click the Home tab. 2. Click See Temple Information (Schedules, Driving Directions, etc.). A new browser window opens with the temple section of www.lds.org showing. 3. Click the links for the type of information that you want to see. 4. When you are finished, click the X button that appears in the upper-right corner. The temple section of www.lds.org closes.

Appendix A Guidelines for Entering Names

Correctly entering the names of individuals is important. • Names identify the individuals in a family line. They appear on pedigrees, family group records, and in the details. • You must also use an individual’s name when you search for individuals. You can also specify gender to help limit the search results. • The system uses names and gender to identify possible duplicates. • Name and gender are required for temple work to be done.

Guidelines for Entering Names in English, Spanish, and Other European Languages

Follow these guidelines for entering names in English, Spanish, and other European languages. • Enter the individual’s full name in the same order in which it would be spoken. • Use initial capital letters for names. You may use all capital letters for last names if you want, but it is not required. • Enter last names for all children. (In some cultures, children do not have the same last names as parents.) • Enter a woman’s maiden name, not her married name. • You do not need to use slashes around the last name. • If an individual has a title (such as those used for nobility, clergy, military ranks, professional affiliations, and scholastic achievements), please enter the information. You can do it in one of two ways: - Enter the title in the Full Name field. The system helps you clarify the parts of the name. - Add a field for a title of nobility to the page, and enter the title in it. To add this field, near the bottom of the Add Individual page, click the Add more information link. • You can enter accent marks and other diacritics as needed. • You can enter names in Cyrillic, Greek, and other alphabets. • If an individual had more than one name, enter the individual’s main, legal name. Then add more name fields, and enter the other names in them. You can use additional name fields to keep track of spelling variations, the same name in different languages, name changes, aliases, nicknames, and so forth. To add another name field to the page, near the bottom of the Add Individual page, click the Add more information link. • Use the Latin template for Spanish and Portuguese names. It helps ensure that the first and last names are properly identified. You can also use this template if you prefer to enter first and last names in different fields. To select a different template,

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 221 click the Template drop-down list, which is located in the lower-right corner of screens on which you can add or edit a name.

Examples of Names in English, Spanish, and Other European Languages

Use the following examples to help you decide how to enter names in English, Spanish, and other European languages.

English Examples

Elizabeth Blackshaw Carl William Brandt Matthew William Harman Jr. Brian David Oviatte III

Spanish Examples

Jose Estebán Martinez Delgado María Anna Padilla Lopez Juan Angel de la Cruz Vasquez Ovalle

Portuguese Examples

Bernardo Duarte Preto Maria Angelica Domingues Lima Maria da Conceição

French Examples

René Emile Donné Charlette Antoinette Vuatrin Anne Gerard-George Jean-Baptiste Boulanger

German Examples

Anna Katharine Dorothea Weiß Carl Friedrich Wilhelm Müller Adolph Mein

Scandinavian Examples

Thor Mikkel Hegland Kristi Olavsdatter Lien Mette Christine Gottfredson Kirstine Marie Ehlers Jörgen Christian Jensen Ingrid Hendricksdotter

Guidelines for Entering Names in Asian Languages

Follow these guidelines for entering names in Asian languages such as Chinese, Japanese, and Korean. • If the field for the romanized name is blank, the system automatically enters the name in roman characters if you enter it in one of these character sets:

Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Japanese katakana Korean hangul

You can correct the romanization if needed. Entering the name in roman characters helps the search feature in the system. It also allows Church members who do not read Chinese, Japanese, or Korean to help you with the ordinances. • Use the data entry template for your language. It provides separate fields for family names and given names. The template also provides fields for entering the same name in different scripts. To select a different template, click the Template drop-down list, which is located in the lower-right corner of screens on which you can add or edit a name. • If you have Asian ancestry but do not know how to enter the characters from that language, enter your information in the roman alphabet (used in English and other European languages). • You can enter names in Thai, Cambodian, Laotian, Vietnamese, or other scripts. • If an individual had more than one name, enter the individual’s main, legal name. Then add more name fields, and enter the other names in them. You can use additional name fields to keep track of spelling variations, the same name in different languages, name changes, aliases, nicknames, burial names, temple names of emperors, milk names, and so forth. To add another name field to the page, near the bottom of the Add Individual page, click the Add more information link.

Examples of Names in Asian Languages

Use the following examples to help you decide how to enter names in Asian languages.

Chinese Examples

You can enter Chinese names in Chinese and roman characters. If you need to correct the romanization of a name, please use one of the following systems to romanize names: • For Mandarin Chinese: Pinyin • For Cantonese Chinese: Lau or Yale • For Taiwanese Chinese: Ziran Pinyi

Japanese Examples

You can enter Japanese names in kanji (Chinese), katakana (phonetic), and roman characters. The system automatically adds the roman characters for you if you enter the name in kanji. If you need to change the romanization of a name, please use the Hepburn or Nohon system. Please use the examples below to enter the name in each field:

Kanji: Phonetic: Roman: Kei Hirase

Kanji: Phonetic: Roman: Ichiro Hasegawa

Korean Examples

You can enter Korean names in hangul (Phonetic), hanja (Chinese) and roman characters. Note: Hangul and roman are required. Hanja (Chinese) is optional. The system automatically adds the roman characters for you if you enter the name in hangul. Please use the examples below to enter the name in each field:

Correctly entering the dates of events and facts is important. • Dates can help distinguish individuals who have the same or similar names. • You can use dates to help you more accurately search for individuals. • The system uses dates to identify possible duplicates. • The system uses dates and other information to determine if an individual has enough information for temple ordinances to be done. • Knowing when an individual lived can help you understand what his or her life might have been like. • Knowing when an individual lived can also help you find records that may contain more information about him or her.

Entering Dates Using the Gregorian Calendar

If you have a Gregorian or Julian calendar date, enter as much of it as you know. If the system cannot interpret the date correctly, it asks you to select the correct date. For example, if you enter 3/11/1955, it asks you to indicate whether the date was 3 November 1955 or 11 March 1955.

Complete Dates

If you have a complete date, you can enter it as shown in the following examples:

23 March 1842 23 Mar 1842 March 23, 1842 1842 March 23 3/23/1842 23/3/1842 1842/3/23

Partial Dates

If you have a partial date, enter as much as you know:

12/1845 Dec 1845 1845 Dec 1799

Double dates are important to many genealogists who do research in the records of Great Britain and its colonies and possessions, including colonial America and Canada. For dates that occurred between 1 January and 24 March in the years from 1582 to 1752, genealogists may use double dates to clarify information they find in records. You may also see double dates written in the records themselves. In 1582/1583, 1582 is the year according to the Julian calendar, and 1583 is the year according to the Gregorian calendar. You can enter double (or dual) dates as follows:

24 Feb 1721/1722 16 January 1613/14 4 February 1590/1

What Are the Gregorian and Julian Calendars?

The Gregorian calendar is the calendar commonly used in Western and Westernized countries. It corrected the Julian calendar, which, because of miscalculated leap years, fell behind the solar year by several days. The Gregorian calendar is divided into 12 months: January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, and December. The first day of the year is 1 January. Different countries began using the Gregorian calendar at different times. Some adopted it as early as 1582. Others adopted it as late as 1927. Some Orthodox Christian churches still use the Julian calendar. Many countries do not use the Gregorian calendar. When a country switched from the Julian calendar to the Gregorian calendar, several days were omitted to bring the calendar in line with the solar year. Also at that time, the first day of the year changed from 25 March to 1 January. If a date is after 15 October 1582, the system interprets a date using the Gregorian calendar. If the date is before then, the system interprets the date as being from the Julian calendar.

Entering Dates Using the Lunar Calendars of China, Japan, and Korea

The system correctly interprets dates from the lunar calendars used in China, Japan, and Korea if you enter them in Chinese-based characters. If you cannot enter the date in Chinese-based characters, convert the date to the Gregorian calendar, and enter it into the system. The system interprets the date correctly and can search on and sort your information accurately.

Chinese Examples

Korean Examples

Chinese: Korean:

People of the world use and have used many other calendars, such as the Christian Ecclesiastical (which uses feast dates), French Revolutionary, Soviet, Persian, Hindu, Arabic, and Hebrew calendars. Some cultures do not or did not use a formal calendar. Instead, they relate events to information such as seasons, phases of the moon, and other events such as wars or natural disasters. If you have a date that does not correspond to a calendar that the system supports, you can use one of these strategies: • If possible, convert the date to the Gregorian calendar, and enter it in the Date field. Enter at least the year. Then, the system can search on and sort your information accurately. If you want, you can enter the original form of the date in the notes. • If you cannot convert the date to the Gregorian calendar, enter it in its original form in the Date field. The system cannot search on and sort your information accurately, but at least the information is available.

Other Guidelines

Alternative Dates

If you are not sure on what day or during what year an event occurred, enter each possible date in separate Date fields. To add another Date field, near the bottom of the Add Individual page, click Add more information.

Children Who Died before Age 8

If an infant or child was born alive but died before age 8, you can indicate the fact in one of several ways. • If you know them, enter the birth and death dates. The system calculates the age of the individual at death to determine which ordinances are needed. • If you do not know an exact death date, from the drop-down list next to the Death date field, select the After option. Then enter the last year that you know the child was alive. • If the child was not born in the covenant, the system tells you that the sealing-to-parent ordinance is needed.

Stillborn Infants

If an infant was stillborn (born dead), from the drop-down list that is available for the Birth and Death fields, select the word Stillborn. Because stillborn children do not need any ordinances, the system prevents all ordinances from being done. In records from some countries, “stillborn” does not necessarily mean that an infant was born dead. If the child was born in one of these countries, the system allows the sealing-to-parent ordinance to be done, just in case the child was born alive and died shortly thereafter.

If a couple lived together or had children together but never married, leave the Marriage date field blank. If you want to explain that the couple never married, you can enter the information in the family notes.

Appendix C Guidelines for Entering Places

Correctly entering places of events and facts is important. • Places can help distinguish individuals who have the same or similar names. • You can use places to help you more accurately search for individuals. • The system uses places to identify possible duplicates. • The system uses places and other information to determine if an individual has enough information for temple ordinances to be done. • Knowing where an individual lived can help you understand what his or her life might have been like. • Knowing where an individual lived can also help you find records that may contain more information about him or her.

Guidelines for Entering Places in English, Spanish, and Other European Languages

When you enter place-names in a romanized alphabet (such as the one used in English, Spanish, and other European languages), please follow these guidelines. • Enter the place-name as it existed when the event occurred. You do not need to identify the modern place-name. • If you know them, enter all of the levels, such as cities, counties, regions, districts, prefectures, provinces, states, and countries. If you do not know all of the levels, the system helps you to add them. • Enter a comma and a space between the levels. • Enter as much information as you know. Do not make up information. • The system may be able to provide only limited help with some places, especially as they changed over time. If it cannot help you identify the correct place, simply enter as much information as you know. • Enter the smallest government level first, and move to the largest. For example, start with the town, and end with the country. • Include the name of the country whenever possible. If you leave it off, the system adds it to the standardized version. • You can spell the place in your own language or in its native language. However, when the system standardizes it, the place-name might be displayed in English. If you entered accent marks or other diacritics, they may not be in the standardized version.

Use the following examples to help you decide how to enter places in English, Spanish, and other European languages.

English Examples

Chicago, Cook, Illinois* Southampton, Southampton, England* Dafen, Carmarthen, Wales* Doncaster, Victoria, Australia Akaroa, Canterbury, New Zealand

*If you enter the place without the country, FamilySearch will add it for you when it standardizes the place-name.

Spanish Examples

Ixhuacán de los Reyes, Vera Cruz, México Chimaltenango, Chimaltenango, Guatemala Chitré, Herrera, Panamá Ancasti, Catamarca, Argentina Villarrica, Guairá, Paraguay Zalla, Vizcaya, Spain

Portuguese Examples

Lomba dos Palheiros, Guarda, Portugal Curitiba, Paraná, Brazil Beira, Sofala, Mozambique

French Examples

Beulotte-St-Laurent, Haute-Saône, France Montréal, Ile de Montréal, Québec, Canada Genève, Genève, Switzerland Bech, Luxembourg

German Examples

Köln, Nordrhein-Westfalen Lande, Germany Courgenay, Bern, Switzerland Jennersdorf, Burgenland, Austria Vaduz, Vaduz, Liechtenstein

Scandinavian Examples

Jetsmark, Hjørring, Denmark Viitasaari, Vaasa, Finland Fell, Stranda, Iceland

Guidelines for Entering Places in Asian Languages

When you enter place-names using the writing system of an Asian language, please follow these guidelines. • Enter as much information as you know. Do not make up information. • Start with the largest government level, and move to the smallest. For example, start with the country and end with the village. • Include the name of the country whenever possible. • You can enter the place-name in characters from the native language or in roman characters. • Although the system is not translated into all Asian languages, you can enter place-names in Thai, Vietnamese, Cambodian, or other languages if you need to. • Enter the name and levels as they were when the event occurred. You do not need to identify the modern place-name. • Enter as many levels as you know (such as town, village, city, district, prefecture, province, and country). • If you enter the place-name in roman characters, enter commas and spaces between the government levels.

Examples of Places in Asian Languages

Use the following examples to help you decide how to enter places in Asian languages.

Chinese Examples

Mainland China

Hong Kong and Macao

Incomplete Place-Names

Japanese Examples

Korean Examples

Other Guidelines

Assumed Places

An assumed place is based on a place where one member of a family was born, died, or lived at some time, or where the husband and wife were married. For example, someone may have entered the place where a couple was married as the assumed place of a child’s birth. For an assumed place, people sometimes enter the word of before the place-name, such as of Atena, Salerno, Italy. If you do not know an exact place, enter as much as you know, even if it is only the country name. Do not enter the word “of.” If you do not know the place, leave the Place field blank. If you would like to keep track of an assumed place for research purposes, enter the assumed place-name in the notes.

In the place field, enter the name of the place where the cemetery or hospital was located. Enter the name of the cemetery or hospital in the notes.

Rural Areas and Landmarks

Sometimes, especially when dealing with rural areas, you may find a landmark or other description instead of or in addition to a town or city name. Enter as complete a place-name as you can. Enter any additional details in the notes. For example, if your ancestor was born near Crawfish Creek in Marion County of Tennessee in the United States, you would enter the following in the Place field: Marion, Tennessee, United States In the notes, you can record that this event occurred near Crawfish Creek.

Nomadic or Tribal Peoples

Boundaries on political maps may not correspond to those accepted by nomadic or tribal peoples, such as native peoples and gypsies. In such cases, provide as complete a place-name as you can, or enter the name of a place that was nearby. Include a detailed explanation in the notes. You can also include names of tribes, clans, ancestral homes, clan seats, and other similar information as facts.

Parishes and Religious Jurisdictions

When you obtain information from church records, the place information may reflect the ecclesiastical (religious) jurisdiction rather than the governmental jurisdiction. For example, if a christening occurred in a parish named St. Martin, you would enter it as follows: Salisbury St. Martin, Wiltshire, England

Appendix D Icons Used in the System

The system uses several icons, which both communicate information and allow you to use features.

Icons Used on the Family Pedigree with Details View

The Family Pedigree with Details view uses severa icons to communicate information and provide access to features.

Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon At least one individual in You see the status of each ordi- the family has incomplete nance for each member of the ordinance information, and family. You can reserve ordi- the ordinances can be nances with the status of reserved. “Ready.” The ordinances for the You can see the ordinance couple and their children statuses of the individual or are either done or not family. needed. Important: The sealing of the parents to their parents may not be done. To check those ordinances, display the parents’ parents on the family pedigree, and check their temple icons.

Someone in the family may need ordinances. Specifically, this symbol indicates that at least one ordinance has one of the following ordinance statuses: • “Needs more information” • “Not ready” • “Not available” • “On hold” • “Reserved”

The individual is male. Nothing.

The individual is female. Nothing.

The individual’s gender is Nothing. not known. The individual has other You can see a list of the spouses spouses. and display a different spouse on the screen. The individual has other You can see a list of the parents parents. Click this icon to and display different ones on see them. the screen. Move to the main position. The individual and his or her spouse move to the main position on the pedigree.

Icons Used on the Family Tree View

The Family Tree view uses severa icons to communicate information and provide access to features.

This icon indicates one of You see the status of each ordi- the following: nance for each member of the • A family member needs family. ordinances, but his or her record does not contain the required information. • A family member’s ordinances are not done, but he or she has not been deceased for one year.

238 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon • The system does not display the individual’s ordinance status.

The ordinances for all You see the status of each ordi- family members are reserved nance for each member of the or in progress. This icon is family. used on the Family Tree view only. The system could not load Nothing. the ordinance information. Please try again later.

Navigation Moves the Family Tree view up, down, right, or left. Clicking the square in the middle centers the information on the screen.

Zoom Bar Increases or decreases the size of the Family Tree view.

Highlight Individual Highlights an individual in yellow to make him or her more easily seen on the Family Tree view. Align Family Aligns an ancestral line in a straight, easy-to-follow path.

Show Ancestors Displays one more generation of an individual’s ancestors.

Show Descendants Displays the children of an individual listed on the view screen.

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 239 Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon Show Summary Information Displays personal information about an individual.

Show Family Information Displays the spouse and children of an individual who has been highlighted in the view screen. Extend pedigree Expands an ancestral line one more generation.

Collapse pedigree Collapses the end of an ancestral line by one generation after it has been opened. Male The individual’s details appear in the right panel. Female The individual’s details appear in the right panel. The individual has other You can see a list of the spouses spouses. and display a different spouse on the screen.

The individual has other You can see a list of the parents parents. and display different ones on the screen.

Icons Used on the Individual List View

The Individual List view uses several icons to communicate an individual’s gender and to provide access to many different features.

Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon Highlight Individual Nothing.

Align Family Nothing.

Show Ancestors Displays one more generation of an individual’s ancestors.

Show Descendants Displays the children of an individual listed on the view screen.

Show Summary Information Displays personal information about an individual.

Show Family Information Displays the spouse and children of an individual who has been highlighted in the view screen. The individual is male. Nothing. The individual is female. Nothing.

Icons Used in an Individual’s Details

The icons used in an individual’s details provide access to several features that you may want to use. Some of these icons appear on the details screen itself. Other appear on screens that appear when you are doing tasks that you begin from an individual’s details.

Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon Options exist for combin- You can use features such as ing, editing, deleting, or delete, combine, and so forth. removing disputes from the individual. Another user thinks this You can see more information information is incorrect. about the dispute. If you entered this dispute, you can add more information about it or remove it.

An individual has more A more detailed explanation spouses, children, or parents about the icon appears. than the system can display. This icon appears for individuals with a large amount of relationship information.

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 241 Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon The contributor can be Your e-mail program opens, and contacted by e-mail. you can send an e-mail to the contributor. The individual is male. Nothing.

The individual is female. Nothing.

The individual’s gender is Nothing. not known. You can add notes about the A screen on which you can add information. This icon is notes appears. located on screens where you can add notes to names, events, facts, and so forth. You are watching the indi- You stop watching the individ- vidual. ual. You are not watching the You start watching the individ- individual. ual. When you click Parents Nothing. and Siblings or Spouses and Children, blue lines show a child’s relationship to the father. When you click Parents Nothing. and Siblings or Spouses and Children, pink lines show a child’s relationship to the mother. When you click Parents Nothing. and Siblings or Spouses and Children, solid lines indicate that a child has a biological relationship to the parents. When you click Parents Nothing. and Siblings or Spouses and Children, long dashes indicate that a child has a step-relationship to the parent. When you click Parents Nothing. and Siblings or Spouses and Children, short dashes indicate that a child has a foster relationship to the parent.

242 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon When you click Parents Nothing. and Siblings or Spouses and Children, dashed lines indicates that a child has an adopted relationship to the parent.

Icons Used on the Temple Ordinances List

The icons used on the Temple Ordinances List indicate individual’s gender and important information about the ordinance status.

Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon Print Prints the currently displayed information.

The individual is male. On the pedigree, the individual’s details appear in the right panel. On the Temple Ordi- nances list, nothing happens. The individual is female. On the pedigree, the individual’s details appear in the right panel. On the Temple Ordi- nances list, nothing happens. A lock means one of the Nothing. Hover your mouse following: pointer over the icon to see • The ordinances are whether the ordinance status is assigned to you, and you “In progress” or “On hold.” have already printed a Family Ordinance Request or family ordinance card containing those ordinances. If you want to assign the ordinances to the temple, do the following: 1. Unreserve the individual from your Temple Ordinances list. 2. Reserve the individual’s ordinances again. 3. Assign the ordinances to the temple.

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 243 Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon 4. If possible, destroy the duplicate family ordinance card or Family Ordinance Request.

• All of the individual’s ordinances are assigned to the temple, and the temple has started doing at least one of them. You cannot assign the ordinances back to yourself.

On the Temple Ordinances Nothing. list, this indicates either that an individual’s record no longer contains enough information for temple ordinances to be performed or that the prerequisite ordinances are not yet done. An ordinance status icon Nothing. without a box indicates that the ordinance is not available for you to do. A blue ordinance box indi- Nothing. cates one of the following: • The ordinance is assigned to the temple. • The ordinance is on hold until the preliminary ordinances are done. These preliminary ordinances may be reserved by someone else or may be assigned to the temple.

A yellow ordinance box Nothing. indicates that the ordinances are reserved by you, but you have not printed them on a Family Ordi- nance Request. A green ordinance box indi- Nothing. cates that the Family Ordi- nance Request has been printed. Family ordinance

244 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon cards might or might not also be printed. A gray ordinance box indi- Nothing. cates that the ordinance is completed.

Note: The letters B, C, I, E, SS, and SP are abbreviations for the names of the ordinances. These same letters are used in all of the language translations of the system. These ordinance abbreviations are not translated.

Ordinance Abbreviations Used on the Temple Ordinances List

Letter Ordinance B Baptism C Confirmation I Initiatory E Endowment SP Sealing to parents SS Sealing to spouse

Icons Used on the Home Page

The Home page has one icon that provides access to the temple ordinances list.

Icon Meaning What Happens When You Click the Icon On the Home page, this You see the Temple Ordinances icon identifies your Temple list. Ordinances list, which contains the individuals whose ordinances you have reserved.

Appendix E Ordinance Statuses

When you display a deceased individual's ordinances, you will see either when the ordinance was done or a status.

Completed

If an ordinance is completed, you will see either the word “Completed” or the date when the ordinance occurred and the temple or place where it occurred.

Ready

You can prepare to take this ordinance to the temple if you follow Church policies. If you want to do this ordinance, the new FamilySearch Web site helps you look for duplicate records that indicate the ordinance is already done. Important: Please do not do ordinances that you should not. For example, to do ordinances for someone born in the last 95 years, you must either be the closest living relative or have permission from the closest living relative. Do not do ordinances for famous people or names gathered from unapproved extraction projects.

In Progress

This ordinance is in the process of being completed. Specifically, one of the following events has occurred: • Another FamilySearch user has already printed a Family Ordinance Request or family ordinance card with this ordinance. • The ordinance was assigned to the temple, and the temple is in the process of doing it. When the ordinance is done, the status will change to “Completed.”

Needs More Information

The individual needs more information or information needs to be corrected before you can do the ordinance. If you know it, add the following types of information: • Dates and places of birth, marriage, death and other events. Be sure that at least one of these events contains at least a country name in the place. • A death or burial place must have at least a standardized country name. • Gender. • Names of family members, such as the father, mother, spouse, or children. • If the individual was born within the last 110 years, please add the death or burial date and place. If you do not know the death date and place, please provide an approximate date, which helps the new FamilySearch website determine if the individual has been deceased for more than one year and if he or she died before age 8.

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 247 Also, please check the following: • In the individual's Summary, check that the name field has only a valid name. The name should contain only letters (no numbers or symbols). • Remove any invalid characters or symbols in the individual’s Details or Summary. • Check that the individual has the information required for ordinances.

Not Ready

This ordinance cannot be done because the individual has not been deceased for at least one year. When doing temple ordinances for recently deceased individuals, please respect the wishes of the closest living relatives (undivorced spouse, adult children, parents, and siblings, in that order).

Not Available

This individual’s ordinance information is not available to the public. The most common reasons for this are these: • Privacy reasons prevent the ordinances from being displayed. • The individual lived before A.D. 1500, and the ordinances are probably completed. If the individual lived before A.D. 1500, you can find out if the ordinances are already done by clicking the Possible Duplicates button. If you find other records for this individual, combine them. If the other records indicate that the ordinances are completed, the ordinance status will change to “Completed.”

Not Needed

This individual does not need this ordinance because he or she either was stillborn or died before age 8.

On Hold

Ordinances should be done in order. For example, the baptism should be done before the confirmation, and the confirmation before the initiatory. If you see “On hold,” someone has already printed a Family Ordinance Request or family ordinance cards for the prior ordinances. The later ordinances will be on hold until the prior ordinances are completed.

Reserved

Someone has already accepted the responsibility to do this ordinance. (You may be that individual.)

Born in the Covenant

Because this individual was born after the parents were sealed, he or she does not need to be sealed to parents.

Permission from Living Relatives

If the individual for whom you want to do an ordinance was born within the last 95 years, please obtain permission from the individual's closest living relative. (The closest living

248 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) relative is either an undivorced spouse, an adult child, a parent, or brother or sister in that order.) Please honor the wishes of relatives who do not want ordinances performed for someone born in the last 95 years. Verbal approval is acceptable. Family members should work together to determine when the ordinances will be done and who will do them.

Appendix F Policies for Preparing Names of Deceased Ancestors for Temple Work

Policies can help focus your family history efforts. As you prepare names for temple work, it can be helpful to understand what ordinances you are responsible for, what ordinances you can perform, what ordinances you should not perform, and what to do in unusual circumstances.

How Do I Prepare Ordinances for the Living?

No living ordinances are cleared in the new FamilySearch Web site. For living ordinances, see your bishop.

How Do I Seal Living People to Deceased Spouses, Parents, or Children?

Living people can be sealed to deceased spouses, parents, and children. For sealings to the dead (who have been deceased at least one year), living persons should make sure that all of the ordinances needed for the deceased (baptism, confirmation, initiatory, and endowment) have been performed before the sealing.

Sealing a Deceased Spouse to a Living Spouse

To be sealed to a deceased spouse, see your bishop. Then take the following items to the temple: • Your temple recommend and the Recommend for Living Ordinances. • A Family Ordinance Request for the deceased spouse if any ordinances need to be performed before the sealing. (See your family history consultant.) • A family group record that shows the living and the deceased family members to be sealed. (This is not required but is helpful to temple staff.) Note: A living woman may not be sealed to more than one man.

Sealing a Deceased Child to You and Your Spouse

To seal a deceased child to living parents, see your bishop. Then take the following items to the temple: • Your temple recommend.

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 251 • A Family Ordinance Request for the deceased child with all of the ordinances that are still needed for the deceased child before the sealing can be done. (See your family history consultant.) • A family group record that shows the living and the deceased family members to be sealed. (This is not required but is helpful to temple staff.)

Sealing Yourself to Deceased Parents

To be sealed to deceased parents, you must be baptized and endowed if you are 21 years or older. Then take the following items to the temple: • Your temple recommend. • A Family Ordinance Request with all ordinances still needed for the deceased parents before the sealing can be performed. (See your family history consultant.) • A family group record that shows the living and the deceased family members to be sealed. (This is not required but is helpful to temple staff.)

For Whom Should I Do Temple Ordinances?

Church members are responsible to provide temple ordinances for immediate family members and direct-line ancestors (parents, grandparents, great-grandparents, etc., and their families). • Ordinances can be provided without regard to worthiness, mental ability, or cause of death. • To perform ordinances for a deceased person born in the last 95 years, please obtain permission and honor the wishes of the closest living relative. The closest living relatives are, in this order: - An undivorced spouse. (The spouse to whom the individual was married when he or she died.) - An adult child. - A parent. - A brother or sister.

What Ordinances Should I Not Perform?

Church members should not submit individuals that they are not related to (with the exception of close friends). This includes: • Famous people. • Those gathered from unapproved extraction projects. • Jewish Holocaust victims. Members cannot perform the ordinances for these people except under the following conditions: - They are an immediate family member of the deceased (defined as parents, spouse, or children), or - They have permission of all living immediate family members, or - They have the permission of the closest living relative if no immediate family members are living.

Because there is already much duplication, members can only submit names of persons who lived before A.D. 1500 by contacting FamilySearch Support. For contact information, please go to https://contact.familysearch.org. Note: Please do not perform ordinances for people from the Bible, historical personalities, or those of royal or noble European lineages who were born before A.D. 1500, regardless of your relationship to them. These ordinances are either done or not needed. In your message, provide the following information: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • Your relationship to the individuals. • An explanation of why you believe the ordinances have never been done. • Documentation about the individual. Note: You no longer have to contact support to do ordinances for people born before A.D. 1500 in China, Korea, Japan, Taiwan, Singapore, or Malaysia.

Can I Perform Ordinances for People Who Are Not in My Immediate Family or Direct Family Line?

Church members may provide temple ordinances for the following family members who have been deceased at least one year. You need to get permission to perform ordinances for anyone born less than 95 years ago. • Biological, adoptive, step, and foster family lines connected to their family. • Collateral family lines (uncles, aunts, cousins, and their families). • Descendants. • Descendants of direct-line ancestors and their families. • Possible ancestors. These are individuals who have a probable family relationship that cannot be verified because the records are inadequate. These may include individuals who had the same last name and resided in the same small geographic areas as known ancestors. • Close friends. This is an exception to the rule that members should submit only the names of individuals of their own family and ancestors. Before performing ordinances for a friend, a member should obtain permission from the individual’s closest living relative.

How Do I Perform Ordinances for My Deceased, Immediate Family Members?

To perform ordinances for your immediate family members (parents, siblings, spouse, or children) who have been deceased at least one year, you may take to the temple a Family Ordinance Request that lists the family members who need ordinances.

Some ordinances are not needed for children who died before age 8, who were born in the covenant, or who were stillborn. • Children who died before age eight need only a sealing to parents (if they were not born in the covenant). No baptism or endowment is needed. • Children born in the covenant do not need to be sealed to parents. A child is born in the covenant if he or she is born after his or her mother has been sealed to a husband in a temple, regardless of who his or her father is or whether the sealing is canceled later. Note: If the mother or the man to whom she is sealed is excommunicated before the child’s birth, the child is not born in the covenant. • Stillborn children (children who die before birth) do not need temple ordinances. Important: In some countries, children who died shortly after birth were listed in vital records as stillborn. Countries that have sometimes listed live births as stillborn include Austria, Belgium, Czechoslovakia, German states (Baden, Bavaria, Germany, Hesse-Darmstadt, Prussia, Saxony, Thuringia, Württemberg), Denmark, Finland, France, Hungary, Iceland, Italy, Liechtenstein, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Sweden, and Switzerland. Children listed as stillborn on records from these countries may be sealed to their parents.

The new FamilySearch website uses information in a person’s record to determine whether ordinances are needed. Use these guidelines to help the Web site accurately make this determination:

Situation What You Should Do What the New Family- Search Website Does A child died Enter the child’s birth and death The website calculates the before age 8. information in the appropriate amount of time between the fields. birth and death. It then indicates the ordinances are not Note: If you know that a child needed. died before age 8 but do not know the exact death date, please enter If you later find out that the an estimated date. Without a death child died after age 8, correct date, the system assumes the child the birth or death date. The needs ordinances. website then allows the ordinances to be performed.

A child was born Do nothing. The website uses Church in the covenant. membership records to determine whether a child was born in the covenant. An infant was Choose the Stillborn option in The website evaluates the place stillborn. the Birth date field and Death date information. If the child was field. born in a country where a child recorded as stillborn may have actually died shortly after birth, the website allows the sealing-

254 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Situation What You Should Do What the New Family- Search Website Does to-parent ordinance in case the child was born alive. If the child was not born in one of these countries, the Web site lists the ordinances as “Not needed.”

When Should I Obtain Permission before Performing Ordinances for the Deceased?

Permission is sometimes required before performing temple ordinances for the deceased. Depending on the circumstances, you may need to obtain permission from the deceased’s closest living relative or the First Presidency.

Do I Need a Relative’s Permission to Perform Ordinances? (95-Year Rule)

Relatives may not want the ordinances performed or may want to perform the ordinances themselves. The closest living relatives are, in this order: • An undivorced spouse. (The spouse to whom the individual was married when he or she died.) • An adult child. • A parent. • A brother or sister. Verbal approval is acceptable. Family members should work together to determine when the ordinances will be done and who will do them.

Is First Presidency Approval Required before Ordinances Are Performed for Some People?

First Presidency approval is required before temple ordinances may be performed for deceased persons in some circumstances. • Members who at the time of death were excommunicated or who had their names removed from the records of the Church. • Members who advocated or entered into plural marriage after the time of the Manifesto in 1890. • Couples whose sealings were canceled. • Sealings of children to parents other than their biological or adoptive parents if the child, mother, or father is still alive. In these situations, the descendant or close relative may request consideration for the ordinances to be performed by writing to the:

Office of the First Presidency 47 East South Temple Street, Room 103

When Should I Talk to My Bishop before Performing Ordinances for the Deceased?

Please see your bishop for information before performing some ordinances. • Sealing a living person to a deceased spouse. • Ordinances for excommunicated members or members who had their names removed from Church records. You must be directly related to these individuals.

When Can I Perform Temple Ordinances for Someone Who Has Died?

Church members may perform ordinances for individuals who have been deceased for at least one year without regard to worthiness, mental ability, or cause of death.

When Can I Perform Ordinances for a Deceased, Worthy Church Member?

No waiting period is required for deceased, worthy members who would have gone to a temple but were prevented by reasons beyond their control. See your bishop for a letter confirming the person’s worthiness. • Worthy members who died within one year after baptism and confirmation can receive ordinances one year after their confirmation date. See your bishop for a letter confirming the individual’s worthiness. • Worthy members who died within one year after a civil marriage can be sealed one year after the civil marriage date. See your bishop.

When Can I Perform Ordinances for Someone Whose Death Date Is Unknown?

Persons born at least 110 years ago or married at least 95 years ago are assumed to be dead, and the ordinances can be performed.

When Can I Perform Ordinances for Someone Who Disappeared and Is Presumed Dead?

You may perform ordinances 10 years after the date of the presumed death. See your bishop. Persons presumed dead include: • Persons missing in action, lost at sea, or declared legally dead. • Persons who disappeared and death is apparent, although no body has been recovered.

For missing persons not presumed dead, you may perform ordinances 110 years after the birth. See your bishop.

What Information Is Required for Ordinances to Be Performed?

A minimum amount of information about deceased persons is required before temple ordinances can be performed on their behalf. As soon as the new FamilySearch website has enough information to uniquely identify the individual, it clears required ordinances. For individual ordinances, you must have the following information: Name Complete names are preferred. Partial names are acceptable if that is all you can find. Use the maiden name for females. Gender The gender must be either male or female. Death information Persons born at least 110 years ago or married at least 95 years ago are assumed to be dead. Persons whose children were born at least 110 years ago are assumed to be dead. If the system cannot assume that the person is dead, a death date or place is required. A country for birth, A standardized place for birth, christening, marriage, christening, marriage, death, or burial is required. The standardized place must death, or burial contain at least the name of the country. Enough information for This may include the following information: the new FamilySearch • Dates and places of events, such as birth, christening, website to uniquely marriage, death, and burial. identify the person • Names and relationships of family members, such as parents, siblings, spouse, children, and grandparents.

For a sealing to parents, you also need to know: The name of at least the You must provide at least his given name or surname. father Also provide the mother’s name if you have it. While it is possible to perform ordinances with minimal information, careful research for accurate and complete information before ordinance work will help prevent duplications. In the end, this will help accomplish more work for ancestors.

Can Ordinances Be Performed for Someone Whose Gender Is Not Known?

If the gender is unknown, you cannot perform ordinances. Please do as much research as you can to identify the gender.

Careful research for accurate dates helps prevent duplication. The following may apply to recording event dates: • It is best to enter only dates you know to be accurate and to leave the rest blank. • To perform ordinances, you must provide death information (a death date or death place) for all persons born within the last 110 years or married within the last 95 years. • If you cannot find an exact date, you can approximate or calculate the date based on the best information you can find. Use Before, After, or About dates as follows: - Approximated dates. If you know approximately when an ancestor died, use Before, After, or About and the year. For example, if the ancestor died during World War I, you may approximate the date as About 1916. Or if the most recent record you have shows the person was living in 1843, you may approximate the death date as After 1843. - Calculated dates. You may calculate birth dates from known information. For example if an 1860 census record indicates a child is two years old, you may calculate the child’s birth year as About 1858. • If you have access to the new FamilySearch website, you can later add correct dates when you find them. - Even if ordinances have been performed, you can add or correct event dates in the individual’s genealogical record; the ordinances are still valid. - Accurate event dates help reduce duplication of ordinances and provide information essential to discovering more ancestors.

What If I Can’t Find an Individual’s Name or If a Child Was Never Named?

Sometimes you may need to perform ordinances for someone whose name is not known or for a stillborn child who was never named. In the new FamilySearch website, when you do not know an individual’s name, you should usually click the I don’t know the name box, which is located directly beneath the Name field. This allows you to enter other information about the individual without entering a name. If you click this option, you will not be able to perform temple ordinances for the individual. If you cannot find an individual’s name but still want to perform temple ordinances, enter the following information into the Name field: • If you do not know a mother’s name, enter Mrs. in the given name field and the huband's last name or family name in the surname field. However, if the maiden name of the woman is known, enter the maiden name in the surname field. Do not enter a given name. Do not enter Miss. She will be uniquely identified by the relationship. • For an individual with an unknown name or a child who died without receiving a name, enter only the father's last name or family name into the surname field. Do not enter a given name. Do not enter Mr., Miss, son, or daughter. Be sure that the gender is correctly entered as male or female. The temple will add the appropriate Mr., Miss, son, or daughter when the cards are processed.

Please perform temple ordinances in the correct sequence. Perform individual ordinances before sealings. The new FamilySearch website does not clear ordinances if prerequisite ordinances have not been cleared or performed. The correct sequence of ordinances is as follows: • Baptism. • Confirmation. • Initiatory ordinances. • Endowment. • Sealing of a husband and wife and sealing of children to parents (if possible). Whenever possible, parents should be sealed to each other before the children are sealed to the parents.

When Sealing Children to Parents, What Are the Policies?

Deceased children usually are sealed to their natural (biological) parents, but may be sealed to adopted, step, or foster parents, to guardians, to divorced parents (if the parents’ sealing has not been canceled), or to grandparents if any of these nonbiological parents helped raise the children. First Presidency approval is required to seal children to parents other than their biological or adoptive parents if the child, mother, or father is still alive.

To Whom Are Adopted Children Sealed?

A deceased, adopted child usually is sealed to his or her adoptive parents. First Presidency approval is required to seal children to parents other than their biological or adoptive parents if the child, mother, or father is still alive.

To Whom Are Foster Children Sealed?

A deceased foster child usually is sealed to his or her natural parents. First Presidency approval is required to seal children to parents other than their biological or adoptive parents if the child, mother, or father is still alive.

Is a Child Born in the Covenant If the Father Isn’t the Man to Whom the Mother Was Sealed?

A child is born in the covenant if he or she is born after his or her mother has been sealed to a husband in a temple, regardless of who his or her father is or whether the sealing is canceled later. Children born in the covenant are sealed and do not need to be sealed to parents again. If the mother or the man to whom she is sealed is excommunicated before the child’s birth, the child is not born in the covenant.

Spouses can be sealed after both have been deceased for one year.

Can a Man Be Sealed to More Than One Wife?

A deceased man may have sealed to him all deceased women to whom he was legally married during his life.

Can a Woman Be Sealed to More Than One Husband?

A living woman may not be sealed to more than one man. A deceased woman may be sealed to all men to whom she was legally married during her life. However, if she was sealed to a husband during her life, all her husbands must be deceased before she may be sealed to a husband to whom she was not sealed during life.

Can a Divorced Couple Be Sealed?

Deceased couples who were divorced may be sealed. This may provide the only way for their children to be sealed. However, if they were sealed in life and the sealing was canceled, First Presidency approval is required for them to be sealed again.

Can I Seal a Couple Who Never Married or Whose Marriage Date I Cannot Find?

A deceased couple may be sealed to each other if they lived together as husband and wife, or if they had children together, even if no marriage can be documented. Once the couple is sealed, their children can be sealed to them. When you record the couple’s information, do not enter a marriage date or place. If you want to indicate that the couple never married, enter that information in a note.

Do I Have to Perform a Couple’s Individual Ordinances before Sealing Them?

Before performing a sealing to spouse, please perform the individual ordinances of baptism, confirmation, initiatory, and endowment.

When Do Ordinances Need to Be Performed Again?

Ordinance records are sacred records of completed temple work. Ordinances need to be redone and another record recorded only under a few circumstances. • Individuals were sealed to the wrong spouse or parents. • Proxy ordinances were performed for the wrong gender. • Proxy ordinances were performed in error while the individual was still living.

260 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) • Proxy ordinances were performed before the one-year anniversary of the individual’s death. Report these problems to FamilySearch Support at https://contact.familysearch.org. Please include the following information in your request: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • Documentation that proves your correction. For example, you might send scanned copies of birth, marriage, or death certificates; census records, church records, and so forth.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

Do Minor Errors in Names or Event Information Make an Ordinance Invalid?

Minor errors of information do not affect the validity of ordinances. Ordinances for the dead become effective when the deceased person is qualified and chooses to accept them (see D&C 138:19, 32–34). Ultimately, the validity of all ordinances is decided beyond the veil. We can only do our best to give our ancestors the opportunity to receive ordinances. You can correct the information about the individuals in the new FamilySearch website, but you do not need to perform the ordinances again. For example, ordinances are still valid and sealings are still in effect, even if an individual’s birthday is wrong, or a name is misspelled, or a place of death is wrong. The individual’s genealogical record can be updated with the correct information.

When an Ordinance Was Performed More Than Once, Which Is Valid?

If you find duplicate ordinance records, the earliest record is valid.

Are Ordinances Performed Out of Order Valid?

Vicarious ordinances performed out of sequence are valid, but they become effective only after the prerequisite ordinances are completed.

Proxy ordinances that are performed while an individual is still alive are invalid. If you find the record of a proxy ordinance that was performed while an individual was still alive, please contact FamilySearch Support at https://contact.familysearch.org. In your request, please be prepared to provide the following information: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • Documentation that proves your correction. For example, you might send scanned copies of a death certificate.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

After a system administrator invalidates the ordinance, one of the following happens: • If the proxy ordinances were also performed after the individual’s death, the valid ordinance information will replace the invalid ordinances currently shown on the individual’s record. • If the proxy ordinances were not performed after the individual’s death, the ordinance status will change. If the record contains enough information, the ordinances can be performed.

Where Is the Most Complete Set of Ordinance Information?

The new FamilySearch website has the most complete and current record of temple ordinances. If ordinances were performed more than once, the earliest ordinance record will be shown, if duplicate records have been combined.

How Do I Solve Problems Related to Ordinance Records?

How you solve a problem with ordinance records depends on what the problem is. If you have any questions, please go to https://contact.familysearch.org to contact FamilySearch Support. In your request, please provide the following information:

262 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) • Your full name, birth date, and helper access number. (By default, this is the last five characters of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The names and Person Identifiers of each individual involved in the ordinance that is in question. • A description of the problem. • Documentation that proves your correction. For example, you might send scanned copies of birth, marriage, or death certificates; census records, church records, and so forth.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

What Should I Do When a Person’s Ordinances Were Performed More Than Once?

When a person’s ordinances were performed more than once, they should not be performed again. In the new FamilySearch website, combine duplicate records of the individual. The earliest ordinance record will show in a combined record.

What Should I Do If I Find That a Person’s Ordinances Were Performed for the Wrong Gender?

After reporting the gender error, create a new record of the individual with the appropriate gender, and do the ordinances. To report the error, please go to https://contact.familysearch.org. Please provide the following information in your request: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • Proof of what the gender should be. This may be a document such as a birth certificate, a marriage license, a census record, your personal knowledge, or the knowledge of a close family member who knew the individual. It could also be proof that the system contains a duplicate person who is clearly the same individual but with the correct gender.

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 263 If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

What If I Find That a Person Was Sealed to the Wrong Spouse or Parents?

If an individual was sealed to the wrong spouse or parents, the solution depends on the type of sealing and when it was done.

Sealings to Parents

Child-to-parent sealings that were performed before 1 July 1969 with an incorrect mother’s name should be redone with the correct mother’s name. Sealings of children to parents performed on or after 1 July 1969 are valid even if a wrong mother’s name is given. The word “mother” used in the temple ordinance takes precedence over any name that is given.

Sealings to Spouse

If an individual was sealed to the wrong spouse and has not been sealed to the correct spouse, have the correct sealing performed.

Reporting Errors

You do not need to do anything about an incorrect sealing unless you want the incorrect parent-child or marriage relationship removed. In that case, you need to report the error to FamilySearch Support. A system administrator will determine whether the relationship can be removed. To report a sealing that causes incorrect relationships to display, please go to https://contact.familysearch.org. Please provide the following information in your message: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • Documentation that proves your correction. For example, you might send scanned copies of completed family ordinance cards; birth, marriage, or death certificates; census records, church records, and so forth.

264 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

What If I Can’t Find an Ordinance in the New FamilySearch Website That I Know Has Been Performed?

If you know that an individual’s ordinances are done, try combining duplicate records. The system probably has another record about the individual, and the ordinance information is on the other record. If you still cannot find the completed ordinances, contact FamilySearch Support. You can send an e-mail to FamilySearch Support at https://contact.familysearch.org. You can also click the Send Feedback link at the bottom of the screen. Please provide the following information in your message: • Your full name and birth date. • Your helper access number. (By default, this is the last five digits of your membership record number. If you have changed the number, send the number that you changed it to). • The name and Person Identifier of the individual or individuals in question. • A description of the problem. • The ordinances that you know are done, the dates when they were done, and the temple where they were done. • Documentation that proves your correction. For example, you might send scanned copies of family ordinance cards or printed copies of an official ordinance record.

If you can provide scanned copies of your documentation, attach the files to the e-mail. You can also mail photocopies to the following address:

Family History Department Data Quality (JSMB 6 W) 15 East South Temple Street Salt Lake City, UT 84150-0406

Note: If you mail the photocopies, please include your case number so that we know which request the documents belong to.

Appendix G Where the Information in the System Came From

Information in the system came from several sources. These include the following: • Other systems to which people contributed family history information, including information in Ancestral File, the Pedigree Resource File, and the International Genealogical Index. • Information that was obtained through the Family Record Extraction and Stake Record Extraction programs that The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints operated in the past.

Note: Information obtained through the FamilySearch indexing program is not added to the new FamilySearch website. This information is made available through the FamilySearch website instead. To search these records, go to http://www.family search.org. • Contributions and corrections made in the system itself.

How Information from Ancestral File Was Added

Information that was published in Ancestral File, including corrections, appears both as it was originally contributed and as it was later merged and displayed in Ancestral File. You see notes and sources if they were provided in the original contribution. In addition, information and corrections that were never published in Ancestral File are also included.

How Information from the Pedigree Resource File Was Added

Many contributors provided the same information multiple times to the Pedigree Resource File. They often did this to provide additions and corrections. These multiple contributions have been combined in the website. If information changed, you will see the most recent version of the information. You see notes and sources if they were provided in the original contribution.

Information from the International Genealogical Index has also been added to the website. You can correct the genealogical information. You cannot correct the ordinance information.

To use the new FamilySearch website, your computer needs to meet certain requirements.

Browsers and Operating Systems

You can use the new FamilySearch website on several browsers and operating systems. For best results, use one of these combinations:

Browsers Operating Systems

Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 • Windows XP (Home and Professional SP3 and newer) and newer • Windows Vista (32-bit) • Windows 7

Firefox 3.0 and newer • Windows XP (Home and Professional SP3 and newer) • Windows Vista (32-bit) • Windows 7

Safari 3.12A Mac OS X (10.5.6 and newer) Note: Support for Macintosh and Safari is limited. If Safari does not work well, try using Firefox instead.

You can use other browsers and operating systems, though some features may not work as well.

Other Requirements

• A VGA or SVGA monitor with a screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels and at least 65,000 screen colors • A dial-up Internet connection of 28.8 kbps or better (broadband is recommended) • Adobe Reader version 6.0 or newer • Adobe Flash Player version 9.0.115 or newer • 512 MB RAM or more

Appendix I What’s New?

Since its first release, several improvements have been made to the FamilySearch website. The website has had these releases: • June 2007 • November 2007 • February 2008 • May 2008 • August 2008 • November 2008 • February 2009 • May 2009 • August 2009 • December 2009 • March 2010 • June 2010 • August 2010 • December 2010

New Features as of February 2011

In February 2011, we begin welcoming the public to use the new FamilySearch website. Several other changes have been made.

Working in a Public System

You can no longer assume that everyone using the system is a Church member. Please be courteous and inclusive when you contact others. • Everyone’s contact information has been reset. Please review your preferences, and select the contact information that you want displayed in a public system. - Your contact name continues to show. - If your preferences were set to show your e-mail address, your e-mail address still shows. If your preferences were set to hide your e-mail address, it is still hidden. - If your preferences were set to show a mailing address or telephone number, they no longer show. If you want them to show again, you need to update your preferences. (On the Home page, click Update my profile and preferences.) • In your e-mail contacts, please do not assume that all contributors are Church members. • In the discussion boards, please do not discuss the performance of temple ordinances. • Please do not use the system to proselytize.

The feature that you use to sign in to help someone else has changed: • Only Church members can sign in to use the system for someone else. • You can help Church members, whether or not they are registered to use the system. • You can help the public after they have registered and added a helper access number to their user profile. • The required information has changed: - To help individuals who are already registered to use the system, you enter their contact name and helper access number. - To help Church members who are not registered to use the system, you need to enter their full name, birth date, and the last 5 digits of their membership record number.

New Help Center

A new version of the Help Center is now available. To see it, click Help Center from the Home page. From there, you can print a document that explains the differences.

The What’s New Document Is Available on the Home Page

You can now print What’s New in the New FamilySearch Website from the Home page.

Teaching and Assisting the Public

We have begun a limited public release of the system. The public can use the entire system with the following exceptions: • They do not see LDS ordinance information and features. • They cannot sign in to help someone else. When you help the public use the system, please encourage them to do the following: • Update their user profile to include a helper access number. Having this number in their profile will help FamilySearch Support provide better service should they contact us for help. • Update their user profile to show the contact information that they would like displayed. • Help them build their family tree. Because we cannot use Church membership records to connect them to the information that we already have, they see only themselves on their family tree. Help them do the following: 1. Correct the gender on their record. Since the registration process did not ask for gender, their record lists it as Unknown. (To edit the gender, click Details. Then click the Edit link for the gender.)

272 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) 2. Manually add their parents, grandparents, and other living, direct-line ancestors to the family tree. Note: Remind them to obtain permission of living relatives before adding them. 3. See if their deceased ancestors are already in the system. Have them click the Add or find... links to search the database. If they find ancestors, link them into their tree. 4. If the database does not already contain some of their ancestors, contribute a GEDCOM file containing the missing information. The system accepts GEDCOM files with up to 1,000 individuals. However, unless they are sure that the system does not have the information, encourage them to contribute files with 100 individuals or less.

New Features as of December 2010

The December 2010 release has many improvements. Among these are the ability to watch individuals, receive e-mail notifications when changes occur, and some temple-related changes.

Receive E-mail Notifications for Changes

You can now “watch” individuals in your family tree and receive an e-mail notification when information about them changes. For now, the notification identifies the following types of changes: • Someone changes the individual’s summary. • Someone starts a new discussion or adds a comment to an existing discussion. • Someone combines an individual that you are watching with another record. • Someone separates a record from an individual that you are watching.

Select the Individuals in a Family Whose Ordinances You Want to Do

When you reserve the ordinances for a family, you can now deselect any family member whose ordinances you do not want to do.

Reserve Ordinances for Someone Born in the Last 95 Years

If you try to reserve ordinances for someone who was born in the last 95 years, the system now asks whether you are the closest living relative or have permission from the closest living relative to do the ordinances. Note: The closest living relatives are, in this order: • An undivorced spouse. (The spouse to whom the individual was married when he or she died.) • An adult child. • A parent. • A brother or sister. If you need to obtain permission to do ordinances, verbal approval is acceptable. Family members should work together to determine when the ordinances will be done and who will do them. Please honor the wishes of the closest living relative. Doing ordinances against those wishes can cause hard feelings within families and towards the Church.

Increased Size Limit for Discussions

In the previous version of the system, discussions and comments could contain up to 1,000 characters (500 for Chinese, Japanese, and Korean). The size limit has increased to 4,000 characters (2,000 for Chinese, Japanese, and Korean).

Internet Explorer 6

Support for Internet Explorer 6 has been discontinued. You can use the new FamilySearch website on several browsers and operating systems. For best results, use one of these combinations:

Browsers Operating Systems

Microsoft Internet Explorer • Windows XP (Home and Professional SP3 and newer) 7.0 and newer • Windows Vista (32-bit) • Windows 7

Firefox 3.0 and newer • Windows XP (Home and Professional SP3 and newer) • Windows Vista (32-bit) • Windows 7

Safari 3.12A Mac OS X (10.5.6 and newer) Note: Support for Macintosh and Safari is limited. If Safari does not work well, try using Firefox instead.

New Features as of August 2010

In this release, the system no longer allows you to add new disputes. The system has been translated into Russian and Italian. You will also see tutorials, updates to the Temple Ordinances list, and some changes that help people enter names of Asian ancestors.

Changes to the Dispute Feature

New Languages

The system has been translated into Russian and Italian. To change the language that you use this system in, click Update my user profile, enter your password, and click Preferences.

Tutorials

You can now use tutorials to learn how to use the system. You can get to the list of tutorials in several ways: • On the Home page, click Learn How to Use FamilySearch. • Click any Help or Help with This Page link. Then click Tutorials and guides, which appears at the bottom of the help panel. • On the Home page, click Help Center. Then click the Training & Resources tab.

Updates to the Temple Ordinances List

When you finish assigning an ordinance to the temple, the system used to return you to the top of your Temple Ordinances list. Now it returns you to the individual whose ordinances you just assigned.

New Data Entry Templates

The system now has two new data entry templates to help with the entry of the names of ancestors from Asia:

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 275 • The Mongolian template provides fields in which you can enter the names in Cyrillic and Roman characters. The system identifies the characters as Mongolian so they can be searched and displayed correctly. • The Asian template is intended for use with Thai and Cambodian names. It contains fields for native and Roman characters. Note: If you enter names in non-Roman characters, use the correct template for the language. Then, if you assign the ancestor’s ordinances to the temple, the system sends the ordinances to a temple district where the patrons can read and understand the name. These templates appear in a drop-down list in the bottom right corner of the screens where you add and edit an ancestor’s name.

Automatic Transliteration of Names from Chinese, Japanese, and Korean to Roman

If you enter a name in traditional Chinese, Japanese, or Korean and if you use the appropriate template for that language, the system enters the name in Roman characters for you. The system uses the Roman characters to improve the accuracy of the search and possible duplicates features. You can correct the Roman characters if needed.

New Features as of June 2010

The June 2010 release adds discussion boards and exact search. It also provides several features to help users whose ancestors came from Asia.

Discussions

Each deceased individual in the system has a discussion board, where you can do the following: • Identify yourself as someone who is interested in or actively working on an individual or family line. • Coordinate the correction of errors and additional research with other interested users. • Identify incorrect information on the individual’s record. Note: Because all discussions will eventually be visible to users who are not Church members, please discuss temple ordinances through e-mail. To find the individual’s discussion board, click the Discussions button. It is located in the lower-left corner of the screen, beneath the Possible Duplicates button.

Exact Search

The search feature now has exact search options for names, event dates, and event places. You can use exact search options to narrow your searches. For example, you conduct the following search without using any exact match options:

First name: Thomas Last name: Wall Birthplace: Liverpool, Lancashire, England, United Kingdom

276 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Your search results contain everyone with the name Thomas or a variation of it (such as Tom, Thom, Tomás, Thos., and so forth), everyone with the last name Wall or one of its variations, and everyone born in the city of Liverpool, the county of Lancashire, or the country of England. With the exact option on the names, you get only records that contain Thomas as a first or middle name and Wall in the last name. With the exact option on the place-name, you get only records with a birthplace of Liverpool, Lancashire, England, United Kingdom. To see the exact search options, click Show advanced, which is located to the right of the Search button.

Improved Selection of Standardized Places

The feature that helps you select a standardized place-name has been improved. When you enter a date for a birth, marriage, death, or other event, the drop-down list gives you more options. It is also easier to select and change a standardized place.

Records from Asian Temples

The records of ordinances performed in some Asian temples have been added to the system. This will eventually allow Church members with Asian ancestry to see if the ordinances they are planning to do have already been done.

New Features as of March 2010

As of the March 2010 release of the new FamilySearch website, use your LDS Account to sign in. Your Temple Ordinances list automatically displays all of the individuals whose ordinances you have reserved. Changes made to your Temple Ordinances list and the Family Tree view are saved while you use the system for one session. And when you contribute a GEDCOM file, you can select the individuals whose ordinances you want to reserve.

LDS Account and User Profile

You now have one less user name and password to remember. Use your LDS Account to sign in to the new FamilySearch website. If you do not yet have an LDS Account, go to https://new.familysearch.org, and click the Register for the New FamilySearch link. Note: If you use the Church’s Stake and Ward website, you already have an LDS account. You might have recently obtained one if you contribute content to the FamilySearch Research Wiki. Church employees and missionaries with access to Church computer systems also have LDS Accounts. The following changes occurred as a result of changing to the LDS Account: • The screen where you edit your user profile has changed. At the top of the user profile screen, you can click a button to change your first and last name, user name, password, and other information stored in your LDS Account. At the bottom of the user profile screen, you can change your address and telephone number and your helper access number. • The names of some of the pieces of information in your profile have new names.

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 277 - The term “user name” replaces “sign-in name.” - The term “display name” replaces “preferred name.” The system uses your display name on the Home page, in the upper-left corner of the screen, on Family Ordinance Requests, and on your family ordinance cards.

Seeing All Reserved Individuals on the Temple Ordinances List

You can now see your entire Temple Ordinances list at once. When you click the Temple Ordinances tab, a progress bar at the bottom of the screen indicates how much of the list has been loaded. When the system is finished loading the information, you see your entire list. Previously, your Temple Ordinances list displayed the 20 individuals whose ordinances you had most recently reserved. To display 20 more individuals, you clicked a Show more link. If your Temple Ordinances list contains more individuals than the system can display all at once, it displays as many as it can. It then suggests that you perform or unreserve some ordinances to shorten the list.

Caching of the Family Tree View

If you change the way the Family Tree view is displayed, then navigate away from the Me and My Ancestors screen, and then return to it, the Family Tree view looks the same as it did before you left. Previously, after you navigated away from the Me and My Ancestors screen, your default Family Tree view appeared. When you sign out of the system and come back in, your default pedigree appears on the Family Tree view.

Go To Button on the Family Tree View

If you click Go to at the top of the Family Tree view, your name now appears in the list, making it easy to return to yourself.

Reserving Ordinances from GEDCOM Files

Previously, you could set a preference option that would automatically reserve the ordinances for all of the individuals who were in a GEDCOM file that you contributed. This option no longer exists. Instead, you can reserve the ordinances from the screen where you see the individuals who were in the GEDCOM file.

Add Spouse Links on the Family Tree View

If an individual is not currently linked to a spouse, you can now click an Add spouse link directly on the pedigree to add him or her.

New Certified Affiliates

Many products have been certified since our last release. To see the list of current affiliates, go to http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affiliates/index.html.

Several temple and other types of records have been added from the temples in Asia.

New Features as of December 2009

The December 2009 release contains a new pedigree view that allows you to display more information in more ways. Some of the rules that are used to determine whether temple ordinances can be done have also been modified.

New View Screens

When you click the Me and My Ancestors tab, you will see the Family Pedigree with Details as ususal. If you click the Change View button, you can now switch to the Family Tree view or the Individual List view. On the Family Tree view, you can do many things that you cannot do on the Family Pedigree with Details view. These include the following: • You can easily resize your tree to show many more generations on the screen. • When you hover the mouse cursor over someone in the tree, the path back to you is highlighted. This lets you more easily see how you connect to any person in your tree. • You can see descendants instead of ancestors. You can also switch from the Family Tree view to the Individual List view. When you first switch from the Family Tree view to the list, the list contains the individuals in the Family Tree view. Once the list is displayed, you can sort the individuals by last name, first name, gender, birth date, birthplace, or person ID. Both the Family Group Record view and the Family Pedigree view (the one without details) have been removed.

Family Group Records

The family group record is now for viewing and printing. You can no longer add new individuals, edit individuals, change the family that is displayed, or view sources. You can display the family group record from all view screens: • On the Family Pedigree with Details view, click the Parents and Siblings or Spouses and Children button, depending on which family you want to see. Display the spouse or parents that you want, and click the View family group record link. This link is located on the upper-right side of the details. Note: You can no longer display a Family Group Record by clicking the Change View button. • On the Family Tree view or Individual List view, click the individual whose family group record you want to see. Then click the View Family Group Record link, which is located at the top of the details panel to the right of the pedigree.

Temple Icons

The Family Pedigree with Details view uses the following icons to indicate a family’s ordinance status. (These are the same icons that were used in previous releases).

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 279 • . One or more ordinances have the status of “Ready.” • . All of the ordinances for this individual and his or her family are completed or not needed. Important: The sealing of the parents to their parents may not be done. To check those ordinances, display the parents’ parents on the family pedigree, and check their temple icons. • . This icon indicates that an individual or someone in his or her family may need ordinances. Specifically, this icon indicates that at least one ordinance has one of the following ordinance statuses: • “Needs more information” • “Not ready” • “Not available” • “On hold” • “Reserved” • “In progress”

The Family Tree view uses different icons: • . At least one individual in the family has incomplete ordinance information. The individual’s record contains enough information for ordinances to be performed. Note: When the system says that an ordinance is “Ready,” it does not necessarily mean that you can or should perform the ordinances. The ordinances might be done. The system will help you check for duplicate records later. You also need to make sure that you are following Church policies. For example, you should not perform ordinances for people who are not in your family line. You should obtain permission from the closest living relative before performing ordinances for someone who was born in the last 95 years. • . This icon indicates one of the following: - A family member needs ordinances, but his or her record does not contain the required information. - A family member’s ordinances are not done but he or she has not been deceased for one year. - The system does not display the individual’s ordinance information. Instead, it displays the ordinance status “Not available.” The system displays this status when it needs to protect the privacy of ordinance information, such as when an individual in the family is living. • . The ordinances for all family members are either done or not needed. Important: The sealing of the parents to their parents may not be done. To check those ordinances, display the parents’ parents on the family pedigree, and check their temple icons. • . The ordinances for all family members are reserved or in progress. • . The system could not load the ordinance information. Try again later.

The rules that the system uses to determine whether an individual’s ordinances can be done have changed: • In addition to the other information that is required for temple ordinances to be performed, an individual’s record must now have at least the country for birth, christening, marriage, death, or burial. The place-name must be standardized. • Names with slashes (/), parentheses, or double quote marks (") in the Name field no longer qualify. These characters are commonly used to enter an individual’s nickname, alternate spellings, and similar issues. If you need to enter nicknames or other versions of a name, add another name field, and enter it there. Numbers in name fields qualify only if they are part of the name’s suffix. • If an individual’s name is not known, or if the individual died without receiving a name, you should now do the following: - For a child with an unknown name or a child who died without receiving a name, enter only the father’s last name into the name field. Do not enter a first name. Do not enter Miss, Mr., son, or daughter. - If a mother’s name is not known, you can continue to enter Mrs. plus the husband’s surname.

New Icon on the Temple Ordinances List

On the Temple Ordinances list, you might see next to an individual’s name instead of a check box. This triangle indicates one of the following: • The prerequisite ordinances are not done, and they are either reserved by someone else or assigned to the temple. For example, you see this triangle if your temple ordinance list contains an individual’s endowment but someone else has reserved but not yet performed the baptism, confirmation, and initiatory. If you assigned the prerequisite ordinances to the temple and if the temple has not yet started performing the ordinances, you can assign them back to you and print the cards. • The individual no longer qualifies for temple ordinances. Common reasons why the individual might no longer qualify include the following: - The qualification rules changed, and the individual no longer qualifies. Several qualification rules have changed in this release, so check your Temple Ordinances list. You can often make simple corrections that allow the ordinances to be done. For example, make sure that the Name field contains only the individual’s name. Make sure the place-names include country names. - The individual’s record changed. It no longer has enough information for ordinances. For example, an event place may have been deleted. - Someone selected a different name, gender, or event on the summary. That version of the name, gender, or event does not allow ordinances to be done. You may, for example, need to go to the individual’s summary and select a death event that contains the name of the country where the death occurred. - Someone combined the individual that you reserved with another record. The ordinances may now be done, or the record may now lack the information required for temple ordinances. If you cannot correct the record, click the Unreserve link to cancel your reservation of the individual’s ordinances.

If an individual’s ordinances have been reserved, you can see the user’s contact name. If that user allows the system to display contact information, you can also contact that user.

Selecting Specific Ordinances for a Family Ordinance Request

Before you print a Family Ordinance Request, you see a screen on which you review the individuals and ordinances that you selected. On this review screen, you can also indicate which ordinances you want to do. For example, if you want to do endowments only instead of doing both the endowments and sealings, you can deselect the sealings before you print the request. Note: Ordinances must be done in the proper sequence. For example, if none of an individual’s ordinances are done, you could not select only the endowment because the baptism and confirmation are not done.

Canceling Ordinance Reservations (“Unreserve”)

Previously, the Temple Ordinances list had a Remove button that you could use to remove an individual from the list and make the ordinances available for other users to do. The Remove button is now gone. Instead, each individual on your list has an Unreserve link that you can click to do the same thing. When you unreserve an individual, the system does two things: • It removes the individual from your list. • It cancels your reservation of the individual’s ordinances. Other users will be able to reserve the ordinances.

New Features as of August 2009

The August 2009 release of the new FamilySearch website introduces many changes. The biggest change is a new Temple Ordinances list.

Temple Ordinances List

The Temple Ordinances list helps you do the following: • See the ordinances that you have reserved. • Print and reprint Family Ordinance Requests and family ordinance cards. • Monitor the completion of the ordinances. • Remove individuals from your Temple Ordinances list. This cancels your reservation for all ordinances not yet complete so that other Church members can do them. (Previous releases of the new FamilySearch website did not allow you to cancel ordinance reservations.) You can sort the individuals in the Temple Ordinances list, change the width of the columns, and change the order of the columns.

The process and screens for reserving ordinances have changed. These are the significant changes: • You must reserve all of an individual’s ordinances. If you do not want to do all of them, do the ones that you want. You can then either assign the remaining ordinances to the temple or remove the individual from the Temple Ordinances list. • You must now go to the Temple Ordinances list in order to print a Family Ordinance Request. This makes it much easier to print one request containing all of the individuals whose ordinances you want to do.

Reprinting Family Ordinance Cards

You can now reprint a Family Ordinance Request after you have printed the family ordinance cards. The system reminds you to destroy duplicate cards.

Displaying and Printing a Family Group Record

When you display or print a family group record, the sources no longer appear automatically. Instead, you see a Source Information link for each individual. Click the link to display the individual’s sources in a pop-up. This change allows the system to display a family group record more quickly than when it also has to display the sources.

Solving Problems Related to Family Ordinance Cards

To resolve problems with family ordinance cards, you often had to take the card to the temple and ask that the ordinances on the card be deleted from the system. For example, this was recommended if you found out that the ordinances were already done or that the individual’s gender was incorrect. As of the August 2009 release, you can simply remove the individual from your Temple Ordinances list and destroy the card.

Converting a TempleReady Submission File to a Family Ordinance Request

If you are registered with FamilySearch Support as a family history consultant or family history center director and if you sign in as a helper, you can convert a TempleReady submission file to a Family Ordinance Request. After you sign in to help someone else, the Home page contains an option called Add a TempleReady Submission File. Use this option when a Church member prepared a TempleReady submission file before the new FamilySearch website was available, but then he or she could not get the family ordinance cards printed before the temple was changed to the new system.

Options on the Home Page

The See Temple Information (Schedules, Driving Directions, etc.) link has been moved to the Home page. The Families and individuals that are reserved for temple ordinances (see list) link displays the new Temple Ordinances list.

The following products are now certified for use with the new FamilySearch website: • Issues from Armidale Software (http://www.armidalesoftware.com/issue/) • AllMyCousins from GeneSys Foundation (https://allmycousins.com/) • LiveRoots from Genealogy Today LLC (http://www.liveroots.com/) In addition to having their previous certifications, the following products are now also certified to reserve ordinances and print Family Ordinance Requests: • Ancestral Quest from Incline Software (http://www.ancquest.com) • FamilyInsight from Ohana Software (http://www.ohanasoftware.com) For a complete list of affiliates, go to http://www.familysearch.org/eng/affiliates/in dex.html.

System Requirements

In previous releases, the use of Adobe Reader and Flash was optional. You now need Adobe Reader 8.0 or higher and Flash Player 9.0.115 or higher. Your computer now also needs at least 512 MB RAM and a screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels.

Find a Family History Consultant and Family History Center

In the Help Center, you can find your local family history consultant and family history center. 1. On the Home page, click Help Center. 2. Click the Local Assistance tab. If you are a family history consultant and your name does not appear on this screen, you need to register as a family history consultant at https://consultant.familysearch.org/. If your name appears in the list of consultants and you are not a family history consultant, please contact FamilySearch Support to have your information updated. Go to http://contact.familysearch.org/ for a list of support numbers for your area.

New Features as of May 2009

As of the May 2009 release of the new FamilySearch website, an individual can have more combined records. RootsMagic is now certified for reserving ordinances and printing Family Ordinance Requests. And the May 2009 version of A User’s Guide to the New FamilySearch contains corrections, clarifications, and additions.

Larger Limit on Combining Individuals

An individual can have up to 150 combined records. The previous limit was 85.

Third-Party Certified Computer Programs and Web Programs

The computer program RootsMagic 4 is now certified to both reserve ordinances in the new FamilySearch website and print Family Ordinance Requests. For more information, please visit http://www.rootsmagic.com/fs/. (RootsMagic 4 is available in English only.)

284 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) For the current status, please contact the affiliate directly, or go to http://www.family search.org/eng/affiliates/index.html.

Corrections, Clarifications, and Additions to A User’s Guide to the New FamilySearch

The user’s guide contains the following corrections, clarifications, and additions: • It now clarifies how and when the system displays information about members of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, including those who were excommunicated or who requested that their names be removed from the records of the Church. • It now explains what happens when you use the new FamilySearch website for someone else who has not registered to use the system. • It now explains how adding records of living people can add duplicate records to the system and provides some recommendations on when to do it. • Information about assigning ordinances to the temple has been corrected and clarified. Before the February 2009 release of the new FamilySearch website, when you assigned ordinances to the temple, the ordinances would remain available in the system for other users to reserve until a temple actually received the ordinances to do. Now the system immediately lists assigned ordinances as “In progress,” which means other users can no longer reserve them. This correction did not get made in the February 2009 user’s guide. • It now contains guidelines for solving problems related to ordinance cards. • It now clarifies what information you should take to the temple if you need to seal living persons to deceased spouses, children, and parents. • Chapter 1 of A User’s Guide to the New FamilySearch now includes information about the Family Tree. See the new user’s guide for this content.

New Features as of February 2009

In February 2009, more records of deceased Church members were added to the system. The statuses of several ordinances that were incorrectly listed as “In progress” are now listed as “Completed.” And you can now find information about third-party certified computer programs on the FamilySearch Internet Service.

More LDS Church Membership Records

The system now contains the records of about 350,000 deceased members of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints whose records were never added into the system. You can now see these individuals on family trees and use the Search feature to find them.

Corrected Ordinance Statuses

The statuses of about 500,000 ordinances that were incorrectly listed as “In progress” now show as “Completed.” The system did not automatically update these ordinance statuses when the ordinances were done. This sometimes occurs when a user of the new FamilySearch prints a Family Ordinance Request and has the family ordinance cards printed. Then all or some of the

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 285 ordinances are done in a temple that does not have the new FamilySearch. The ordinances are recorded, but it takes longer for the information to appear in the new FamilySearch. You can continue to use family ordinance cards in any temple, regardless of whether the cards were printed using a Family Ordinance Request or TempleReady disk. Please be aware, however, that it takes extra time to update the ordinance information in the new FamilySearch when ordinances are performed in a temple that does not yet have the new FamilySearch. This situation will no longer occur after all of the temples are using the new FamilySearch.

Third-Party Certified Computer and Web Programs

To see the most current list of certified third-party software, go to http://www.family search.org/eng/affiliates/index.html.

New Features as of November 2008

In November 2008 one new feature was introduced to the new FamilySearch website. The system requirements were also refined. The following are new in the November 2008 release: • When you reserve ordinances, you will need to acknowledge that you have read and complied with Church policies regarding ordinance duplication and temple submissions. • The list of browsers and operating systems has been simplified. • Many certified third-party products currently do or will soon work with the website. For the most current list of certified products, see http://www.familysearch.org/eng/af filiates/index.html.

New Features as of August 2008

In August 2008 several new features were introduced to the new FamilySearch website. • You can now separate more than one record at a time. You can also display more of an individual’s combined records when you separate records and jump to a specific page within the list of duplicate records. • You cannot combine records if the resulting record would be too large. • In your user profile, you can now change your contact name. • The screens used for selecting ordinances and printing Family Ordinance Requests have changed slightly. • Many certified third-party products currently do or will soon work with the website.

New Features as of June 2008

In June 2008 several new features were introduced to the new FamilySearch website.

The new Latin name template is the default template for Spanish and Portuguese language versions. Tip: You can use the Latin name template for any language if you prefer to enter names into separate first name and last name fields.

Language Versions Have Been Improved

These problems in various language versions have been corrected: • Non-English place-names no longer revert to English standardizations when the appropriate language standardization is available. • Names now display correctly in the appropriate language versions. When adding or editing a name, you can identify the parts of the first name and the last name. - Korean names now display correctly in both Korean and romanized versions. Korean names are automatically converted to romanized names. - Japanese names now display correctly on the Summary page. - In English versions of the system, Chinese characters are no longer lost when a name is edited.

Choose Both Baptism and Confirmation Ordinances

When doing ordinances for the deceased, you must do the confirmation when you do the baptism. When you print a Family Ordinance Request and choose to do a baptism, your request also includes the person’s confirmation.

New Features as of February 2008

In February 2008 several new features were introduced to the new FamilySearch website.

Choose an Individual’s Summary Information

You can choose the name, gender, birth, christening, death, and burial information to display in the individual summary. Users, not the system, now choose the common view.

Choose Which Parents or Spouse to Keep on Display

Now when you choose which set of parents or which spouse you want displayed in your family tree, the system keeps that choice until you change it.

Learn How to Use FamilySearch

It is now easier to get help learning the website. A list of overviews and guides is available from the Home page.

It is now easier to request a correction to a Church membership record. A new form has information filled out so that you can quickly click to indicate the changes you are requesting.

Contribute a GEDCOM File with Up to 1,000 Individuals

Previously, you could contribute GEDCOM files that were 1MB or smaller. You can now contribute up to 1,000 individuals.

Indicate That You Have Compared the Information in a GEDCOM File before You Contribute It to the Website

When you contribute a GEDCOM file, you now need to click a check box to indicate that you have compared the information in your GEDCOM file to the website. You cannot contribute a GEDCOM file until you click the check box.

More Possible Duplicates

The website now displays more possible duplicates when you click Possible Duplicates. If you have been combining possible duplicates in your family tree, you may see more possible duplicates for individuals that previously showed few or none. You will also see the following changes when you resolve possible duplicates: • The spouse and parents listed for each possible duplicate. Christening or burial information appears if birth and death information is not available. • A star rating system that indicates how close of a match the records are. • Identical information appears in bold. • The wording of the link that you use to search for possible matches has been changed to “Advanced search for possible matches.”

Individuals with Completed Ordinances No Longer Show in Your Reserved List

Previously, all individuals that you reserved stayed on your reserved list. Now, when all of an individual’s ordinances are completed, the individual is removed from your reserved list.

New Features as of November 2007

In November 2007 several new features were introduced to the new FamilySearch website.

Telephone Number or E-mail Address Needed for Registration

Registration now strongly recommends you enter either a telephone number or e-mail address. FamilySearch Support uses this information to help resolve problems that you report using the feedback feature.

Search results are easier to read and compare. Each record is now in columns with names, then events, then relationships. You can easily compare the various records. New buttons in search results help you navigate: • Click the Go To button to display the individual on a family tree. • Click the New Search button to return to a blank Search page and begin a new search. • Click the Refine Search button to return to the Search page to modify your search. You see similar search results when you do the following: • Click the Possible Duplicates button. • Click the Add or find . . . links (to find a spouse, child, parent, or sibling). To add an individual from the search results to your family, click the Add button.

Easier Entering of Dates and Places

Entering dates and places is easier with the type-ahead feature. As you begin to type a date or place-name, the system gives you a list of similar dates or places. If the correct choice appears, click it.

New Person Identifiers

Each individual in the system now has a new Person Identifier. This number is different than the one in the first version of the new FamilySearch website. Use the new numbers to search for individuals. Look for the Person Identifier on the Details page in the upper right corner, or on a Family Ordinance Request form, under the individual’s name. It is in this format: p.KW3-BFN1

See All Sources for an Individual

All of an individual’s sources are now available in one location.

Edit Large Notes

You can now edit notes larger than 300 characters. The website keeps these large notes that are imported in GEDCOM files. (Notes entered directly into the website can have up to 300 characters.)

Claim Information That You Contributed before the New FamilySearch Website Was Available

You can now claim information that you submitted to Ancestral File, to the Pedigree Resource File, and for temple ordinances. Then you can correct any errors in this information, and all temple cards previously printed are associated with you.

More Easily Combine Duplicate Records

The process for combining duplicate records has been redesigned.

You can now combine duplicate spouses, fathers, and mothers without comparing each duplicate record.

Restrictions on GEDCOM Files

The website no longer accepts GEDCOM files that have been directly downloaded from Ancestral File, Pedigree Resource File, and the International Genealogical Index. This helps reduce duplication. If your file is rejected, you are notified.

Temple Work

A new temple icon with a green arrow indicates that at least one family member needs temple ordinances.

To see which ordinances need to be done, click , , or the Ready link.

Affiliate Contact name A software vendor, web application service The name that appears when the system provider, records provider, image provider, displays a user’s name to other users as a or other entity that has agreed to work contributor of information. with FamilySearch, International. Contributor Ancestral File An individual who provides information Ancestral File is a computer file containing to the system. names and often other vital information (such as date and place of birth, marriage, Details or death) of millions of individuals who A page or portion of the page that shows have lived throughout the world. Ancestral all of the information about an individual, File was first published on compact disc. such as event information, gender, facts, It was later published on the FamilySearch and family relationships. It also includes Web site. LDS ordinances.

Born in the Covenant Display name Children who are born after their mother The name that a system uses when it needs has been sealed to a husband in a temple to display your own name to you. To are born in the covenant of that sealing. change your display name, edit the profile They do not need to receive the ordinance of your FamilySearch or LDS account. of sealing to parents. Dispute Certified third-party program A symbol that indicates someone has A computer program that works with disagreed with a piece of information in products from FamilySearch International the system. but that was not developed by FamilySearch International. A review board Event reviews the programs to make sure they work with the systems as promised. An occurrence—such as a birth, marriage, or death—in an individual’s life. Combine Fact To combine two records that are for the same individual. When you combine A piece of information about an individual records, all information is kept. that is not related to a life event. A fact may or may not have a date and place. Common question Examples of facts might include hair color, occupation, religious affiliation, and so A question about a particular topic or page forth. in the system that is often asked. Family history center Completed A branch facility of the Family History An ordinance status that indicates that the Library. Centers are provided to help ordinance has been performed. If an people identify their ancestors. ordinance is completed, the date when the ordinance occurred and the temple or place where it occurred may also appear.

Family History Consultant Help Center An individual who is called to help Church A feature in which a user can get answers members do family history. to questions or find the nearest family history center. Family ordinance card Help panel A piece of paper that is used to perform and record temple ordinances for deceased A window that appears when a user clicks ancestors. a Help button. The help panel provides links for common questions, overviews, Family Ordinance Request (FOR) guides, and the Help Center.

A printed report that lists the individuals Helper access number and families whose ordinances a Church member has selected to perform. Members A number used by a Church member to take the Family Ordinance Request to the authorize another Church member to use temple. Temple staff use the Family the system in his or her behalf. For Church Ordinance Request to print family members, the helper access number is the ordinance cards. last five characters of the membership record number for the member being Family pedigree helped. Users may change this number.

A pedigree chart that shows couples and Home page their direct-line ancestors rather than individuals and their direct-line ancestors. The first page in the system that appears after a user signs in. Family Pedigree with Details view In progress A screen that lets you see your family information. It has a small version of the An ordinance status that indicates that the family pedigree at the top of the page and ordinance is in the process of being details about one individual beneath the completed. Someone has already printed pedigree. a Family Ordinance Request or family ordinance cards. Family Tree view Individual A screen that lets you see your family information. In the Family Tree view, you A person with a record in the system. Also see a family pedigree at the top of the page the record itself. and some of the details for one individual on the right side of the screen. You can Individual List view display an individual’s complete details in A screen that lets you see your family a pop-up. information. The Individual List view lets FamilySearch Account you see the family information that was displayed on the Family Tree view in a A single user name and password that sortable list. You can display an people who are not members of the individual’s details in a pop-up. Church and use to sign in to FamilySearch websites.

GEDCOM An acronym for “GEnealogical Data COMmunications.” GEDCOM is a computer data format created by The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints for storing genealogical information so that many computer programs can use it.

International Genealogical Index New FamilySearch Website (IGI) An online family tree application that The International Genealogical Index was allows patrons to collaborate with others a computer file that listed several hundred to build, share, manage, and preserve their million names of deceased persons from family histories online. It also helps throughout the world. It was available on members of The Church of Jesus Christ of compact disc and on previous versions of Latter-day Saints perform temple the FamilySearch website. The ordinances on behalf of their deceased International Genealogical Index no longer ancestors. exists as a searchable database. The Historical Records collection contains the Not available transcribed records of birth, marriage, and An ordinance status that indicates that the death that were previously published in ordinance work for this individual is not the index. The patron-submitted records available to the public. In most cases, are temporarily unavailable. ordinance information is not available in LDS FamilySearch Account order to maintain privacy. A single user name and password that Not needed Church members use to sign in to Church An ordinance status that indicates that the websites and computer systems. individual does not need this ordinance Legacy contributor because he or she was stillborn, died before age 8, or was born in the covenant. A person who originally submitted information to Ancestral File or the Not ready Pedigree Resource File. An ordinance status that indicates that an Looping pedigree ordinance cannot be done because the individual has not been deceased for at A pedigree in which individuals are least one year. incorrectly linked back to themselves in future or previous generations. For Note example, an individual may be mistakenly Narrative, free-form information that is combined with a father or grandfather of attached to an individual. the same name. On hold Membership record number An ordinance status that appears when A number that uniquely identifies a someone has already accepted the Church membership record. Also called a responsibility to do the preceding record number. ordinances, which must be done before Needs more information this ordinance can be selected. An ordinance status that indicates that Overview more information is needed for an A summary that contains important individual before the ordinance can be concepts that a user needs to know to use done. the system effectively.

Password A sequence of characters that a user must enter before he or she can access the system.

Pedigree Resource File Sign in The Pedigree Resource File is a computer To enter a user name and password for the file that contains names; family purpose of using a computer system. relationships; and birth, marriage, and death information for millions of people. Sign out The Pedigree Resource File was originally To end access to the computer system. published on compact disc. It is also available on www.familysearch.org. Source Person identifier The record or the individual who supplied the information. A number that identifies people in the new FamilySearch website. An individual’s Submitter person identifier does not change over the life and death of the individual. Person An individual who enters information into identifiers are generated randomly to help the system in behalf of someone else; a the system keep track of an individual. You helper. cannot use them to determine specific Summary information about the individual or the source of the information. The version of an individual’s name, gender, birth, christening, death, and Possible duplicate burial information that the system displays A record in the system that might represent when it has room to display only one the same individual as another record in version of that information. the system. Synchronize Ready A feature of some third-party programs An ordinance status that indicates that that can do the following: there is enough information to perform • Add information from your database to this ordinance. the system without using GEDCOM. • Add selected information from the Reserved system to your database. An ordinance status that indicates that • Combine duplicate records. someone has already accepted the • Separate records that were incorrectly responsibility to do this ordinance. combined.

Separate User name The process to separate records that were A sequence of characters that identifies the previously combined. individual who is using a computer system. Formerly called a “sign-in name.”

95 year rule, 190, 192, 196, 255 ancestors (continued) seeing information about ancestors, 46–75 A seeing living ancestors, 79, 80 why you may not see all of the information abbreviations of ordinances, 204, 245 you expect about your family, 47 accent marks, See languages Ancestral File, 15, 78, 82, 92, 139, 153, 267 account, See registration or user profile claiming information that you submitted to add-in programs, See certified third-party Ancestral File, 139–142 programs FamilySearch Ancestral File as a contributor adding information name, 78 characters of different languages, 103 GEDCOM files downloaded directly from marriage events, 120 Ancestral File, 153 names, gender, events, and facts, 94–96 searching with Ancestral File numbers new individuals and families, 91–102 (AFNs), 92 notes about individuals, 99, 113, 119 searching with Ancestral File numbers (AFNs) notes about marriage events, relationships, and person identifiers, 82 and families, 120, 125, 130 where information in the system came preparing your information for transfer in a from, 15, 267 GEDCOM file, 155 Ancestral File numbers (AFNs), See Ancestral relationship types between parents and File children, 97, 129 Ancestral Quest, 154, 166 sources about individuals, 100, 113, 119 apostrophes in names, 94, 96 sources about marriage events, relationships, approximated dates, 258 and families, 120, 126, 130 assigning ordinances to the temple or system lets you add information, 15 yourself, 204, 211, 212 transferring information from your personal assumed places, 234 computer, 153–166 aunts, 80, 253 addresses, See e-mail addresses; mailing addresses B Adobe Flash Player, 269 Adobe Reader, 269 B (abbreviation for “baptism”), 204, 245 adopted children, 253, 259 babies who die before age eight, 97, 228, 254, adoptive parents, 55, 61, 253, 259 258 affiliates, 153, 154, 155, 161, 164–166, 269 babies who died without names, 258 See also certified third-party programs indicating children and babies died before AFN (Ancestral File number), See Ancestral File age eight, 97, 228 AKA, See names of individuals which ordinances are needed, 254 aliases, See names of individuals baptisms for the dead, See ordinances for your Align Family icon, 63, 238, 240 ancestors ancestors BIC (born in the covenant), 247, 254, 259 adding ancestors, 15, 91–102 biological parents combining duplicate records, 167–188 displaying other parents, 55, 61 correcting information, 105–142 ordinances that you should and should not performing temple ordinances for your do, 252, 253 ancestors, 15 birth information, See events policies about performing ordinances for born in the covenant, 247, 254, 259 ancestors, 251–265 brothers, See siblings printing information, 88–89 browsers, 269 searching for deceased ancestors, 82–88 burial information, See events seeing details about ancestors, 66–76 seeing individuals from GEDCOM files, 159 Index

C children (continued) comparing children to determine if records C (abbreviation for “confirmation”), 204, 245 are duplicates, 184 calculated dates, 258 correcting relationships that you did not calendars, 185, 225–229 contribute, 127 canceled sealings, 255, 260 deleting individuals, 106 cards, See family ordinance cards entering last names of children, 96, 221 celebrities, 196, 252 notes about marriage events, relationships, cemetery names, 235 and families, 99, 125, 129, 130 centers, family history, 24, 28, 29, 32 relationship lines between parents and certified third-party programs, 89, 153, 154, children, 241 155, 161, 164, 209, 269 removing individuals from families where See also Personal Ancestral File (PAF) they were not members, 128 benefits of using third-party programs, 153 seeing information about your own certified add-in programs for Personal children, 80 Ancestral File, 161 seeing the children in a family, 57, 58, 65, preparing your information for transfer in a 73, 74 GEDCOM file, 155 sources about marriage events, relationships, printing information, 89 and families, 100, 129, 130 submitting names for temple work, 209 why you may not see all of the information using third-party programs to transfer you expect, 47 information, 154 Chinese, See languages See also Personal Ancestral File (PAF) christening information, See events change log for the new FamilySearch Christian Ecclesiastical calendar, 228 website, 271–288 Church membership records, See LDS Church Change View button, 47, 53, 55, 63 membership records Character Map, 103 city names, 231, 232, 233 child-to-parent sealings, 193, 216, 228, 251, claiming information, 139–142 252, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, clerks, 17, 18 259, 260, 261, 264 columns in lists, 64–65, 65, 203–204, 204 born in the covenant, 254, 259 Combined Records link children sealed to the wrong parents, 260, separating records, 177–179 264 where to find the Combined Records children who die before age eight, 228, 254, link, 68, 69 258 combining records, See duplicate records children with unknown names or who died comments, 147 without names, 258 common questions, 24 correct sequence of ordinances, 259, 260, 261 Completed, 247 how long to wait before performing consultants, family history, 24, 28, 29, 32 ordinances, 256 contact information information required for temple work, 193, appropriate use of contact information, 145 216, 257 seeing contributors’ contact information, 145 missing people, 256, 257 selecting your contact information, 18 ordinances that you should and should not what to do when a contributor does not do, 252 provide contact information, 145 sealing children to divorced parents, 260 contact names sealing children to nonbiological changing contact names, 34, 35, 37 parents, 255, 256, 259 seeing contact names, 145 sealings of the living to the deceased, 251, seeing who reserved an ordinance, 70, 145 253, 256 types of contact names, 78 unmarried parents or parents with contributors, 15, 34, 35, 37, 42, 68, 69, 70, 77, undocumented marriages, 260 78, 105, 108, 139, 145, 147, 167 children, 47, 57, 58, 65, 73, 74, 80, 92, 93, 94, See also discussions 96, 97, 99, 100, 102, 106, 125, 127, appropriate use of contact information, 145 128, 129, 130, 170, 184, 221, 241 claiming information that you submitted to adding children, 92, 93, 94, 102 Ancestral File or the Pedigree Resource changing the relationship type between File, 139–142 parents and children, 97, 106, 129 disputes, 108 combining duplicate children, 170 how “contributors” are different from “submitters”, 42

296 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Index contributors (continued) Data Administrator, 78 how you are listed as a contributor, 34, 35, data entry templates, 95, 212, 221, 223 37 dates, See events participating in discussions, 147 dates of LDS ordinances, See LDS ordinance seeing contributors, 68, 69 information seeing who contributed information, 145 death information, See events seeing who reserved an ordinance, 70, 145 deleting information types of contributor names, 78 individuals, 106 what happens to contributor information marriage events, 124 after you combine records, 167 names, genders, events, and facts, 118 what to do when a contributor does not notes about families, 125 provide contact information, 145 notes about individuals, 119 working on shared family lines, 15, 105, 167 notes about marriage events, relationships, See also discussions and families, 125, 130 correcting information sources about individuals, 119 changing the relationship type between sources about marriage events, relationships, parents and children, 129 and families, 126, 130 claiming previous submissions so you can when you can correct and delete correct the information, 139–142 information, 106 correcting relationships that you did not descendants, See children contribute, 127 details about individuals, 66–76, 241 disputes, 108 icons, 241 information about individuals, 111–119 Details button, 69 information contributed by diacritics, See languages “FamilySearch”, 136 discussions, 15, 145, 147, 148, 149, 150, 167, invalid temple ordinances, 137 177 LDS Church membership records, 133–134 advantages of discussions, 148 LDS Church temple records, 260–262 appropriate use of the discussions feature, 145 looping pedigrees, 132–133 deleting discussions and comments, 149 marriage events, 120–126 editing discussions and comments, 149 missing temple ordinances, 138 participating in discussions, 15 names, gender, events, and facts, 113, 115, reporting misuse of the discussions 117 feature, 150 notes about individuals, 113, 115, 119 what causes discussions to disappear, 150 notes about marriage events, relationships, what happens to discussions when records and families, 122, 125, 130 are combined or separated, 149, 177 proxy ordinances done for living people, 262 display name, 34, 35, 37, 207 selecting correct information about disputing information, 108–110 individuals, 112 district names, 231, 232, 233 sources about individuals, 113, 115, 119 divorces, See marriage events sources about marriage events, relationships, duplicate family ordinance cards, 207 and families, 122, 126, 130 duplicate records, 75, 80, 100, 167, 168, 169, system lets you correct information, 15 177, 186, 198, 216, 261 TempleReady submission files, 216 benefits of combining duplicate records, 167 types of corrections that can be made, 105, contributing information about living 106 Church members, 80 country names definition, 167 entering names of countries, 231, 233 duplicate records that cannot be examples of place-names from different combined, 186–188 countries, 232, 233 duplicate temple records, 261 information required for temple work, 257 finding and combining duplicate why ordinances might have the status “Needs records, 100, 198 more information”, 193 Possible Duplicates button, 75, 169, 216 county names, 231, 232, 233 separating incorrectly combined records, 177– cousins, 80, 253 179 Cyrillic, See languages TempleReady submission files, 216 why the system contains duplicate D records, 168 duplication of ordinances, See ordinances for Danish, See languages your ancestors

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 297 Index duplication of research, See contributors facts, 77, 91, 99, 100, 106, 113, 115, 118, 119, 225, 231 E adding facts, 99, 113 contributors of facts, 77 E (abbreviation for “endowment”), 204, 245 correcting facts, 106, 115 e-mail addresses dates, 225–229 appropriate use of contact information, 145 deleting facts, 106, 118 entering e-mail addresses, 17, 18, 34, 35, 37 how the system helps you enter accurate indicating whether the system can display dates and places, 91 your e-mail address, 38 notes about facts, 77, 99, 113, 119 seeing contributors’ e-mail addresses, 145, places, 231–235 241 sources about facts, 77, 100, 113, 119 what to do when a contributor does not families, 15, 47, 73, 74, 91, 102, 106, 125, 126, provide contact information, 145 127, 128, 129, 130, 153, 170, 184, e-mail notifications, 38, 40, 151–152 189, 190, 216, 241, 251 ecclesiastical jurisdictions, 235 See also child-to-parent sealings endowments, See ordinances for your ancestors adding families, 91–102 Korean, See languages changing the relationship type between events, 68, 77, 82, 88, 91, 97, 99, 100, 106, parents and children, 106, 129 112, 113, 115, 118, 119, 120, 122, combining duplicate family members, 170 124, 185, 193, 207, 216, 225, 231, comparing family members to decide if 257, 258, 261, 269 records are duplicates, 184 See also marriage events correcting relationships from TempleReady adding events, 97, 99, 113, 120 submission files, 216 approximated and calculated dates, 258 correcting relationships that you did not contributors of events, 77 contribute, 127 correcting events, 106, 115, 122 deleting individuals, 106 dates, 225–229 notes about families, 125 deleting events, 106, 118, 124 notes about marriage events, relationships, doing exact searches on dates and places, 88 and families, 125, 129, 130 how the system helps you enter accurate performing temple ordinances for families, 15 dates and places, 91 policies about performing ordinances for information required for temple work, 193, ancestors, 251–265 216, 257, 258 relationship lines between parents and notes about events, 77, 99, 113, 119 children, 241 ordinances done with incorrect event removing individuals from families where information, 207, 261 they were not members, 128 places, 231–235 reserving ordinances, 190–196 selecting correct events, 112 seeing families, 73, 74 selecting the correct version of an event, 68 sources about marriage events, relationships, sources about events, 77, 100, 113, 119 and families, 126, 129, 130 using events to decide if records are when you can correct and delete duplicates, 185 information, 106 using events to search for individuals, 82 why you may not see all of the information See also marriage events you expect about your family, 47 exact searches, 82, 85, 86–88 See also child-to-parent sealings excommunicated members family cards, See family ordinance cards information displayed in the system, 80 family group records performing ordinances for excommunicated printing, 88 members, 255, 256 sealings of the living to the deceased, 253 whether children are born in the viewing family group records, 65 covenant, 254, 259 family history centers, 24, 25, 28, 29, 32, 42, exporting information, 165 214 extraction, 78, 196, 252 handling TempleReady submission files, 42 family history consultants, 24, 25, 28, 29, 32, 42, 214 F finding family history consultants, 25, 28 F.O.R., See Family Ordinance Request handling TempleReady submission files, 42 Family History Library, 24, 28, 29, 32

298 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Index family ordinance cards, 190, 201, 207, 210, Family Tree view (continued) 211, 212, 214 moving the pedigree, 60 assigning ordinances to the temple, 210, 211, printing, 88 212 resizing the pedigree, 59 getting help from family and friends, 210 returning to previously viewed individuals, 59 printing, 190 spouses problems and solutions, 207 why you may not see all of the reprinting, 201 information you expect, 47 using cards printed with a TempleReady straightening the path between disk, 214 generations, 63 Family Ordinance Request, 42, 190, 199, 201, temple icons, 197 210, 211, 212, 214 viewing family group records, 65 assigning ordinances to the temple, 211, 212 what you can do, 49 converting TempleReady submission files to why you may not see all of the information Family Ordinance Requests, 42, 214 you expect, 47 definition, 190 See also Family Pedigree with Details view and printing, 199 Individual List view reprinting, 201 FamilyInsight, 166 sending Family Ordinance Requests to others FamilySearch by e-mail, 210 claiming information that has the contributor Family Pedigree with Details view “FamilySearch”, 141 See also Individual List view and Family Tree correcting information contributed by view “FamilySearch”, 136 changing view screens, 47 FamilySearch Ancestral File, 78 description, 48 FamilySearch as a contributor’s name, 78 displaying details about individuals, 66–76 FamilySearch centers, 24, 28, 29, 32 displaying other spouses and parents, 55 FamilySearch Extraction Program, 78, 141 displaying the Family Pedigree with Details FamilySearch forums, 30 view, 53 FamilySearch Medieval Unit, 78 icons, 237 FamilySearch Pedigree Resource File, 78 looping pedigrees, 132–133 FamilySearch Support moving individuals around, 54 correcting invalid temple ordinances, 260, printing, 88 262, 263, 264 returning to a previously viewed correcting ordinances records, 262 individual, 54 correcting relationships that you did not temple icons, 197 contribute, 127 viewing family group records, 65 correcting relationships when sealing what you can do, 48 ordinances were done, 127 why you may not see all of the information missing ordinance records, 265 you expect, 47 reporting inappropriate information See also Individual List view and Family Tree discussions, 150 view requesting a correction to an individual’s family pedigrees, See Family Pedigree with gender information, 117 Details view and Family Tree view requesting permission to do ordinances for Family Tree view people born before A.D. 1500, 196 See also Family Pedigree with Details view famous people, 196, 252 and Individual List view FAQs, 24 adding more generations, 60 feast dates, 228 changing view screens, 47 feedback, ideas, suggestions, 25, 33 closing generations, 61 female, See gender description, 49 Finnish, See languages displaying ancestors, 56 Firefox, 269 displaying descendants, 57 first names, See names of individuals displaying details about individuals, 66–76 First Presidency approval to do temple displaying other spouses and parents, 61 ordinances, 255, 259 displaying the Family Tree view, 55 Flash Player, 269 highlighting the path back to you, 61 floppy disks from TempleReady, 214, 214–216 icons, 238 focus lists, 162 looping pedigrees, 60 following individuals, See watching individuals moving a couple to the main position, 58 foreign letters and characters, See languages

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 299 Index forums, 30 helper access number, 34, 35, 37, 40 foster children, 253, 259 helping others, 40 foster parents, 55, 61, 253, 259 Highlight icon, 61 French, See languages History button, 54 French Revolutionary calendar, 228 Holocaust victims, 196, 252 frequently asked questions, 24 Home page, 43–44, 245 friends, 253 hospital names, 235 hyphenated names, 94, 96 G I GEDCOM files accepted file types, 153 I (abbreviation for “initiatory”), 204, 245 contributing GEDCOM files, 154 icons, 197, 237–245 converting TempleReady submission files to immediate family members, 80, 190, 192, 196, Family Ordinance Requests, 214–216 252, 253, 255 preparing your information for transfer in a In progress, 204, 206, 247 GEDCOM file, 155 in-laws, 47, 80, 252, 253 reserving ordinances from a GEDCOM Incline Software, 154 file, 159, 192 Individual List view, 47, 50, 63, 64, 65, 66, gender, 47, 68, 69, 77, 82, 94, 99, 100, 106, 199, 203, 204, 240 112, 113, 115, 117, 118, 119, 193, changing view screens, 47 216, 237, 238, 240, 241, 243, 257, 263 description, 50 adding gender information, 94, 113 displaying details about individuals, 66–76 contributors of gender information, 77 displaying the Individual List view, 63–65, correcting gender information, 106, 112, 204 115, 117 icons, 240 deleting gender information, 106, 118 reordering columns in lists, 65, 204 icons used to indicate gender, 237, 238, 240, resizing columns in lists, 64, 203 241, 243 sorting lists, 64 information required for temple work, 193, viewing family group records, 65 216, 257 what you can do, 50 LDS ordinances done for the incorrect individual notes, See notes about individuals gender, 263 individual sources, See sources about individuals notes about gender information, 77, 99, 113, individuals, 15, 38, 40, 63, 66, 75, 91, 94, 96, 119 97, 99, 100, 102, 113, 115, 117, 119, selecting correct information about 128, 147, 151, 153, 159, 167, 177, individuals, 112 189, 190, 193, 195, 198, 216, 251, sources about gender information, 77, 100, 258, 264 113, 119 adding individuals, 15, 91–102 unknown gender, 216, 257 adding names, events, gender, and facts, 94– using gender to search for individuals, 82 96 where information about an individual’s combining duplicate records, 75, 100, 198, gender is displayed, 68, 69 216 why your gender is listed as unknown, 47 correcting and deleting information about German, See languages individuals, 15 given names, See names of individuals correcting names, events, gender, and Go To button, 59 facts, 115, 117, 216 Google maps, 72 discussions and comments, 147 grandchildren, 253, 259 individuals sealed to the wrong spouse or grandparents, 80, 252, 259 parents, 264 Gregorian calendar, 185, 225–226 individuals with unknown names, 96, 258 guardians, 55, 61, 259 notes about individuals, 99, 113, 115, 119 GUIDs, 154 parents with unknown names, 258 performing temple ordinances for H individuals, 15 policies about performing ordinances for Hangul, 223 ancestors, 251–265 See also languages records with the ordinance status “Needs Help Center, 25–33 more information”, 193 help for the system, 24, 28, 29, 32

300 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Index individuals (continued) LDS Church membership records (continued) records with the ordinance status “Not people who requested that their names be Available”, 195 removed from the records of the removing individuals from families where Church, 80, 255 they were not members, 128 where information in the system came reserving ordinances, 159 from, 15, 78 seeing details about individuals, 66–76 LDS Church Temple Records seeing individuals from GEDCOM files, 159 invalid temple ordinances, 137 seeing lists of individuals, 63 missing temple ordinances, 138 separating incorrectly combined records, 177– most complete set of ordinance records, 262 179 solving problems with ordinance sources about individuals, 119 records, 262–265 watching individuals, 38, 40 LDS ordinance information, 15, 70, 80, 137, infants born dead, 97, 254, 258 138, 145, 159, 163, 167, 188, 189, infants who die before age eight, 228, 254, 258 190, 192, 193, 195, 197, 198, 201, International Genealogical Index (IGI) 202, 203, 204, 206, 209, 247, 251, checking for completed ordinances, 262 260, 262, 263, 268 GEDCOM files downloaded directly from the duplication of ordinances, 167, 189, 198, 263 International Genealogical Index, 153 finding ordinances that need to be where information in the system came done, 159, 190, 192, 197 from, 268 handling records that are too large to be Internet connections, 269 combined, 188 Internet Explorer, 269 including ordinance information in GEDCOM files, 163 J invalid temple ordinances, 137 missing temple ordinances, 138 Japanese, See languages most complete set of ordinance records, 262 Jewish Holocaust victims, 196, 252 ordinance statuses, 193, 195, 204, 206, 247 Julian calendar, 225–226 policies about performing ordinances for jurisdictions, 231, 232, 233, 235 ancestors, 251–265 reserving ordinances, 159 seeing a list of reserved ordinances, 202, 203 K seeing ordinance information of deceased kana, 223 people, 70, 201 See also languages seeing ordinance information of living kanji, 223 people, 70, 80 See also languages seeing who reserved an ordinance, 70, 145 solving problems with ordinance records, 260–262 L submitting names with Personal Ancestral File and similar programs, 209 landmarks, 235 what happens after you combine records, 167 languages, 18, 38, 95, 103, 221, 223, 225, 231 where information in the system came entering the characters of different from, 15, 268 languages, 95, 103 LDS Ordinances button, 70, 145, 201 names, dates, and places in different legacy contributors, 139–142 languages, 221–223 Legacy Family Tree, 154, 166 selecting the system language, 18 lines between parents and children, 241 last names, See names of individuals Linux, 269 LDS Account, See registration living people, 70, 79, 80, 81, 82, 160, 163, LDS Church membership records, 15, 78, 80, 186, 190, 192, 196, 216, 251, 253, 133, 141, 186, 187, 255 255, 256, 257, 260, 262 claiming information from membership clearing ordinances for living people, 251, records, 141 256 combining membership records, 186, 187 combining records of living people, 186 contributing information about living getting permission from living relatives to do Church members, 80 ordinances for recently deceased correcting errors, 133–134 individuals, 190, 192, 196, 255 excommunicated members, 80, 255 including living people in GEDCOM files, 160, 163

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 301 Index living people (continued) membership clerks, 17, 18 information used to determine if individuals membership record numbers, 17, 18, 21 are deceased, 82, 257 membership records, See LDS Church living people in TempleReady submission membership records files, 216 merging records, See duplicate records living people who are incorrectly shown as middle names, See names of individuals deceased, 80 missing in action, 256 proxy ordinances done for living missing people, 256, 257 people, 260, 262 Mozilla, 269 sealing individuals to more than one multimedia in GEDCOM files, 160, 163 spouse, 260 multiple contributors, 77 sealings of the living to the deceased, 251, Multiple name fields option on the Search 253, 256 page, 38, 82 seeing information about living people, 79, 80 N seeing ordinance information, 70 lock icons, 211 names of contributors, See contributors logging in, See signing in names of individuals, 68, 69, 77, 82, 88, 94, logging out, See signing out 96, 99, 100, 101, 106, 112, 113, 115, looping pedigrees, 60, 132–133 118, 119, 184, 193, 207, 221, 223, lost at sea, 256 257, 258, 261 lunar calendars, 185, 226 adding names, 94–96 comparing names to decide if records are M duplicates, 184 contributors of names, 77 Macintosh computers, 269 correcting names, 106, 115 maiden and married names, 96, 221 deleting names, 106, 118 maiden names and married names, 257 doing exact searches on names of mailing addresses individuals, 88 appropriate use of contact information, 145 entering the characters of different changing your mailing address, 207 languages, 96, 221 entering mailing addresses, 18 guidelines and examples, 221–223 indicating whether the system can display individuals with multiple names, 96, 99, 113, your mailing address, 38 184, 221, 223 seeing contributors’ mailing addresses, 145 information required for temple work, 193, what to do when a contributor does not 257 provide contact information, 145 maiden and married names, 96, 99, 221 main position, 54, 58, 238 nicknames and aliases, 99, 221 male, See gender notes about names, 77, 99, 113, 119 manual of instructions, 25, 269 ordinances done with misspelled names, 207, Map button, 72 261 marriage events, 73, 74, 77, 106, 120, 122, same name recorded many ways, 96, 99, 184, 124, 125, 126, 216, 229, 269 221, 223 See also events seeing names, 69 adding marriage events, 120 selecting correct names, 68, 112 contributors of marriage events and siblings with the same name, 184 families, 77 sources about names, 77, 100, 113, 119 correcting marriage events, 106, 122 spelling differences, 223 deleting marriage events, 106, 124 typing slashes (/) around last names, 96, 221 marriage events for couples with unknown names, 96, 221, 258 undocumented marriages, 229 using names to search for individuals, 82 marriage places that are not standardized, 216 verifying name parts, 101 notes about marriage events, relationships, why names are important, 94, 221 and families, 77, 125 names that the system uses to identify you seeing marriage events, 73, 74 contact names, 34, 35, 37 sources about marriage events, relationships, display names, 34, 35, 37, 207 and families, 77, 126 user names, 17, 18, 34, 35, 37 See also events Needs more information, 193, 247 match/merge, See duplicate records nicknames, See names of individuals Medieval time period, 196 nomadic peoples, 235

Norwegian, See languages ordinances for your ancestors (continued) Not available, 247 211, 212, 216, 251, 253, 254, 255, Not Available, 195 256, 257, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 265 Not needed, 247 assigning ordinances to the temple or Not ready, 247 yourself, 204, 211, 212 notes about disputes, 108 avoiding duplication of ordinances, 15, 167, notes about individuals, 68, 69, 77, 99, 113, 189, 198 115, 118, 119, 160, 163, 167, 241 combining duplicate ordinance records, 261, adding notes, 99, 113, 115, 119 263, 265 correcting notes, 119 correct sequence of ordinances, 259, 260, 261 definition of notes, 99 finding ordinances that need to be done, 197 deleting notes, 118, 119 getting help from family and friends, 210 including notes in GEDCOM files, 160, 163 handling records that are too large to be notes icon, 241 combined, 188 reporting inappropriate notes, 119 how long to wait before performing seeing notes, 68, 69, 77 ordinances, 256 tagged notes, 163 missing people, 257 what happens to notes after you combine monitoring the completion of records, 167 ordinances, 202–207 notes about marriage events, relationships, most complete set of ordinance records, 262 and families obtaining permission to do ordinances for adding notes, 120, 122, 125, 126, 129, 130 people born in the last 95 years, 190, 192, correcting notes, 125, 126, 130 196, 255 definition of notes, 99 ordinances that are not needed, 254 deleting notes, 125, 126, 130 performing temple ordinances for your including notes in GEDCOM files, 160, 163 ancestors, 15 notes icon, 241 policies about performing ordinances for reporting inappropriate notes, 125, 130 ancestors, 251–265 seeing notes, 77 providing baptisms for youth temple tagged notes, 163 trips, 210 what happens to notes after you combine proxy ordinances done for a living records, 167 person, 262 notifications by e-mail, 38, 40, 151–152 records with the ordinance status “Needs numbers more information”, 193 See also telephone numbers records with the ordinance status “Not Ancestral File numbers (AFNs), 82, 92 Available”, 195 helper access numbers, 34, 35, 37, 40 required information, 193, 216 mailing addresses reserving ordinances, 159 entering mailing addresses, 17 sealings of the living to the deceased, 253 membership record numbers, 17, 18, 21, 34, seeing a list of reserved ordinances, 202, 203 35, 37 selecting ordinances, 199 person identifiers, 68, 69, 82, 92 solving problems with ordinance records, 263 See also telephone numbers validity of ordinances, 260–262 ordinances might be needed, 237, 238, 241 O other parents, 55, 92, 93, 94, 237 other spouses, 55, 237, 238 On hold, 204, 206, 247 overviews, 269 operating systems, 269 options menu, 241 P ordinance cards, See family ordinance cards ordinance duplication, See ordinances for your PAF (Personal Ancestral File), See Personal ancestors Ancestral File ordinances are ready, 237, 238, 241 parents, 47, 55, 61, 65, 73, 74, 80, 82, 92, 93, ordinances are reserved or in process, 238 94, 97, 99, 100, 102, 106, 125, 127, ordinances completed, 237, 238, 241 128, 129, 130, 170, 173, 174, 182, ordinances for your ancestors, 15, 159, 167, 184, 229, 237, 241 188, 189, 190, 192, 193, 195, 196, adding parents, 92, 93, 94, 102 197, 198, 199, 202, 203, 204, 210, changing the relationship type between parents and children, 97, 106, 129 combining duplicate parents, 170, 173, 174

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 303 Index parents (continued) Personal Ancestral File (PAF) (continued) comparing parents to determine if records See also certified third-party programs are duplicates, 184 places, See events correcting relationships that you did not plural marriage, 255 contribute, 127 policies deleting individuals, 106 avoiding duplication of ordinances, 190 family line disappeared or changed after individuals with unknown names, 96, 258 combining records, 182 policies about performing ordinances for notes about marriage events, relationships, ancestors, 251–265 and families, 99, 125, 129, 130 privacy policy, 16 other parents, 55, 61 polygamy, 255 relationship lines between parents and pop-up screens and pop-up blockers, 18 children, 241 possible duplicates, See duplicate records removing individuals from families where Possible Duplicates button, 75, 169, 216 they were not members, 128 pre-1500, 196 seeing individuals’ parents, 61, 65, 73, 74 preferences, 38 seeing information about your own preferred name, See display name parents, 80 preparing your information for transfer in a sources about marriage events, relationships, GEDCOM file, 155 and families, 100, 129, 130 presumed dead, 256 unmarried parents or parents with priesthood leaders, 32 undocumented marriages, 229 printing information using parents’ names to search for family group records and pedigrees, 88–89 individuals, 82 family ordinance cards, 199, 207 why you may not see all of the information Family Ordinance Request, 199, 201, 214 you expect, 47 printing with third-party computer Parents and Siblings button, 73, 241 programs, 89 parishes, 235 privacy policy, 16 passwords, 17, 18, 22, 23, 34, 35, 37 privacy rights, See living people pedigree charts, See Family Pedigree with Details profile, See user profile view and Family Tree view provinces, 231, 232, 233 Pedigree Resource File claiming information that you submitted to Q the Pedigree Resource File, 139–142 FamilySearch Pedigree Resource File showing Quick Start Guides, 25, 269 as a contributor name, 78 GEDCOM files downloaded directly from the Pedigree Resource File, 153 R where information in the system came Ready, 247 from, 15, 267 records, See individuals pedigrees, See Family Pedigree with Details view region names, 231, 232, 233 and Family Tree view registration, 16 permission to do temple ordinances for relationships, 56, 57, 58, 65, 66, 73, 74, 77, ancestors, 190, 192, 196, 255–256 97, 99, 100, 125, 127, 129, 130, 193, person identifiers, 68, 69, 82, 92 216, 241, 257 Personal Ancestral File (PAF), 153, 154, 155, changing the relationship type between 161, 162, 163, 166, 209, 269 parents and children, 97, 129 See also certified third-party programs correcting and deleting family accepted file types, 153 relationships, 127–130 certified add-in programs, 161 correcting relationships that you did not creating focus lists, 162 contribute, 127 creating GEDCOM files, 162, 163, 166 information required for temple work, 193, preparing your information for transfer in a 216, 257 GEDCOM file, 155 notes about marriage events, relationships, reasons to use Personal Ancestral File, 153 and families, 99, 125, 129, 130 submitting names for temple work, 209 Parents and Siblings button, 73 transferring information to the new relationship lines between parents and FamilySearch website, 154 children, 241 transferring information to third-party seeing contributors, notes, and sources about programs, 166 relationships, 77

304 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Index relationships (continued) sisters, See siblings seeing family relationships, 56, 57, 58, 65 slashes (/) in names, 96, 221 sources about marriage events, relationships, sources about individuals, 65, 68, 69, 77, 88, and families, 100, 129, 130 100, 113, 115, 118, 119, 160, 163, 167 Spouses and Children button, 74 adding notes, 115 removing disputes, 108 adding sources, 100, 113, 119 reporting misuse of the discussions feature, 150 benefits of adding sources, 100 Reserved, 204, 206, 207, 247 correcting sources, 119 reserved ordinances list, 202, 203 definition of sources, 100 reserving ordinances, 70, 145, 190–196, 208 deleting sources, 118, 119 See also ordinances for your ancestors including sources in GEDCOM files, 160, 163 seeing who reserved an ordinance, 70, 145 seeing sources, 68, 69, 77 what to do when a contributor does not sources on family group records, 65, 88 provide contact information, 145 what happens to sources after you combine See also ordinances for your ancestors records, 167 resolution of your computer screen, 269 sources about marriage events, relationships, Reunion, 154 and families rights of privacy, See living people adding sources, 120, 122, 129, 130 RootsMagic, 154, 166 benefits of adding sources, 100 rural areas, 235 correcting sources, 130 definition of sources, 100 S deleting sources, 130 including sources in GEDCOM files, 160, 163 Safari, 269 seeing sources, 77 Scandinavian, See languages sources on family group records, 65, 88 screen resolution settings, 269 what happens to sources after you combine sealings, See child-to-parent sealings records, 167 searching for individuals Soviet calendar, 228 adding individuals who are already in the SP (abbreviation for “sealing to parents”), 204, system to your family line, 92 245 exact searches, 82, 85 special characters, See diacritics finding information about living people, 79 spouse sealings, 106, 193, 216, 251, 252, 253, searching for an individual using name, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261, 264 gender, events, and other information, 82 canceled sealings, 255 searching for possible duplicates, 175 correct sequence of ordinances, 259, 260, 261 searching with Ancestral File numbers divorced couples, 260 (AFNs), 82 how long to wait before performing selecting whether you see a single name field ordinances, 256, 260 or multiple name fields on the Search individuals sealed to the wrong spouse or page, 38 parents, 260, 264 techniques for refining searches, 85 information required for temple work, 193, using search results, 82, 85 216, 257 seeing family relationships, 66 missing people, 256, 257 separating records, 177–179 ordinances that you should and should not serial numbers, 154 do, 252 Show Ancestors icon, 56, 58, 238, 240 sealing individuals to more than one Show Descendants icon, 57, 58, 238, 240 spouse, 260 siblings, 65, 73, 74, 92, 93, 94, 170, 184, 253 sealings of the living to the deceased, 251, adding siblings, 92, 93, 94 253, 256 combining duplicate siblings, 170 spouses with unknown names, 258 comparing siblings to determine if records unmarried parents or parents with are duplicates, 184 undocumented marriages, 260 sealings of the living to the deceased, 253 spouses seeing siblings, 65, 73, 74 adding spouses, 92, 93, 94, 102 siblings with the same name, 184 combining duplicate spouses, 170, 173, 174 sign-in name, See user names comparing spouses to determine if records signing in, 20 are duplicates, 184 signing out, 20 deleting individuals, 106 Single name field option on the Search family line disappeared or changed after page, 38, 82 combining records, 182

New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) © 2007, 2011 IRI 305 Index spouses (continued) Temple Ordinances list (continued) other spouses, 55, 61, 80, 237, 238 canceling the reservation of ordinances, 208 removing individuals from families where icons, 238, 243 they were not members, 128 monitoring completion of ordinances, 202– seeing individuals’ spouses, 61, 65, 73, 74 207 unmarried parents or parents with ordinance abbreviations, 204, 245 undocumented marriages, 229 printing and reprinting family ordinance using names of spouses to search for requests and family ordinance cards, 199, individuals, 82 201 Spouses and Children button, 74, 241 printing the Temple Ordinances list, 199 SS (abbreviation for “sealing to spouse”), 204, reordering columns in lists, 65, 204 245 resizing columns in lists, 64, 203 standards for dates, 91, 225–229 seeing the Temple Ordinances list, 202 standards for places, 91, 231–235 sorting lists, 203 states, 231, 232, 233 See also Individual List view stepchildren, 259 temple schedules, driving directions, and so stepparents, 253, 259 forth, 218 stillborn infants, 97, 228, 254, 258 TempleReady, 213–216 submitters, 42 third-party computer programs, See certified See also contributors third-party programs Summary button on an individual’s details, 68, Time Line button, 71 112 titles, 96, 221 Summary icon on the Family Tree view, 238, tribal peoples, 235 240 tutorials, 25 support, 25–33 surnames, See names of individuals U Swedish, See languages synchronization, 154, 161, 164–166 uncles, 80, 253 System Generated, 78 undispute, 108 unique record serial numbers, 153, 154 T unknown contributors, 78, 141 unknown gender, 216, 257, 263 tagged notes, 163 unknown names, 96, 221, 258 technical support, 25–33 unknown4470317, 141 telephone numbers, 18, 25, 30, 34, 35, 37, 38, unmarried couples, 229, 260 145, 207 unreserving ordinances, 208 appropriate use of contact information, 145 uploading GEDCOM files, 154, 155, 156–161 entering telephone numbers, 18, 34, 35, 37 URL, 15 FamilySearch Support, 25, 30 user names, 17, 18, 21, 22, 34, 35, 37 indicating whether the system can display changing user names, 34, 35, 37 your telephone number, 38 choosing user names, 17, 18 seeing contributors’ telephone numbers, 145 finding forgotten user names, 21, 22 telephone numbers on family ordinance user profile, 18, 34, 35, 37, 40, 207 cards, 207 changing the name, address, or telephone what to do when a contributor does not number printed on family ordinance provide contact information, 145 cards, 207 templates, 95, 212, 221, 223 changing your user profile, 34, 35, 37 temple cards, See family ordinance cards finding your helper access number, 40 Temple File, 211 user profile created during registration, 18 temple icons, 197 user’s guide, 25, 269 temple list, See Temple Ordinances list utility programs, See certified third-party temple ordinance information, See LDS programs ordinance information temple ordinances, See ordinances for your V ancestors Temple Ordinances list, 64, 65, 199, 201, 202, validity of ordinances, 260, 262 203, 204, 208, 211, 212, 238, 243, 245 See also Individual List view assigning ordinances to the temple or W yourself, 211, 212 warning icon, 241, 243

306 © 2007, 2011 IRI New FamilySearch Website: User’s Guide (Latter-day Saint Version) Index watching individuals, 38, 40, 151–152 Y Web address, 15 Windows Character Map, 103 youth temple trips, 210 Windows operating systems, 269 Z

Zoom bar, 59, 238, 240